Home

EJX910A and EJX930A Fieldbus Communication Type

1. Ba Parameter Name Sub Seid ok Name dno Access Remarks 370 PLME_BASIC_ 0 R CHARACTERISTICS 1 ChannelStatisticsSupported 0x00 2 MediumAndDataRatesSupported 0x4900000000000000 3 lecVersion 1 0x1 4 NumOfChannels 1 0x1 5 PowerMode 0 0x0 371 CHANNEL STATES 0 R 1 channel 1 0 0x0 2 channel 2 128 0x80 3 channel 3 128 0x80 4 channel 4 128 0x80 5 channel 5 128 0x80 6 channel 6 128 0x80 7 channel 7 128 0x80 8 channel 8 128 0x80 372 PLME BASIC INFO 0 R 1 InterfaceMode 0 0x0 2 LoopBackMode 0 0x0 3 XmitEnabled 1 0x1 4 RcvEnabled 1 0x1 5 PreferredReceiveChannel 1 0x1 6 MediaTypeSelected 73 0x49 7 ReceiveSelect 1 0x1 373 LINK SCHEDULE ACTIVATION VARIABLE 0 0x0 RW 374 LINK SCHEDULE LIST 0 R CHARACTERISTICS 1 NumofSchedules 0 RECORD 2 NumOfSubSchedulesPerSchedule 1 3 ActiveScheduleVersion 0 4 ActiveSheduleOdindex 0 5 ActiveScheduleStartingTime 0 375 DLME SCHEDULE 0 R DESCRIPTOR 1 1 Version 0 2 MacrocycleDuration 0 3 TimeResolution 0 376 DLME SCHEDULE 0 R DESCRIPTOR 2 1 Version 0 2 MacrocycleDuration 0 3 TimeResolution 0 377 DOMAIN 1 Read write impossible Get OD possible 378 DOMAIN 2 Read write impossible Get OD possible TA0205 2 EPS A 57 IM 01C25R03 01E A6 5 2 Descriptions for LM Parameters The following describes LM parameters of an EJX multivariable transmitter NOTE
2. Block Name Parameter PARAMETER_SEL Display SENSOR PRIMARY_VALUE PRIMARY VALUE PV TRANSDUCER SECONDARY_VALUE SECONDARY VALUE SP HI TERTIARY_VALUE TERTIARY VALUE SP LO EXT_TEMP_VAL EXT TMP VALUE EXT TMP CAP_TEMP_VAL CAP TEMP VALUE CAP TMP APM_TEMP_VAL APM TEMP VALUE AMP TMP FLG_TEMP_VAL FLG TEMP VALUE FLG TMP FLOW TRANSDUCER FLOW_VALUE FLOW VALUE FLOW AH PV Ali PV PV OUT Al OUT OUT FIELD_VAL Al FIELD VAL FLD VAL Al2 PV Al2 PV PV OUT Al2 OUT OUT FIELD_VAL Al2 FIELD VAL FLD VAL Al3 PV Al3 PV PV OUT Al3 OUT OUT FIELD_VAL AI3 FIELD VAL FLD VAL Al4 PV Al4 PV PV OUT Al4 OUT OUT FIELD_VAL Al4 FIELD VAL FED VAL AI5 PV AI5 PV PV OUT AI5 OUT OUT FIELD_VAL Al5 FIELD VAL FED VAL PID SP PID SP SP PV PID PV PV OUT PID OUT OUT IN PID IN IN CAS IN PID CAS IN CAS IN BKCAL IN PID BKCAL IN BKC IN BKCAL OUT PID BKCAL OUT BKC OUT RCAS IN PID RCAS IN RCAS IN ROUT IN PID ROUT IN ROUT IN RCAS OUT PID RCAS OUT RCA OUT ROUT OUT PID ROUT OUT ROU OUT FF VAL PID FF VAL FF VAL TRK VAL PID TRK VAL TRK VAL AR OUT AR OUT OUT IN AR IN IN IN LO AR INLO IN LO IN1 AR IN 1 IN1 IN2 AR IN 2 IN2 IN3 AR IN 3 IN3 IT OUT IT OUT OUT IN1 IT IN 1 IN1 IN2 IT IN 2 IN2 SC OUT 1 SC OUT 1 OUT 1 OUT 2 SC OUT2 OUT 2 IN 1 SC IN 1 IN1 IN 2 SC IN 2 IN2 IS OUT IS OUT OUT IN 1 IS IN 1 IN1 IN 2 IS IN 2 IN2 IN 3 IS IN 3 INS IN 4 IS IN 4 IN4 IN 5 IS IN 5 IN5 IN 6 IS IN 6 IN6 IN_7 IS IN 7 IN7 IN
3. aa Parameter Mnemonic bru MINE VIEW VIENT 34 SHED_OPT 35 RCAS OUT 36 ROUT OUT 37 TRK SCALE 38 TRK_IN_D 39 TRK VAL 40 FF VAL 41 FF SCALE 42 FF GAIN 43 UPDATE_EVT 44 BLOCK ALM 45 ALARM SUM 8 46 ACK OPTION 47 ALARM HYS 48 HI HI PRI 49 HI HI LIM 50 HI PRI 51 HI_LIM 52 LO PRI 53 LO_LIM 54 LO_LO PRI 55 LO_LO LIM 56 DV HI PRI 1 57 DV HI LIM 4 58 DV LO PRI 1 59 DV_LO LIM 4 60 HI_HI_ALM 61 HI_ALM 62 LO ALM 63 LO LO ALM 64 DV HI ALM 65 DV LO ALM Subtotals 15 0 30 63 Totals 43 43 83 104 TA0113 2 EPS A 52 APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 6 LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS APPENDIX 6 LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS A6 1 Link Active Scheduler A link active scheduler LAS is a deterministic centralized bus scheduler that can control communications on an H1 fieldbus segment There is only one LAS on an H1 fieldbus segment An EJX multivariable transmitter supports the following LAS functions PN transmission Identifies a fieldbus device newly connected to the same fieldbus segment PN is short for Probe Node PT transmission Passes a token governing the right to transmit to a fieldbus device on the same segment PT is short for Pass Token CD transmission Carry out a scheduled transmission to a fieldbus device on the same segment CD is short for Compel Data Time synchronization Periodically t
4. DISABLE_3 OFF DISABLE_4 OFF DISABLE_5 OFF DISABLE_6 OFF DISABLE_7 OFF DISABLE_8 OFF OP SELECT 0 NN SELECT TYPE First Good STATUS OPTS MIN GOOD 1 Figure A3 4 Example 3 OUT 34 5 SELECTED 2 FA0304 EPS Because DISABLE 1 is ON IN 1 is disabled and IN 2 is selected for output If DISABLE 1 is turned OFF the output changes from IN 2 to IN 1 That is the valid IN with the smaller input number is always selected for output A 26 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK When SELECT TYPE is Minimum The IS block selects the input with the minimum value among valid inputs and transmits the value of that input to OUT The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED SELECTION N1 28 RGG NOREK p OUT 2 34 IN3 45 IN4 234 KE IA gt SELECTED 4 IN6 15 5 IN7 325 ISA le SELECT TYPE Minimum DISABLE 1 OFF p M STATUS OPTS DISABLE 2 OFF 4 MIN GOOD 1 DISABLE 32 OFF O DISABLE 42 OFF gt DISABLE 52 OFF O DISABLE 62 OFF DISABLE 72 OFF gt DISABLE 8
5. DIAG_ERR Bit Alarm status T 4 i 22g ala 0 Not used 1 Not used 2 A Blocking NN 3 Large Fluctuation of Low Side V 4 Large Fluctuation of High Side V 5 Low Side Blocking V 6 High Side Blocking Y 7 B Blocking vy v 8 Invalid Ref BIKF Viv 9 Invalid Ref fSPh Y 10 Invalid Ref fSPI Y 11 Invalid Ref fDP Viv 12 Outside Diagnosis Range Y V 13 Flg Temp Low Alarm Y 14 Fig Temp High Alarm V 15 Reflect Blockage to PV SV TV status TA0806 EPS Note The bit 13 and 14 are used for Heat trace monitorig function Outside Diagnosis Range 1 dpavgmax The dpavgmax DIAG_LIM 9 is the upper limit of the diagnostic capability range The limit value can be changed when DIAG_MODE is Stop VALUE_DPAVG indicates the ratio of the average of differential pressure to the EJX maximum span regarded as 1 When VALUE_DPAVG exceeds this limit Outside Diagnosis Range is generated so that the blockage detection becomes impossible 2 dpavgmin The dpavgmin DIAG_LIM 10 is the lower limit of the diagnostic capability range The limit value can be changed when DIAG_MODE is Stop When VALUE_DPAVG is below this limit Outside Diagnosis Range is generated so that the blockage detection becomes impossible IM 01C25R03 01E lt Example gt When the level range that can be measured by the transmitter with 100 kPa span is 80 to 80 kPa the limit
6. a Parameter Write Mode Valid Range Initial Value we i Description Remarks 0 BLOCK HEADER O S TAG AR Information relating to this function block such as block tag DD revision and execution time Indicates the revision level of the set parameters associated with the Arithmetic 1 ST_REV block If a setting is modified this revision is updated It is used to check for parameter changes etc 2 TAG_DESC A universal parameter that stores comments describing tag information 3 STRATEGY A universal parameter intended for use by a high level system to identify function blocks Key information used to identify the location at which an alert has occurred 4 ALERT_KEY Generally this parameter is used by a high level system to identify specific areas in a plant that are under the control of specific operators to separate necessary alerts only This is one of the universal parameters 5 MODE BLK A universal parameter representing the operation status of the Arithmetic block It consists of the Actual Target Permit and Normal modes Indicates the error status relating to the Arithmetic block 6 BLOCK ERR The bit used by this function block is as follows Bit 1 Block Configuration Error Bit 15 O S mode 7 PV The result of a range extension function is substituted into this When viewed from the computing equation PV is the main input 8 OUT MAN Block output 9 PRE_OUT Always indicates the calculation result
7. Relative Factory Write z Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 0 2000 Block Header TAG STB Block Tag Information on this block such as Block Tag DD Revision O S Execution Time etc 1 2001 ST REV The revision level of the static data associated with the function block The revision value will be incremented each time a static parameter value in the block is changed 2002 TAG_DESC Null AUTO The user description of the intended application of the block 2003 STRATEGY 1 AUTO The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks This data is not checked or processed by the block 4 2004 ALERT_KEY 1 AUTO The identification number of the plant unit This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms etc 5 2005 MODE_BLK AUTO AUTO The actual target permitted and normal modes of the block 2006 BLOCK_ERR This parameter reflects the error status associated with hardware or software components associated with a block It is a bit string so that multiple errors may be shown 7 2007 UPDATE_EVT This alert is generated by any change to the static data 2008 BLOCK_ALM The block alarm is used for all configuration hardware connection failure or system problems in the block The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute 9 2009 TRANSDUCER A
8. LCD of Alarm SENSOR TB FLOW TB 1 Cause of Alarm Displa SV STATUS EXT TEMP CAP TEMP AMP TEMP FLOW ii BLOCK ERR BLOCK ERR XD ERROR PVSTATUS qySTATUS VAL STATUS VAL STATUS VAL STATUS VALUE STATUS AL 01 Pressure Sensor other I O Failure BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor CAP ERR problem m Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Capsule other I O Failure BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor Temperature Sensor Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Capsule memory Lost NV Date other I O Failure BAD Device BAD Device BAD Sensor BAD Device BAD Device BAD Device problem Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure AL 02 Amplifier m other Electronics BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor BAD Sensor AMP ERR Temperature Sensor Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Amplifier memory Lost NV Date other Electronics BAD Device BAD Device BAD Device BAD Device BAD Device BAD Device problem Lost Static Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Data Amplifier problem other Electronics BAD Device BAD Device BAD Device BAD Device BAD Device BAD Device Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure AL 03 External temperature other Mechanical BAD Device BAD Device ET ERR sensor disconnection Failure m Failure m m Failure AL 10 Input Pressure is U
9. T0902 7 EPS 9 10 IM 01C25R03 01E 9 4 LCD Transducer Block 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 0 2500 Block Header TAG LTB Block Tag Information on this block such as Block Tag DD Revision O S Execution Time etc 1 2501 ST REV The revision level of the static data associated with the function block The revision value will be incremented each time a static parameter value in the block is changed 2502 TAG_DESC Null O S The user description of the intended application of the block 2503 STRATEGY 1 O S The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks This data is not checked or processed by the block 4 2504 ALERT KEY 1 O S The identification number of the plant unit This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms etc 2505 MODE BLK AUTO O S The actual target permitted and normal modes of the block 2506 BLOCK ERR This parameter reflects the error status associated with hardware or software components associated with a block It is a bit string so that multiple errors may be shown 2507 UPDATE_EVT This alert is generated by any change to the static data 2508 BLOCK_ALM The block alarm is used for all configuration hardware connection failure or system problems in the block The cause of the alert is entered i
10. SELECTION IN 1 23 p gt IN_2 34 5 p gt OUT certain retained IN_3 45 gt value that was output previously IN_4 2 34 p IN_5 23 6 gt gt SELECTED 0 IN_6 15 5 p gt IN_7 32 5 gt 27 gt A APE SELECT TYPE Middle DISABLE TAON a STATUS OPTS DISABLE 2 ON p gt MIN GOODS S DISABLE_3 OFF p gt DISABLE 4 ON p DISABLE_5 OFF p gt DISABLE_6 ON p DISABLE_7 ON p DISABLE 8 ON p OP_SELECT 1 p gt FA0302 EPS Figure A3 2 Example 1 This example restricts the valid inputs using DISABLE_n and the inputs are enabled only at DISABLE_3 and DISABLE_5 Because the effective number of MIN_Good is 3 the input specified by OP_SELECT will not be output A 24 IM 01C25R03 01E A3 3 Selecti on APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK The following processing is performed after completing input processing If the number of valid inputs is less than the value of MIN_Good no input selection is made A3 3 1 OP_SELECT Handling When a value other than 0 that is 1 to 8 is selected for OP SELECT The IS block selects the input of the number specified by OP_SELECT regardless of the setting of SELECT_TYPE propagates the value of that input to OUT and transmits the input number to SELECTED IN_1 23 IN_2 34 5 IN_3 45 IN_4 2 34 IN_5 23 6 IN_6 15 5 IN_7 32
11. A 90 TA0814 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E A8 3 Heat Trace Monitoring The EJX with Heat trace monitoring function calcu lates the flange temperature by using the two tempera ture sensors built in the EJX An analog alert is generated if the temperature reached to the preset level The flange temperature is based on the following parameters and calculation formula Parameters Parameter name Explanation CAP_TEMP_VAL CT Measured capsule temperature value AMP_TEMP_VAL AT Measured amplifier temperature value FLG_TEMP_VAL FT Flange temperature value Calculated value FLG TEMP COEFF Cf Coefficient to calculate flange temperature FLG TEMP H LIM Threshold to generate Flg Temp High Alarm FLG TEMP L LIM Threshold to generate Flg Temp Low Alarm TA0815 EPS Calculation formula FLG TEMP VAL FT CT Cr X CT AT The FLG TEMP VAL FT is assigned to Process Value PV in the AI function block If the flange temperature exceeds the value preset to the HI LIM APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC A NOTE The flange temperature is calculated by the calculation formula assumed that the capsule part of EJX is heated up or kept warm by an electrical heater or steam In the case of an atmosphere temperature or less the difference of temperature of approximately 3 to 4 C may occur because the amplifier temperature be comes higher than the capsule temperature A8 3 1
12. eeeesssssseseeeeeenennn entren A 48 Ab 11 Setpoint LIMITES csse ceret co ru Eod Ced te eee Eus A 48 A5 11 1 When PID Block Is in Auto Mode n se A 48 A5 11 2When PID Block Is in Cas or RCas Mode A 48 A5 12 External output Tracking sssssseeeeeeeenn A 48 A5 13Measured value Tracking eeeenen A 48 iv IM 01C25R03 01E CONTENTS A5 14 Initialization and Manual Fallback IMan A 49 AC To Manual Fallback accen cena ne a A EE A de A 49 A5 16AUto Fallback adobe z ro waza da ticus tec dE EA A 49 A5 17 Mode Shedding upon Computer Failure e s ssssssaeesaaas A 50 AD PA SHED OR Ws itte oot tete Gees A 50 AS TS ALAIN rriei anaa ea Eaa a a NAAR A 50 A5 18 1 Block Alarm BLOCK_ALM sseeeem A 50 A5 18 2Process Alarms seo a dA APRA Papa P dA AKA A 50 A5 19Example of Block Connections scimi sssrinin A 51 A5 20 View Object for PID Function Block ssseasaeeaa aaa aaaaaczaaca A 51 APPENDIX 6 LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS sssssssssa ao oooooococeeewe A 53 A6 1 Link Active Scheduler ssesee eee ea aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aenaaa A 53 AG EMK MASTE ci rette e de t bangs ues A A AR A A 53 A6 3 Transfer of LAS e eee eee entente A 54 A6 4 LM FUNCHON S cscs ies a A JAA aaa RR ARE RAN RES A 55 A6 5 LM Parameters uet ZO ZZA WA PE nre Pa
13. AFTER DE l PNERGIZING DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE OPEI WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP USE THE HEAT RESISTING BE 90 C No KEMA OGATEX0278 X EEx ia IBMIC T4 Tamb 40 T ESS TEMP T ees tp BOC 100 Co 100 Fo T120 C Tp 120 C Enclosure IP66 and IP67 FISCO Field device IC FISCO Field device iB Entity Parameters Ui 1 Ui 2 Ui 17 5 7 5 pie T AGORA 250mA Pi 5 32W Pi 5 82W Pi 1 2W Ci 176nF Ci 1 76nF Ci 1 76nF Li 0uH Li 0nH Li 0pH F0202 EPS MODEL Specified model code STYLE Style code SUFFIX Specified suffix code SUPPLY Supply voltage OUTPUT Output signal MWP Maximum working pressure CAL RNG Specified calibration range NO Serial number and year of production YOKOGAWA TOKYO 180 8750 JAPAN The manufacturer name and the address 1 The first digit in the final three numbers of the serial number appearing after NO on the name plate indicates the year of production The follow ing is an example of a serial number for a product that was produced in 2008 12A819857 832 The year 2008 2 180 8750 is the Zip code for the following address 2 9 32 Nakacho Musashino shi Tokyo Japan IM 01C25R03 01E 2 1 4 IECEx Certification a IECEx Flameproof Type Caution for IECEx flameproof type Note 1 EJX multivariable transmitters with optional code SF2 are applicable for use in hazardous locations No IECEx CSA 07 0008 Applicable Stan
14. FA0101 EPS Figure A1 1 Signal Characterizer Block Input Output Parameters Inputs a signal desired to be corrected using a line segment function IRE It is substituted for X of the line segment function Input P Inputs a signal desired to be corrected using a line segment function IN 2 If SWAP 2 off it is substituted for X of the line segment function If SWAP 2 on it is substituted for Y of the line segment function OUT 1 Outputs the result of the IN 1 input that has been corrected using the line segment function z The function block outputs the value of Y corresponding to IN_1 Outputs the result of the IN_2 input that has been corrected using the line segment function The output can also be approximated using the inverse function of the specified line segment OUT_2 function This is used for backward control If SWAP 2 off the value of Y corresponding to X of IN_1 is output If SWAP_2 on the value of X corresponding to Y of IN_1 is output Output The points of the curve determining inputs and outputs CURVE_X The x points of the curve are defined by an array of 1 to 21 points with a monotone increase INFINITY is configured for unused point s The points of the curve determining inputs and outputs The y points of the curve are defined by an array of 1 to 21 points If SWAP 2 on the elements of the curve are defined with a monotone increase or decrea
15. Statuses of Input Bit 4 of INTEG_OPTS Bit 5 of INTEG OPTS Status of Input Values Parameters IN_1 IN_2 Use Uncertain Use Bad Handled in IT Block Good Irrelevant Irrelevant Good Bad Irrelevant H 1 Good Bad Irrelevant L 0 Bad Uncertain H 1 Irrelevant Good Uncertain L 0 Irrelevant Bad TA0201 EPS For addition see A2 3 if the status of an input value is Bad the Good value just before the status changed to Bad is used Even if the Use Bad option is used changing the internal status to Good the value of Good just before the status changed to Bad is used A2 2 2 Converting the Rate The following describes an example of rate conversion In rate conversion firstly convert the unit of two inputs to that based on seconds Next convert the unit of the inputs to the same unit to be added together The unit of IN_2 is standardized to that of IN_1 Then calculates a weight volume or energy by multiplying each input value and block execution time Because unit information is not input to the Integrator block as an input value the user must input in advance tuned values to the TIME UNIT1 2 and UNIT CONV parameters Converts the unit into that based on seconds TIME UNIT1 inputi sect incrementi min 60 gt x block execution time K hour hour 3600 kg s kg day 86400 Standardizes the unit of IN_2 to that of IN_1 Because lb s is conve
16. Written as by 6 characters or 6 characters plus Select whether the unit to be displayed in the lower text field should be set to automatic or on a customized basis UNIT SEL The display selected by DISPLAY SEL needs to CUSTOM is be set selected AUTO is Set the Apay ce Written as by 6 characters or 6 characters plus of the uni selected DISPLAY_UNIT English alphabetic characters numeric characters from 0 through 9 slash and dot can be used to define the unit If characters other than above are specified blank space will be displayed on LCD for those characters Example display of exponent setting M The LCD value for exponent setting when the actual pressure Set an exponent EXP_MODE value is 23 4568 KPa and the decimal point selected is 2 Corresponding LCD value decimal point kPa 2 Engineering Unit 23 46 Perform ON OFF setting of the bar graph Eng Unit 1 10 2 35 BAR_GRAPH_SELECT Eng Unit 1 100 0 23 Eng Unit 1 1000 0 02 Exponent Set the display period Time unit 800msec When the value set is 3 the same DISPLAY_CYCLE display continues for about 2 4 seconds F0607 EPS Figure 6 4 Procedures to Set the Built in Display 6 10 IM 01C25R03 01E Table 6 1 Parameters to be displayed on LCD 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS
17. block SENSOR Al function Sensor Transducer block block input Block tag E Block tag Parameters Output OUT i OUT D Resource block Block tag Parameters F0301 EPS Figure 3 1 Logical Structure of Each Block Setting of various parameters node addresses and PD Tags shown in Figure 3 1 is required before starting operation 3 4 Wiring System Configuration The number of devices that can be connected to a single bus and the cable length vary depending on system design When constructing systems both the basic and overall design must be carefully considered to achieve optimal performance 3 2 3 ABOUT FIELDBUS IM 01C25R03 01E 4 GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Fieldbus is fully dependent upon digital communica tion protocol and differs in operation from conven tional 4 to 20 mA transmission and the HART commu nication protocol It is recommended that novice users use field devices in accordance with the procedures described in this section The procedures assume that field devices will be set up on a bench or in an instrument shop 4 1 Connection of Devices The following are required for use with Fieldbus devices Power supply Fieldbus requires a dedicated power supply It is recommended that current capacity be well over the total value of the maximum current consumed by all devices including the host Conventional DC current canno
18. IM 01C25R03 01E Differential pressure transmitter Fluctuation Parameters Simulation Test REFERENCE_FDP OK Test for low pressure side REFERENCE FSPL OK Test for high pressure side REFERENCE FSPH OK Test for both pressure sides REFERENCE BLKF OK REFERENCE FDP OK Test for low pressure side REFERENCE FSPL OK Test for high pressure side REFERENCE FSPH OK Test for both pressure sides REFERENCE BLKF NG REFERENCE FDP OK REFERENCE FSPL NG Test for high pressure side REFERENCE FSPH OK REFERENCE BLKF NG REFERENCE FDP OK REFERENCE FSPL NG Test for both pressure sides REFERENCE FSPH NG REFERENCE BLKF NG Transmitter for gauge absolute pressure and level measurement Fluctuation Parameters Simulation Test REFERENCE FDP OK gt Test for high pressure side A8 2 3 Operating Parameters E DIAG MODE DIAG MODE gives the directive for the ILBD operation There are following three modes DIAG MODE Index Mode Function 0 Stop The blockage detection operation is stopped The blockage detection operation is performed Alarms are generated along with the result 1 Calculation Reference values for the blockage detection are obtained and updated to the latest After sampling reference values this mode changes to Calculation 2 Reference TA0804 EPS When the blockage detection operation is performed set Calculation to DIA
19. Index Unit Display on the LCD 1347 m3 s m3 s 1348 m3 min m3 m 1349 m3 h m3 h 1350 m3 d m3 d 1351 L s L s 1352 L min L m 1353 L h L h 1355 ML d ML d 1356 CFS CFS 1357 CFM CFM 1358 CFH CFH 1359 ft3 d ft3 d 1360 SCFM SCFM 1361 SCFH SCFH 1362 gal s gal s 1363 GPM GPM 1364 gal h gal h 1365 gal d gal d 1366 Mgal d Mgal d 1367 ImpGal s IGal s 1368 ImpGal min IGal m 1369 ImpGal h IGal h 1370 ImpGal d IGal d 1371 bbl s bbl s 1372 bbl min bbl m 1373 bbl h bbl h 1374 bbl d bbl d 1524 Nm3 h Nm3 h 1525 Nm3 d Nm3 d 1529 Sm3 h Sm3 h 1530 Sm3 d Sm3 d 1534 NL h NL h 1537 SL s SL s 1538 SL min SL min 1539 SL h SL h 1541 Paa Paa 1542 Pag Pag 1543 GPaa GPaa 1544 GPag GPag 1545 MPaa MPaa 1546 MPag MPag 1547 kPaa kPaa 1548 kPag kPag 1549 mPaa mPaa 1550 mPag mPag 1551 y Paa uPaa 1552 y Pag uPag 1553 hPaa hPaa 1554 hPag hPag 1555 g cm a g cm2a 1556 g cm2g g cm2g 1557 kg cm2a kg cm2a 1558 kg cm g kg cm2g T0604 1 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Index Unit Display on the LCD 1559 inH2Oa inH2Oa 1560 inH2Og inH2Og 1561 inH20a 4 C inH2Oa 1562 inH2Og 4 C inH2Og 1563 inH2O0a 68 F inH2Oa 1564 inH2O0g 68 F inH2Og 1565 mmH20a mmH2Oa 1566 mmH20g mmH20g 1567 mmH20a 4 C mmH2Oa 1568 mmH20g 4 C mmH20g 1569 mmH20a 68 F mmH2Oa 1570 mmH2Og 68 F mmH20g 1571 ftH20a ftH2Oa 1572 ftH2Og ftH2Og 1573 ftH2Oa 4 C ftH20a 1574 ftH20g 4 C ftH20g
20. PULSE_VAL2 2 Current read value Previous read value tera SA SR number of pulse conversion factor counts kg Ib pulse FA0203 EPS Figure A2 3 Increment Calculation with Counter Input A2 2 4 Determining the Input Flow Direction The Integrator block also considers the input flow direction Information about the input flow direction is contained in REV_FLOWI and REV_FLOW2 0 FORWARD 1 REVERSE In input processing the sign of the value after rate and accumulation conversion is reversed if the REV_FLOW1 and REV_FLOW2 parameters are set to REVERSE When determination of the flow direction of two input values is complete these two inputs are passed to the adder The settings in REV_FLOW will be retained even if the power is turned OFF A 11 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK A2 3 Adder When input processing is complete two arguments that have been rate and accumulate converted will be passed to the adder The adder adds these two values according to the option A2 3 1 Status of Value after Addition If one of the statuses of two arguments is Bad or if two of them are both Bad the status of the value after addition becomes Bad In this case the value of Good just before the status changed to Bad is used as the addition value see A2 1 When the statuses of two arguments are both Good the status of the value after addition becomes Good In this case the status of the value af
21. e u eooeea aaa aaa aaa aan aaa id A 73 A8 2 4 Operating Procedure eseee eee aaa eee aaa aa aaa zacna A 74 A8 2 5 Alarm and Alert setting A 76 A8 2 6 GoOndition Chek zeza odere ri keep Leu c nra eR Een A 78 A8 2 7 Obtain Reference Values ee eeeeaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa cenach A 79 A8 2 8 Capability Test of Blockage Detection Operation A 80 A8 2 9 Start ILBD Operation eeeeue eee aaa aaa aaa aaa anna eca A 80 PB 2210 TUNING ao a O OPER A OO PO dace EE O EA A 81 A8 2 11 Reset of Reference Value ee eaae eee aaa aaa aaa ac enaaaa A 82 A8 2 12 ILBD Parameter Lists aa aa ane A 83 A8 2 19 ChECKIISE 4222 a da OE OE WL A 86 V IM 01C25R03 01E CONTENTS A8 3 Heat Trace Monitoring use nz aa io Ak ae A 91 A8 3 1 FLG_TEMP_COEF Setting sisisihin neskanus A 91 A8 3 2 Alert and Alarm Setting A 92 A8 3 3 Assignment of FLG TEMP VAL to Process Value PV in Al function block cerei tnter i Peer A 92 A8 3 4 Analog Alett ere rrt rrt ert etu rete eut PE au A 92 A8 3 5 Out of Temperature Measurement Range 1 1 11 A 92 A8 3 6 Status Error oie et entretien bec eg e actua A 92 A8 3 7 Parameter Lists for Heat Trace Monitoring function A 93 REVISION RECORD vi IM 01C25R03 01E 1 INTRODUCTION 1 INTRODUCTION This manual is for the DPharp EJX Multivariable Transmitter Fieldbus Comm
22. R Display Rio Hexadecimal through DD Description 0x80000000 Diff Pressure Trimming range error for Span Trim Error differential pressure span AL 50 0x40000000 Diff Pressure Trimming range error for Zero Trim Error differential pressure zero AL 50 0x20000000 Static Pressure Trimming range error for Span Trim Error static pressure span AL 51 0x10000000 Static Pressure Trimming range error for Zero Trim Error static pressure zero AL 51 0x08000000 External Temp Trimming range error for Span Trim Error external temperature span AL 52 0x04000000 External Temp Trimming range error for Zero Trim Error external temperature zero AL 52 T0805 EPS Table 8 6 Contents of DEVICE STATUS 6 index 1050 A Display o Hexadecimal through DD Description 0x80000000 PID in O S mode PID block is in O S mode AL 70 0x40000000 PID in MAN PID block is in MAN mode mode AL 70 0x20000000 PID Non Schduled PID block is not Scheduled AL 70 0x10000000 SC in O S mode SC block is in O S mode AL 71 0x08000000 SC in MAN mode AL 71 SC block is in MAN mode 0x04000000 SC Non Schduled AL 71 SC block is not scheduled 0x02000000 IT in O S mode IT block is in O S mode AL 72 0x01000000 IT in MAN mode IT block is in MAN mode AL 72 0x00800000 IIT Non Schduled IT block is not scheduled AL 72 0x00400000 IIS in O S mode IS block is
23. Sub index Parameters Description Sets the data status to be simulated 1 Simulate Status Sets the value of the data to be simulated 2 Simulate Value 3 Transducer Status Displays the data status from the transducer block It cannot be changed 4 Transducer Value Displays the data value from the transducer block It cannot be changed 5 Simulate En Disable Controls the simulation function of this block 1 Simulation disabled standard 2 Simulation started T0702 EPS 7 IN PROCESS OPERATION When Simulate En Disable in Table 7 2 above is set to 2 the applicable function block uses the simulation value set in this parameter instead of the data from the transducer block This setting can be used for propaga tion of the status to the trailing blocks generation of a process alarm and as an operation test for trailing blocks mplifier Assembly SIM ENABLE 1 M g a OFF during operation 2 W 4 Not in use Figure 7 2 SIMULATE ENABLE Switch Position F0702 EPS 7 2 IM 01C25R03 01E 8 DEVICE INFORMATION 8 DEVICE INFORMATION 8 1 DEVICE STATUS Device status for the EJX are indicated by using parameter DEVICE STATUS 1 to DEVICE_STATUS_8 index 1045 to 1052 in Resource Block Table 8 1 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_1 index 1045 Hexadecimal 0x00800000 0x00400000 Display through DD Sim enable Jmpr On RB in O S
24. Read back value to be sent to the BKCAL IN in the upper block 32 RCAS IN Remote setpoint set from a computer etc 33 ROUT IN Remote control output value set from a computer etc A 44 TA0102 1 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK Parameter Default A s R D Index Name factory setting Write Valid Range escription 34 SHED_OPT 0 Action to be performed in the event of mode shedding SHED_OPT defines the changes to be made to MODE BLK target and MODE BLK actual when the value of RCAS_IN status or ROUT_IN status becomes Bad if MODE BLK actual RCas or ROut See Section A5 17 1 for details 35 RCAS_OUT 0 Remote setpoint sent to a computer etc 36 ROUT OUT 0 Remote control output value 37 TRK SCALE 100 MAN Upper and lower scale limits used to convert the output 0 tracking value TRK VAL to non dimensional 1342 1 38 TRK IN D 0 Switch for output tracking See Section A5 12 for details 39 TRK VAL 0 Output tracking value TRK VAL When MODE BLK actual LO the value scaled from the TRK VAL value is set in OUT 40 FF VAL 0 Feedforward input value The FF VAL value is scaled to a value with the same scale as for OUT multiplied by the FF GAIN value and then added to the output of the PID computation 41 FF SCALE 100 MAN Scale limits used for converting the FF VAL value to a 0 non di
25. Record the value after checked that the status is GOOD VALUE_BLKF Index 2106 0 287259 Record the status of Checkbox in DIAG_OPTION Index 2089 DIAG_OPTION A Blocking Check that the alarms status of High f 3 ita FI I tLe Sid Oe ee m QE p ree Side Blocking Low Side Blocking 99 Fluctuation of Low Side t iil BED RR and B Blocking are set Large Fluctuation of High Side Jt peer ee Low Side Blocking Note If the alarm of Outside Diagnosis High Side Blocking Rh F nge isgenerdted the Valve opus ccm ee ana ao cis ed ene ee bojki may be closed too much tightly BBlockng JH E m REM Open valve a little and record the Invalid Ref BIKF updated status of the parameters aidRetfSPh 1 fie eo TS Invalid Ref fSPI Invalid Ref fDP Outside Diagnosis Range l Z KENA Reflect Blockage to PV SV TV Status Check that the alarm of B Blocking is DIAG_ERR Index 2086 generated B Blocking y A 89 TA0813 2 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Checklist 5 5 APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC No 10 b Items Simulation of Blockage detection operation Close completely the valve for the side where the alarm of Invalid Reference Value is not generated Parameters Result Example For the
26. Capabilities Al sc IT Is AR PID Level T0402 EPS 4 5 Reading the Parameters To read EJX multivariable transmitter parameters select the AI1 block of the transmitter from the host screen and read the OUT parameter The current selected signal is displayed Check that MODE_BLOCK of the function block and resource block is set to AUTO and change the signal input and read the parameter again A new designated value should be displayed 4 3 IM 01C25R03 01E 4 6 Continuous Record of Values If the host has a function that continuously records the indications use this function to list the indications values Depending on the host being used it may be necessary to set the schedule of Publish the function that transmits the indication on a periodic basis 4 7 Generation of Alarm Generation of an alarm can be attempted from EJX multivariable transmitter Block alarm Output limit alarm and Update alarm are informed to the host When generating alarm a Link Object and a VCR Static Entry need to be set For details of Link Object and VCR Static Entry refer to section 5 6 1 Link object and section 5 5 1 VCR Setting 4 4 4 GETTING STARTED IM 01C25R03 01E 5 CONFIGURATION 5 CONFIGURATION This chapter describes how to adapt the function and performance of the EJX multivariable transmitter to suit specific applications Because multiple devices are connected to Fieldbus it is important to carefully consider t
27. Figure 4 1 Cabling A NOTE No CHECK terminal is used for Fieldbus EJX multivariable transmitter Do not connect the field indicator and check meter Before using a Fieldbus configuration tool other than the existing host confirm it does not affect the loop functionality in which all devices are already installed in operation Disconnect the relevant control loop from the bus if necessary A IMPORTANT Connecting a Fieldbus configuration tool to a loop with its existing host may cause communi cation data scrambling resulting in a functional disorder or a system failure IM 01C25R03 01E 4 2 Host Setting To activate Fieldbus the following settings are required for the host Set the available address range to cover the address set for EJX multivariable transmitter s A IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power immediately after setting When the parameters are saved to the EEPROM the redundant processing is executed for an improvement of reliability If the power is turned off within 60 seconds after setting is made the modified parameters are not saved and the settings may return to the original values Table 4 1 Operation Parameters Parameter Slot Time Symbol V ST Description and Settings Indicates the time necessary for immediate reply of the device Unit of time is in octets 256 us Set maximum specification for all devices For EJX set a value of 4 or greater V MID Min
28. 0x07 Remote Address 0x1 10 300 8 Server LocalAddr OxF9 301 9 Publisher for Al2 LocalAddr 0x21 302 to 315 10 to 33 Not used T0505 EPS 5 5 2 Function Block Execution Control According to the instructions given in Section 5 3 set the execution cycle of the function blocks and schedule of execution 5 CONFIGURATION 5 6 Block Setting Set the parameter for function block VFD 5 6 1 Link Object A link object combines the data voluntarily sent by the function block with the VCR The EJX multivariable transmitter has 40 link objects A single link object specifies one combination Each link object has the parameters listed in Table 5 6 Parameters must be changed together for each VCR because the modifications made to each parameter may cause inconsistent operation Table 5 6 Link Object Parameters Sub index Parameters Description Sets the index of function block parameters to be combined set 0 for Trend and Alert Sets the index of VCR to be combined If set to O this link object is not used Not used in EJX Set to 0 Set one of the following Set only one each for link object for Alert or Trend 0 Undefined 2 Publisher 3 Subscriber 6 Alert 7 Trend Set the maximum number of consecutive stale input values which may be received before the input status is set to BAD To avoid the unnecessary mode transition caused when the data is not correctly received by su
29. 4334 4434 HI ALM The status for high alarm and its associated time stamp 35 4035 4135 4235 4335 4435 LO ALM The status of the low alarm and its associated time stamp 36 4036 4136 4236 4336 4436 LO LO The status of the low low alarm and its associated ALM time stamp 37 4037 4137 4237 4337 4437 OUT_D_ 0 Selection of alarm to output it fom OUT D SEL 38 4038 4138 4238 4338 4438 OUT D Value A discrete value and status that shows HI_HI HI MAN LO_LO LO state 9 16 T0904 2 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 6 Parameter Names Cross Reference 9 PARAMETER LISTS Parameter s name may appear differently according to the tool you use If you cannot find the designated parameters in the parameters list in the former sections please use the following cross lists Sensor Transducer Block 9 17 Peang Parameter Name Label bees Parameter Name Label 0 BLOCK_HEADER Characteristics 51 CAL EXT TEMP MIN SPAN Ext Temp Calibration Minimum Span 1 ST REV Static Revision 52 CAL EXT TEMP UNIT Ext Temp Calibration Units 2 TAG DESC Tag Description 5
30. 7 blkfmax Threshold to detect High Side Blocking l by using VALUE BLKF Threshold to detect Low Side Blocking by using VALUE_BLKF dpavgmax Threshold to detect Outside Diagosis Range by using VALUE_DPAVG and to detect Invalid Ref xx by using REFERENCE_DPAVG dpavgmin Threshold to detect Outside Diagosis 10 Range by using VALUE_DPAVG and to detect Invalid Ref xx by using REFERENCE_DPAVG 8 blkfmin 9 TA0802 EPS APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC Table A8 2 Default Values of DIAG_LIM Multivariable transmitter Parameter EJX910A EJX930A 1 fdpmax 3 2 fdpmin 0 3 3 fsplmax 5 4 fsplmin 0 5 5 fsphmax 5 6 fsphmin 0 5 7 blkfmax 0 6 8 blkfmin 0 6 9 dpavgmax Note 1 1 10 dpavgmin Note 1 0 05 TA0803 EPS Note 1 It indicates the threshold value for Outside Diagnosis Range refer to A8 2 5 E A B Blocking Detection A Blocking and B Blocking indicates the result estimated from blockage degree based on the differ ence of the high and low pressure side fluctuation values RATIO_FDP SQRT VALUE_FDP REFERENCE_FDP is used to detect A B Blocking REFERENCE_FDP is the average value of the sum of squares of differential pressure fluctuations under normal condition As the value of RATIO_FDP exceeds the value of DIAG_LIM 1 EJX gives basically an al
31. Go to the following step according to the result of Invalid Ref xx shown in the DIAG_ERR of 8th check item APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC DIAG_ERR Index F2086 Check Invalid Ref fSPh Invalid Ref fSPI Invalid Ref fDP item im E L1 10 a Al m 10 b M The alarm is generated 1 The alarm is not generated A No Items Parameters Result Example 10 a Simulation of Blockage detection operation High Side Blocking 10 a 1 Low Side Blocking 10 a 2 Both Side Blocking 10 a 3 10 a 1 High Side Blocking Close the high pressure side valve completely Record the values of VALUE_ after the VALUE FDP Index 2103 7 48562e 9 certain time DIAG PERIOD x VALUE FSPL Index 2104 DIAG COUNT passed rece leer 104 7 23277e 9 VALUE_FSPH Index 2105 7 14085e 9 Record the value after checked that the status is GOOD VALUE BLKF Index 2106 0 287259 Record the status of Checkbox in DIAG OPTION Index 2089 DIAG OPTION Blocking N Check that the alarms status of A i oe FI 7 qu Jg tLe Sid oSA ayo Blocking and High Side Blocking are 9 99 uctuation o Low olde ae eee PN TT set NE IL dei uno aaa or ERR E REPRE
32. IS Information relating to this function block such as block tag DD revision and execution time Indicates the revision level of the set parameters associated with the IS block If a 1 ST_REV 2 setting is modified this revision is updated It is used to check for parameter changes etc 2 TAG_DESC A universal parameter that stores comments describing tag information 3 STRATEGY 2 A mae parameter intended for use by the high level system to identify function Key information used to identify the location where an alert has occurred Generally this parameter 4 ALERT_KEY 1 is used by the high level system to identify specific areas in a plant that are under the control of specific operators to distinguish necessary alarms only This is one of the universal parameters 5 MODE BLK A universal parameter representing the operation status of the IS block It consists of the Actual Target Permit and Normal modes 6 BLOOGKERR ee e Indicates the error status relating to the Input Selector function block The bit used by this function block is as follows Bit 15 O S mode 7 OUT MAN Block output 8 OUT_RANGE Set the range of OUT The parameter used to check if various operations have been executed The bits in the GRANT parameter corresponding to various operations are set before any of 9 GRANT_DENY them are executed After the operations are complete the DENY parameter is checked to find out if any bit corresponding to the relevant ope
33. If the mode is switched from Manual to Auto the value of OUT that is linearly changed with respect to the value of PRE_OUT for time set by BAL_TIME is output The PRE_OUT always indicates the results of calculation After elapse of BAL_TIME OUT PRE_OUT is established Note that if the value of BAL_TIME is changed during linear change of the OUT value it is not reflected The value of BAL_TIME will be reflected only after the mode is changed the next time AUTO MAN AUTO gt BAL_TIME PRE_OUT Case of BAL TIME 5 sec FA0404 EPS OUT The value of OUT is represented by the following equation yn yn 1 xn yn 1 a n a T tc 1 The value of T tc truncates digits to the right of the decimal point where y OUT x PRE_OUT tc period of execution T BAL_TIME n period APPENDIX 4 ARITHMETIC AR BLOCK A4 4 2 Status Handling The setting of INPUT_OPTS is applied to the input status When INPUT_OPTS is applied there are cases where the PV status becomes good even if the status of main inputs is uncertain or the status of auxiliary inputs is uncertain or bad The PV status is classified by the following If the statuses of two main inputs are both good or anything other than good See A4 2 1 Main Inputs If only one of the statuses of two main inputs is good If the status of
34. schv len ATEX Ex jsou dostupn v angli tin n m in a francouz tin Po adujete li pokyny t kaj c se v robk s nev bu n m schv len m ve va em lok ln m jazyku kontaktujte pros m va i nejbli reprezenta n kancel Yokogawa Cm Visos gaminio ATEX Ex kategorijos Eksploatavimo instrukcijos teikiami angle vokie ie ir pranc ze kalbomis Nor dami gauti prietaiso Ex dokumentacij kitomis kalbomis susisiekite su artimiausiu bendrov s Yokogawa biuru arba atstovu o Visas ATEX Ex kategorijas izstr d jumu Lietodanas instrukcijas tiek pieg d tas angiu vacu un franeu valod s Ja v laties sa emt Ex ierieu dokument ciju cita valoda Jums ir jasazinas ar firmas Jokogava Yokogawa tuvako ofisu vai parstavi ED K ik ATEX Ex toodete kasutamisjuhendid on esitatud inglise saksa ja prantsuse keeles Ex seadmete muukeelse dokumentatsiooni saamiseks p rduge l hima Iokagava Yokogawa kontori v i esindaja poole IM 01C25R03 01E Wszystkie instrukcje obs ugi dla urz dze w wykonaniu przeciwwybuchowym Ex zgodnych z wymaganiami ATEX dost pne s w j zyku angielskim niemieckim i francuskim Je eli wymagana jest instrukcja obs ugi w Pa stwa lokalnym j zyku prosimy o kontakt z najbli szym biurem Yokogawy Vsi predpisi in navodila za ATEX Ex sorodni pridelki so pri roki v angli ini nem eini ter franco cini Ee so Ex sorodna navodila potrebna v va em tukejnjem
35. see note 10 Ca Ci Ccable La Li Leable Note 10 For this current controlled circuit the param eter Imax is not required and need not be aligned with parameter Isc of the barrier or associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus Note 11 If ordinary location wiring methods are used the transmitter shall be connected to FM Approved associated non incendive field wiring apparatus Electrical data Vmax 32V Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 pH FNICO Rules The FNICO Concept allows the interconnection of nonincendive field wiring apparatus to associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus not specifically examined in such combination The criterion for such interconnection is that the voltage Vmax the current Imax and the power Pmax which nonincendive field wiring apparatus can receive and remain nonincendive considering faults must be equal or greater than the voltage Uo Voc or Vt the current Io Isc or It and the power Po which can be provided by the associ ated nonincendive field wiring apparatus supply unit In addition the maximum unprotected residual capaci tance Ci and inductance Li of each apparatus other than terminators connected to the Fieldbus must be less than or equal to 5nF and 20uH respectively 2 4 2 HANDLING CAUTIONS In each N I Fieldbus segment only one active source normally the associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus is allowed to provide the necessary power for the Fi
36. 101 2101 REFERENCE 0x00 0 AUTO The average value of differential pressure obtained at normal _DPAVG operating condition is automatically recorded when DIAG_MODE is set to Reference 2 102 2102 VALUE_TIME The date and time when the statistical values such as VALUE_FDP and VALUE_BLKF were calculated are recorded 103 2103 VALUE_FDP Average value of the sum of squares of differential pressure pressure fluctuations 104 2104 VALUE_FSPL Average value of the sum of squares of low pressure side static pressure fluctuations 105 2105 VALUE FSPH The average value of the sum of squares of low pressure side static pressure fluctuations 106 2106 VALUE BLKF Blockage degree characterized in comparison of high pressure side and low pressure side pressure fluctuation values 107 2107 VALUE_DPAVG Ratio of the average of differential pressure pressure to the maximum span of an EJX 108 2108 RATIO_FDP CRATIO_FDP or NRATIO_FDP is used by COMP_FLG setting VALUE_FDP decreases and this parameter is used to determine whether single or both side is plugged 109 2109 RATIO FSPL SQRT VALUE_FSPL REFERENCE_FSPL VALUE_FSPL decreases and this parameter is used to determine whether low pressure side is plugged 110 2110 RATIO FSPH SQRT VALUE FSPH REFERENCE FSPH VALUE FSPH decreases and this parameter is used to determine whether high pressure side is plugged 111 2111 CRATIO FDP RATIO FDP is compensated by
37. 1575 ftH20a 68 F ftH20a 1576 ftH20g 68 F ftH20g 1577 inHga inHga 1578 inHgg inHgg 1579 inHga 0 C inHga 1580 inHgg 0 C inHgg 1581 mmHga mmHga 1582 mmHgg mmHgg 1583 mmHga 0 C mmHga 1584 mmHgg 0 C mmHgg 1590 barg Barg 1591 mbarg mBarg 1597 bara Bara 1598 MSCFD MSCFD 1599 MMSCFD MMSCFD 65520 SCFS SCFS 65521 SCFD SCFD T0604 2 EPS 6 13 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS IM 01C25R03 01E 6 6 Al Function Block The AI function block is a unit of the software and executed according to the system schedule During execution it incorporates data from the SENSOR and Flow transducer block After execution it updates analog outputs and processes newly generated alarms AI function blocks can provide a discrete output which shows the status of LO LO_LO HI or HI_HI In terms of function there is no difference between the five AI function blocks provided in EJX multivariable transmitter 6 6 1 Function Blocks The AI function block via the Channel incorporates analog signals from the transducer block performs scaling processing filtering low cut and alarm processing before outputting It has the function to generate a discrete output Figure 6 5 presents the AI function block 6 6 2 Block Mode The Block modes permitted for the AI function block are Automatic Auto Manual Man and Out of Service O S When the Block mode of RB Resource Block is Out of Service O S Actual is Out of Service O S
38. 27 IN 7 0 5 5 Input 7 28 IN8 0 5 5 Input 8 29 DISABLE_5 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 5 from being selected 30 DISABLE_6 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 6 from being selected 31 DISABLE_7 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 7 from being selected 32 DISABLE_8 0 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 8 from being selected A 34 TA0307 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK A3 6 Application Example The following describes the temperature control system of a fixed bed type reactor In this case there are instances where the point showing the maximum temperature changes due to catalytic deterioration raw material flow etc Therefore a large number of measurement points are provided and the maximum value obtained among these measurement points is input to the controller to control reactor temperature Raw material 1015B81 S AJEJED Refrigerant FA0310 EPS Figure A3 10 Temperature Control System of a Fixed Bed type Reactor Alt IL I H S PID AO OUT IN 14 OUT IN OUT HCAS_IN I AN AM BKCAL_IN BKCAL_OUT FA0311 EPS Figure A3 11 Example of Scheduling AIl Temperature 1 AI2 Temperature 2 AI3 Temperature 3 A14 Temperature 4 IS SELECT_TYPE MAX Basic operati
39. 4122 4222 4322 4422 ALARM Enable The current alert status unacknowledged states SUM unreported states and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block 23 4023 4123 4223 4323 4423 ACK OxFFFF AUTO Selection of whether alarms associated with the OPTION block will be automatically acknowledged 24 4024 4124 4224 4324 4424 ALARM 0 5 AUTO Amount the PV must return within the alarm limits HYS before the alarm condition clears Alarm Hysteresis is expressed as a percent of the PV span 25 4025 4125 4225 4325 4425 HI HI PRI 0 AUTO Priority of the high high alarm 26 4026 4126 4226 4326 4426 HI HI LIM INF AUTO The setting for high high alarm in engineering units 27 4027 4127 4227 4327 4427 HI_PRI 0 AUTO Priority of the high alarm 28 4028 4128 4228 4328 4428 HI LIM INF AUTO The setting for high alarm in engineering units 29 4029 4129 4229 4329 4429 LO PRI 0 AUTO Priority of the low alarm 30 4030 4130 4230 4330 4430 LO LIM INF AUTO The setting for the low alarm in engineering units 31 4031 4131 4231 4331 4431 LO LO PRI 0 AUTO Priority of the low low alarm 32 4032 4132 4232 4332 4432 LO LO LIM INF AUTO The setting of the low low alarm in engineering units 33 4033 4133 4233 4333 4433 HI HI ALM The status for high high alarm and its associated time stamp 34 4034 4134 4234
40. 6 4 7 XD_ERROR The XD_ERROR parameter indicates the most impor tant error code among the errors that are currently occurring on the FLOW transducer block The follow ing table summarizes the content of supported XD_ERRORs and error codes When two or more error codes are being generated simultaneously error codes are displayed with prefer ence given to the largest error code Error Error ic Support Code Name Description Multi Mass Flow Setting Measurement 15 Outof FLOW TB is in the O S Q Service mode 19 Configu Other than O Sisseteven s ration though it is a Multi error Sensing type 23 Data The flow setting sum O Integrity value does not agree with Error the value when it was written by the setup tool 15 Algo The flow value is smaller O rithm than zero Error T0602c EPS 6 5 LCD Transducer Block 6 5 1 Outline of the Functions The LCD transducer block controls alarms and measured values that are displayed on the integral indicator It displays not only OUT signals from the AI blocks but also I O signals of the Installed blocks on the integral indicator 6 5 2 Block Mode The Block modes permitted for the LCD transducer block are Automatic Auto and Out of Service O S Settings can be changed in the AUTO mode for this block except the Block tag parameter 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS 6 5 3 Display Contents of the integral indi
41. A basic form of each algorithm is expressed in the equation below I PD Control Algorithm in Auto RCas mode AT Td AMVn K APVn gt PVn SPn A APVn PI D Control Algorithm in Cas mode AMVn K A PVn SPn A PVn SPn 4 A APVn 1 Where AMVn change in control output APVn change in measured controlled value PVn PVn 1 AT control period period_of_execution in Block Header K proportional gain GAIN 100 proportional band Ti integral time RESET Td derivative time RATE The subscripts n and n 1 represent the time of sam pling such that PVn and PVn denote the PV value sampled most recently and the PV value sampled at the preceding control period respectively A5 4 2 PID Control Parameters The table below shows the PID control parameters GAIN Proportional gain 0 05 to 20 RESET 0 1 to 10 000 seconds RATE Derivative time 0 to infinity seconds TA0103 EPS A 46 APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK A5 5 Control Output The final control output value OUT is computed based on the change in control output AMVn which is calculated at each control period in accordance with the aforementioned algorithm The PID block in an EJX performs the velocity type output action for the control output A5 5 1 Velocity Type Output Action The PID block determines the value of the new control output OUT by adding the change in control output calculated in the current
42. After the operations are complete the DENY parameter is checked for the setting of any bit relating to the corresponding operation If no bit is set it is evident that the operations have been executed successfully Input a signal to be corrected using a line segment function Input a signal to be corrected using a line segment function CURVE X O Initialized 1 No swap 2 Swap Selector switch used to apply the inverse function to line segment approximation of IN_2 to OUT_2 Curve input points that determine inputs and outputs The x points of the curve are defined by an array of 1 to 21 points with a monotone increase CURVE_Y Curve input points that determine inputs and outputs The y points of the curve are defined by an array of 1 to 21 points If SWAP_2 is on the elements of the curve must be defined with a monotone increase or decrease UPDATE_EVT Indicates event information if an update event occurs BLOCK_ALM Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs TA0104 EPS A 6 IM 01C25R03 01E A1 5 Application Example A1 5 1 Input Compensation The following is an application example of pH com pensation made by performing feedback control The pH is a value representing the degree of acidity or alkalinity and ranges from 0 to 14 pH 7 indicates neutral a value smaller than 7 represents acidity and a value larger than 7 denotes alkalinity It is very
43. CONTENTS 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS e ecce ee leer rennen nena ananas 6 1 Gil OUR erossa 6 1 6 2 Setting and Changing Parameters for the Whole Process 6 1 6 3 SENSOR Transducer Block eeeeaaaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaaaaaaaaazaaecacaaa 6 1 6 31 Functional block i ete tren nun nea 6 2 63 2 sies dieere 6 2 6 3 8 Functions Relating to Differential Pressure 1 1 6 2 6 3 4 Functions Relating to Static Pressure 2111 21112 6 4 6 3 5 Functions Relating to External Temperature 6 4 6 3 6 Simulation Function ssseeaaa aaa aa aaa aaa aaa aaa nennen 6 5 6 3 7 Functions Relating to Capsule and Amplifier Temperature 6 6 6 3 8 Functions Relating to Flange Temperature option code DG1 6 6 63 9 BLOCK ERR eat A ee eee ette 6 6 6 3 10 XD ERRORS iren E LA dA YA HR Tel WaS 6 6 6 4 FLOW Transducer Block esaseaaaa aaa aaa aaa aa aa aaa aaa aaa aaazaaaazaaeeaaaaa 6 7 6 4 1 Outline of the Functions ssssaaaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa annn nannat 6 7 0 4 2 Block Mode tere ese erred e EA ds 6 7 6 4 3 Calculation of the Flow ssssessseeeene 6 7 6 4 4 Flow Unit Decimal Point Digit 6 7 6 4 5 Flow Type Selection 4 2 uwaa ooo aid aaa LA 6 7 6 4 6 BLOCK _ERR ccccccssssecsscccssceesssscessecsessseeeeseceesssatensse
44. Calculation and the termination time is recorded to REFERENCE TIME 1 Confirm that the setting of DIAG MODE changes to Calculation 2 Check the termination time recorded into REFERENCE TIME E Reference Values Confirm the latest values are obtained into the follow ing parameters REFERENCE FDP REFERENCE FSPL REFERENCE FSPH REFERENCE BLKF REFERENCE DPAVG M Invalid Ref BIkF fSPh fSPI or fDP When the enough reference fluctuation value is not obtained an alarm of Invalid Reference value for each parameter is generated and also the part of ILBD function related to the Invalid Ref BIkF fSPh fSPI or fDP is not carried out Confirm the alarm of Invalid Ref BIkF fSPh fSPI or fDP is not displayed in DIAG ERR If an alarm of Invalid Reference value is generated consider the process condition or obtain the reference fluctuation values again A NOTE Even if an alarm of Invalid Ref BIKF fSPh fSPI or fDP is generated Calculation in DIAG MODE is kept IM 01C25R03 01E A8 2 8 Capability Test of Blockage Detection Operation Before performing the ILBD operation check the capability of the blockage detection operation The simulation test is performed by closing motion of a three valve manifold or stop valve When simulated blockage occurs confirm that an alarm is generated A NOTE The fluctuation amplitude of atmospheric pres sure is nearly zero with pressure or level m
45. Integration calculation is stopped You may rewrite a value in OUT If no value is rewritten the value just before OUT will not be updated unless you running in AUTO is held When the mode returns to AUTO integration Out of Service O S set a value to it No reset is accepted starts with the written value or the value just before running in AUTO TA0204 EPS If you rewrite the value in OUT and RTOTAL while the mode is in MAN or O S N RESET is incremented A 16 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK A2 6 Reset A2 6 1 Reset Trigger There are the following five types of reset triggers 1 An integrated value exceeds TOTAL SP 2 An integrated value falls below 0 3 RESET IN is H 4 Every period specified in CLOCK PER for more information see CLOCK PER in A2 6 2 5 OP CMD INT is 1 The table A2 2 shows the correlation between INTEG TYPE and RESET triggers Table A2 2 RESET Triggers 1 2 3 4 5 1 UP_AUTO 2 UP_DEM 3 DN_AUTO 4 DN_DEMO 5 PERIODIC 6 DEMAND 7 PER amp DEM Orolo OoOO xX XIx XxXIx xIO xX XIX XxXIO xIx olo x olololo O x IO x x x x O TA0205 EPS When OP CMD INT has become H and a reset was made OP CMD INT automatically returns to L Even if RESET IN becomes H activating a reset RESET IN does not automatically return to L The RESET IN setting will not be retained if the power is turned OFF
46. Low Side Blocking m Note Ifthe alarm of Outside Diagnosis High Side Blocking N Range is generated the valve may gt sees Ime een mam awa nia a a p RasiaARAAAE be closed too much tightly Open B Blocking E RENI valve a little and record the updated Invalid Ref BIKE 2 J J L status of the parameters Invalid Ref fSPh m Invalid Ref fSPI Invalid Ref fDP LI i Outside Diagnosis Range aE ee Reflect Blockage to PV SV TV Status Check that the alarm of High Side DIAG_ERR Index 2086 Blocking is generated A F f Check that the alarm of Low Side L PARE Blocking odd dE o a DICHTER N PIERZE Blocking is not generated Low Side Blocking A 88 TA0813 1 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Checklist 4 5 APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC No Items Parameters Result Example 10 a 2 Low Side Blocking Close the low pressure side valve completely Record the values of VALUE_ after the VALUE_FDP Index 2103 7 48562e 9 certain time DIAGLPERIOD X VALUE_FSPL Index 2104 7 28277e 9 DIAG COUNT
47. STATUS 7 ALM SUM disable FLG TEMP ALM LOD Alarm Nd Alert FA0809 EPS Figure A8 8 Functional Block Diagram of Heat Trace Monitoring A 91 IM 01C25R03 01E A8 3 2 Alert and Alarm Setting The abnormal results of flange temperature heat trace monitoring are given by an alert or the LCD display of alarm status The flange temperature changes when the heat trace breaks or the abnormal temperature is detected due to the failure The abnormal results are stored in the bit 13 and 14 of DIAG_ERR in the SENSOR Transducer Block when the flange temperature is out of the range between the limits preset to the following parameters FLG TEMP H LIM FLG TEMP L LIM Generating an alarm or alert is set by DIAG OPTION Refer to A8 2 5 for the detail A8 3 3 Assignment of FLG TEMP VAL to Process Value PV in Al function block The EJX has five AI function blocks which of each has one channel If set 8 to the channel of AI function block the FLG TEMP VAL is assigned to Process Value PV in AI function block The unit of the flange temperature follows the setting of XD SCALE in the assigned AI function block To Assign CAP TEMP VAL or AMP TEMP VAL to Process Value PV in AI function block set 6 or 7 to the channel of AI function block A8 3 4 Analog Alert Since Flange temperature is assigned to an AI Function Block an analog alert can be generated by OUT D in AI Block For the detail of the analog alert s
48. T120 Group II Category 2GD Temperature Class T6 T5 and T4 Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Ambient Temperature for gas proof 50 to 75 C T6 50 to 80 C T5 and 50 to 75 C T4 Maximum Process Temperature Tp for gas proof 85 C T6 100 C T5 and 120 C T4 Maximum Surface Temperature for dust proof T85 C Tamb 40 to 40 C Tp 80 C T100 C Tamb 40 to 60 C Tp 100 C T120 C Tamb 40 to 80 C Tp 120 C Note 2 Electrical Data Supply voltage 32 V dc max Output current 15 mA dc Note 3 Installation All wiring shall comply with local installa tion requirements The cable entry devices shall be of a certified flameproof type suitable for the conditions of use Note 4 Operation Keep the WARNING label attached to the transmitter WARNING AFTER DE ENERGIZING DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP 265 C USE HEAT RESISTING CABLESz90 C Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when accessing the instrument and peripheral devices in hazardous location IM 01C25R03 01E Note 5 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or part replace ment by other than an authorized representa tive of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void KEMA Flameproof Certification 2 Electrical Connection A mark indicating the electrical connection type is stamped near the electrical connection port These marks are as fo
49. The safety barrier may include a terminator More than one field instruments may be connected to the power supply line IM 01C25R03 01E FISCO Rules The FISCO Concept allows the interconnection of intrinsincally safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in such combination The criterion for such interconnection is that the voltage Ui the current Ii and the power Pi which intrinsi cally safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsi cally safe considering faults must be equal or greater than the voltage Uo Voc Vt the current Io Isc It and the power Po which can be provided by the associated apparatus supply unit Po Pi Uo Ui lo S li In addition the maximum unprotected residual capaci tance Ci and inductance Li of each apparatus other than the terminators connected to the fieldbus must be less than or equal to 5 nF and 10 wH respectively Ci 5nF Li 10pH In each LS fieldbus segment only one active source normally the associated apparatus is allowed to provide the necessary power for the fieldbus system The allowed voltage Uo Voc Vt of the associated apparatus used to supply the bus cable must be limited to the range of 14 V dc to 17 5 V dc All other equipment connected to the bus cable has to be passive meaning that the apparatus is not allowed to provide energy to the system except to a leakage current of 50 pA for each connected device Supply unit Trapez
50. be compromised and the instrument may be hazardous to operate Please contact Yokogawa before making any repair or modification to an instrument A CAUTION This instrument has been tested and certified as being intrinsically safe or explosionproof Please note that severe restrictions apply to this instrument s construction installation external wiring maintenance and repair A failure to abide by these restrictions could make the instrument a hazard to operate AN WARNING Maintaining the safety of explosionproof equip ment requires great care during mounting wiring and piping Safety requirements also place restrictions on maintenance and repair Please read the following sections very carefully AN WARNING The range setting switch must not be used in a hazardous area 2 1 1 FM approval a FM Explosionproof Type Caution for FM Explosionproof type Note 1 EJX multivariable transmitter with optional code FF1 is applicable for use in hazardous locations Applicable Standard FM3600 FM3615 FM3810 ANSI NEMA 250 Explosionproof for Class I Division 1 Groups B C and D Dust ignitionproof for Class I II Division 1 Groups E F and G Enclosure rating NEMA 4X Temperature Class T6 Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C Supply Voltage 32V dc max Current Draw 15 mA dc Note 2 Wiring All wiring shall comply with National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA70 and Local Electrical Codes When installed
51. difficult to control pH with a quickly changing reaction rate at a point near 7 ry Small increases in reagent flow cause large pH shifts anv AENOJOOC Z 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 1 2 1 4 16 1 8 2 0 Ratio of Reagent to Influent Flow FA0106 EPS Figure A1 6 pH and Reagent Flow To control this pH the input is regulated using line segment approximation gain and input compensation Characterizer F PID Control Control Output Input Compensation FA0107 EPS Figure A1 7 Input Compensation The following shows the approximation value graph of GX Output that is approximation value output and GX Input that is pH input pH with a quickly changing reaction rate can be controlled at a point near neutral 7 according to the following graph APPENDIX 1 SIGNAL CHARACTERIZER SC BLOCK CURVE_Y 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Oto 100 0 to 14 pH CURVE_X FA0108 EPS Figure A1 8 Approximation Curve A1 5 2 Calorie Flow Compensation AI 1 Inlet temperature AI 2 Outlet temperature AI 3 Flow rate SC Corrects the inlet and outlet temperatures AR Calculates a calorie flow rate on the basis of the difference between the corrected inlet and outlet temperatures SWAP 2 OFF FA0109 EPS Figure A1 9 Calorie Flow Rate Compensation SWAP 2 Off A1 5 3 Backward Control SC The controlled variable output from PID is converted into an information quantity that
52. measurement 40 2340 BASE DENSITY 1 250380253 O S Indicates the density for conversion of the volume flow unit FOR VOLUME FLOW 41 2341 FLOW CONFIGI O S Indicates the compensation coefficient of the flow coefficient 42 2342 FLOW CONFIG O S Indicates the compensation coefficient of the expansion compensation coefficient 43 2343 FLOW CONFIG3 O S Indicates the precision compensation coefficient 44 2344 FLOW CONFIG4 O S Indicates the viscosity compensation coefficient 45 2345 CORRECTION VALUE Indicates the flow compensation value 46 2346 CONFIG SOFT REV O S Space Used as a record of the setup tool software version 47 2347 CONFIG DATE O S Space Used as a record of the setting date 48 2348 CONFIG WHO O S Space Used as a record of the setter 49 2349 CONFIG STATUS O S Space Used as a memo 50 2350 CONFIG VSTRING32 O S Space Used as a memo 51 2351 CONFIG VSTRING16 O S Space Used as a memo 52 2352 CONFIG_OSTRING32 O S Space Used as a memo 53 2353 CONFIG_OSTRING2 O S Sum value of precision flow setting data T0902 6 EPS These are the parameters which are allowed to be written only by EJXMV Tool Changes using other parameter setting tools or handheld terminals may cause Check Sum Error AL83 9 9 IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS AN CAUTION Indexes 2331 to 2353 are parameters for precision volume calculation and data ca
53. 0x0010 Large Fluctuation of High Side UNCERTAIN Non Specific H LR ir Large Fluctuation of Low Side 0x0008 Large Fluctuation of Low Side UNCERTAIN Non Specific LLR AL 89 A Blocking is detected 0x0004 A Blocking UNCERTAIN Non Specific A BLK AL 89 pPavgis outside range 0x1000 Outside Diagonosis Range DIAG OV 1 These settings depend on bit 15 in DIAG_OPTION 8 7 T0812 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 9 PARAMETER LISTS PARAMETER LISTS Note The Write Mode column contains the modes in which each parameter is write enabled O S Write enabled in O S mode MAN Write enabled in Man mode and O S mode AUTO Write enabled in Auto mode Man mode and O S mode 9 1 Resource Block Relative Factory Write R Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 0 1000 Block Header TAG RS Block Tag Information on this block such as Block Tag DD Revision O S Execution Time etc 1 1001 ST_REV The revision level of the static data associated with the resource block The revision value is incremented each time a static parameter value in this block is changed 1002 TAG_DESC Null AUTO The user description of the intended application of the block 1003 STRATEGY 1 AUTO The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks This data is not checked or processed by the block 4 1004 ALERT_KEY 1 AUTO The identification number of the plan
54. 100 C T120 C Tamb 40 C to 60 C Tp 120 C Degree of Protection of the Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Electrical Data When combined with Trapezoidal output characteristic FISCO model IIC barrier Supply Output circuit terminals and Ui 17 5 V Ii 380 mA Pi 5 32 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 pH IM 01C25R03 01E Temperature sensor circuit Uo 7 63 V lo 3 85 mA Po 8 mW Co 4 8 uF Lo 100 mH When combined with Linear characteristic barrier Supply Output circuit terminals and Ui 24 0 V Ii 250 mA Pi 1 2 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 pH Temperature sensor circuit Uo 7 63 V lo 3 85 mA Po 8 mW Co 4 8 uF Lo 100 mH Ex ia IIB T4 Type of Protection and Marking Code Ex ia IIB T4 Group II Category 1GD Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C Maximum Process Temperature Tp 120 C Maximum Surface Temperature for dust proof T85 C Tamb 40 C to 60 C Tp 80 C T100 C Tamb 40 C to 60 C Tp 100 C T120 C Tamb 40 C to 60 C Tp 120 C Degree of Protection of the Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Electrical Data When combined with Trapezoidal output characteristic FISCO model IIB barrier Supply Output circuit terminals and Ui 17 5 V Ii 460 mA Pi 5 32 W Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 pH Temperatura sensor circuit Uo 7 63 V Io 3 85 mA Po 8 mW Co 4 8 uF Lo 100 mH Note 3 Installation All wiring shall comply with local installa tion requirement
55. 12 T0514 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Table 5 16 Indexes of View for Each Block VIEW_1 VIEW_2 VIEW_3 VIEW_4 Resourse Block 40100 40101 40102 40103 a Transducer 40200 40201 pros oe FLOW 40230 40231 40232 40233 to Transducer block 40234 LCD Transducer Block 40250 40251 40252 40253 AM Function Block 40400 40401 40402 40403 AI2 Function Block 40410 40411 40412 40413 AI3 Function Block 40420 40421 40422 40423 Al4 Function block 40430 40431 40432 40433 AI5 Function block 40440 40441 40442 40443 PID Function Block 40800 40801 40802 40803 SC Function Block 41450 41451 41452 41453 IT Function Block 41600 41601 41602 41603 IS Function Block 41700 41701 41702 41703 AR Function Block 41750 41751 41752 41753 5 6 4 Function Block Parameters T0515 EPS Function block parameters can be read from the host or can be set For a list of the parameters of blocks held by the EJX multivariable transmitter refer to 9 PARAMETERS LISTS For the function blocks other than AI block LM function software download function and advanced diagnostic refer to Appendix 1 to 8 5 13 5 CONFIGURATION IM 01C25R03 01E 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS 6 1 Outline This chapter describes the SENSOR transducer block the LCD transducer block and the AI function block
56. 12 95 2095 DIAG COUNT 3 AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 96 2096 REFERENCE_TIME 0x00000000 AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 97 2097 REFERENCE FDP 0x00 0 AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 98 2098 REFERENCE_FSPL 0x00 0 AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 99 2099 REFERENCE_FSPH 0x00 AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 100 2100 REFERENCE_BLKF 0x00 AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 101 2101 REFERENCE_ 0x00 AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 DPAVG 102 2102 VALUE_TIME Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 103 2103 VALUE_FDP Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 104 2104 VALUE FSPL Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 105 2105 VALUE FSPH Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 106 2106 VALUE_BLKF Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 107 2107 VALUE_DPAVG Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 108 2108 RATIO FDP Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 109 2109 RATIO FSPL Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 110 2110 RATIO_FSPH Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 111 2111 CRATIO FDP Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 112 2112 NRATIO_FDP Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 113 2113 DIAG_APPLICABLE 0 Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 114 2114 FLG_TEMP_VAL Used for Heat Trace monitoring Refer to A8 2 12 115 2115 FLG_TEMP_RANGE 50 0 to 130 0 C Used for Heat Trace monitoring Refer to A8 2 12 116 2116 FLG_TEMP_COEFF 0 AUTO Used for Heat Trace monitorin
57. 12 3kPa PRIMARY VALUE is GOOD Min Min 12 1kPa Check the maximum and minimum values of PRIMARY VALUE 4 VALUE_FDP under normal condition VALUE FDP Index 2103 y e Check that the value of VALUE_FDP is more than 7x10 5 Start to obtain Reference values DIAG_MODE Index 2083 Set Reference to DIAG_MODE 6 End of Reference Value Sampling DIAG_MODE Index 2083 4 Check that DIAG MODE is Calcuration after the time set to DIAG PERIOD passed 7 Alarm setting DIAG OPTION Index 2089 A Blocking y Record the status of Checkboxin D RAI I ADDICT p dowi oes eae DIAG_OPTION tege Fluctuation of Low Se I one TAE SA Large Fluctuation of High Side N Low Side Blocking y High Side Blocking o y B Blocking o mi Invalid Ref BIkF M Invalid Ref fSPh Li Invalid Ref fSPI LJ Invalid Ref DP N Outside Diagnosis Range Reflect Blockage to PV SV TV Status A 86 TA0811 1 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Checklist 2 5 APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC No Items Parameters Result Example 8 Alarm status DIAG_ERR Index 2086 A Blocking Check the alarm status shown in 7 SEA NOOO EAH oe pear ease DIAG_ERR _ Large Fluctuation of Low Side 3 osie SERRA Check that the alarm s
58. 5 IN_8 27 4 DISAB DISAB DISAB DISAB DISAB DISAB DISAB DISAB LE 1 OFF LE 2 OFF LE 3 2 OFF LE_4 OFF LE_5 OFF LE_6 OFF LE 7 OFF LE_8 OFF OP SELECT 3 SELECTION SELECT TYPE Minimum STATUS OPTS 4 4 MIN GOOD 1 Figure A3 3 Example 2 OUT 45 gt SELECTED 3 FA0303 EPS In the above example SELECT_TYPE is set to Minimum However because OP_SELECT specifies the value and number of IN_3 the value and number of this specified IN are transmitted to OUT and SELECTED Note Even if the IN specified by OP SELECT is an invalid input the corresponding DISABLE parameter is ON or the IN s status is bad the value and status of that IN are transmitted to OUT A 25 IM 01C25R03 01E A3 3 2 SELECTION Handling APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK If the value of OP SELECT is 0 input selection using SELECT TYPE is enabled When SELECT TYPE is first good The IS block selects the input with the smallest input number among valid inputs and transmits the value of that input to OUT The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED IN 1 23 IN 2 34 5 IN_3 45 IN 4 2 34 IN 5 23 6 IN_6 15 5 IN_7 32 5 IN_8 27 4 DISABLE_1 ON DISABLE_2 OFF SELECTION
59. 6 4 IM 01C25R03 01E Assignment of the damping time constant of the external temperature signal The EXT TEMP VALUE FTIME parameter is for setting the damping parameter of the external temperature signal The setting unit for this parameter is seconds Judgment of range limit of the external tempera ture signal When the external temperature signal has deviated from the measuring range 200 to 850 C by 85 C or more it is outside the external temperature specifica tion range and the status of the external temperature signal EXT TEM VAL is set to Uncertain Sensor Conversion not Accurate Adjustment of external temperature signal A zero span adjustment function is available for the external temperature signal just like for the pressure differential pressure signal Automatic adjustment The temperature value is assigned to parameters CAL EXT TEMP LO and CAL EXT TEMP HI with the external temperature sensor immersed in the temperature to be adjusted After this assignment is made the adjustment amount is calculated internally by the transmitter and the adjustment amount is automati cally updated The procedure for adjusting the external temperature signal is the same as that of the differential pressure signal Manual adjustment From the assigned temperature and the output of the transmitter calculate the amount of zero span adjust ment manually and assign the calculated value to parameters CAL EXT TEMP DEVI
60. 7 4 52 DEVICE STATUS 8 4 58 SOFTDWN PROTECT 1 54 SOFTDWN FORMAT 1 55 SOFTDWN COUNT 2 56 SOFTDWN ACT AREA 1 57 SOFTDWN MOD REV 16 58 SOFTDWN ERROR Totals bytes 22 30 78 35 T0511 2 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 5 CONFIGURATION Table 5 12 View Object for SENSOR Transducer Block oo Parameter Mnemonic Kakarakak e 1 ST REV 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 TAG DESC 3 STRATEGY 2 4 ALERT KEY 1 5 MODE BLK 4 4 6 BLOCK ERR 2 2 7 UPDATE EVT 8 BLOCK ALM 9 TRANSDUCER DIRECTORY 10 TRANSDUCER TYPE 2 2 2 2 11 XD ERROR 1 1 12 COLLECTION DIRECTORY 13 PRIMARY VALUE TYPE 2 14 PRIMARY VALUE 5 5 15 PRIMARY VALUE RANGE 11 16 CAL POINT HI 4 17 CAL POINT LO 4 18 CAL MIN SPAN 4 19 CAL UNIT 2 20 SENSOR TYPE 2 21 SENSOR RANGE 11 22 SENSOR SN 32 23 SENSOR CAL METHOD 1 24 SENSOR CAL LOC 32 25 SENSOR CAL DATE 7 26 SENSOR CAL WHO 32 27 SENSOR ISOLATOR MTL 2 28 SENSOR FILL FLUID 2 29 SECONDARY VALUE 5 5 30 SECONDARY VALUE UNIT 2 31 CAL DEVIATION HI 4 32 CAL DEVIATION LO 4 33 EXTERNAL ZERO TRIM 1 34 PRIMARY VALUE FTIME 4 35 TERTIARY VALUE 5 5 36 SP VALUE TYPE 2 37 SP VALUE RANGE 11 38 CAL
61. 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS A8 1 Multi sensing Process Monitoring Multi sensing process monitoring function option code DG1 provides the advanced diagnostics to detect the abnormal conditions in process environment such as an impulse line etc by using the EJX multi sensing technology and its unique algorithm There are following two functions E Impulse Line Blockage Detection ILBD The fluctuation change of differential pressure and static pressure is monitored by a silicone resonant sensor and detects a potential blockage condition The differential pressure transmitter provides also a result of which pressure side was plugged M Heat Trace Monitoring The flange temperature is calculated by two temperature sensors built in the EJX The temperature change enables to detect the heat trace breakage or the abnormal temperature due to the failure A8 2 Impulse Line Blockage Detection ILBD ILBD is carried out by using statistical analysis based on the measured values of process fluctuations that exist in a fluid An alarm on the EJX LCD display or an analog alert is generated if blockage reaches a certain level EJX provides the following results as blockage detection 1 A Blocking and B Blocking These are blockage detections based on the fluctuation value change of differential pressure pressure With a differential pressure transmit ter each result indicates that both or single si
62. 8 IS IN 8 IN8 The flange temperature is not calculated without option code DGI so that O is displayed 6 11 T0604 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 6 5 6 Units That Can Be Displayed on the LCD by the Automatic Link Function Index Unit Display on the LCD 1000 K K 1001 C deg C 1002 F deg F 1130 Pa Pa 1131 GPa GPa 1132 MPa MPa 1133 kPa kPa 1134 mPa mPa 1135 pPa uPa 1136 hPa hPa 1137 bar bar 1138 mbar mbar 1139 torr torr 1140 atm atm 1141 psi psi 1142 psia psia 1143 psig psig 1144 g cm g cm2 1145 kg cm kg cm2 1146 inH2O inH20 1147 inH2O 4 C inH20 1148 inH2O 68 F inH20 1149 mmH20 mmH2O 1150 mmH20 4 C mmH2O 1151 mmH20 68 F mmH2O 1152 ftH2O ftH2O 1153 ftH20 4 C ftH2O 1154 ftH20 68 F ftH2O 1155 inHg inHg 1156 inHg 0 C inHg 1157 mmHg mmHg 1158 mmHg 0 C mmHg 1318 g s g s 1319 g min g m 1320 g h g h 1322 kg s kg s 1323 kg min kg m 1324 kg h kg h 1325 kg d kg d 1327 t min t m 1328 t h t h 1329 t d t d 1330 Ib s Ib s 1331 Ib min Ib m 1332 Ib h Ib h 1333 Ib d Ib d 1335 STon min STon m 1336 STon h STon h 1337 STon d STon d 1340 LTon h LTon h 1341 LTon d LTon d 6 12 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS
63. 83 0x000040000 Fig Temp High Flange Temperature High Alarm AL 87 Alarm occurs 0x000002000 Fig Temp Low Flange Temperature Low Alarm AL 87 Alarm occurs 0x000001000 Outside VALUE_DPAVG is outside Diagonosis range Range AL 89 0x000000800 Invalid Ref DP VALUE FDP under normal AL 88 conditions is not up to the reference fluctuation level required to blockage detection 0x000000400 Invalid Ref fSPI VALUE FSPL under norma AL 88 conditions is not up to the reference fluctuation level required to blockage detection 0x000000200 Invalid Ref fSPh AL 88 VALUE FSPH under normal conditions is not up to the reference fluctuation level required to blockage detection 0x000000100 Invalid Ref BIKF AL 88 VALUE BLKF under norma conditions is not up to the reference fluctuation level required to blockage detection 0x000000080 B Blocking B Blocking both side AL 89 blockage is detected 0x000000040 High Side High pressure side blockage Blocking AL 89 is detected 0x000000020 Low Side Low pressure side blockage Blocking AL 89 is detected 0x000000010 Large Fluctuation of High Side AL 89 Pressure fluctuation amplitude of high pressure side is large 0x000000008 Large Fluctuation Pressure fluctuation of Low Side amplitude of low pressure AL 89 side is large 0x000000004 A Blocking A Blocking single side AL 89 bloc
64. 99 106 77 95 26 5 10 T0512 3 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Table 5 13 View Object for LCD Transducer Block dex Parameter Mnemonic P ee VER 4442 43 aa 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 TAG_DESC 3 STRATEGY 2 4 ALERT KEY 1 5 MODE BLK 6 BLOCK ERR 7 UPDATE EVT 8 BLOCK ALM 9 TRANSDUCER DIRECTORY 10 TRANSDUCER_TYPE 2 2 2 2 11 XD_ERROR 1 12 COLLECTION_ DIRECTORY 13 DISPLAY_SEL 2 14 INFO SEL 1 15 BLOCK_TAG1 32 16 PARAMETER SEL1 2 17 DISPLAY TAG1 8 18 UNIT_SEL1 1 19 DISPLAY_UNIT1 8 20 EXP_MODE1 1 21 BLOCK_TAG2 32 22 PARAMETER_SEL2 2 23 DISPLAY_TAG2 8 24 UNIT_SEL2 1 25 DISPLAY_UNIT2 8 26 EXP MODE2 1 27 BLOCK TAG3 32 28 PARAMETER_SEL3 2 29 DISPLAY_TAG3 8 30 UNIT_SEL3 1 31 DISPLAY_UNIT3 8 32 EXP_MODE3 1 33 BLOCK_TAG4 32 34 PARAMETER_SEL4 2 35 DISPLAY_TAG4 8 36 UNIT_SEL4 1 37 DISPLAY_UNIT4 8 38 EXP MODE4 1 39 BAR GRAPH SELECT 40 DISPLAY CYCLE 1 41 TEST40 1 5 11 5 CONFIGURATION Relative parameter Mnemonic VEW vew VEM vew vew VEN vew 42 BLOCK TAG5 32 43 PARAMETER_SEL5 2 44 DISPLAY_TAG5 8 45 UNIT_SEL5 1 46 DISPLAY_UNIT5 8 47 EXP_MODE5 1 48 BLOCK_TAG6 32 49 PARAMETER_SEL6 2 50 DISPLAY TAG6 8 51 UNIT_SEL6 1 52 DISPLAY UNI
65. AL 31 Function block 0x10000000 AI2 Lo Lo Alarm Lo Lo Alarm occurs in Al2 occurs AL 31 Function block 0x08000000 AI3 Hi Hi Alarm Hi Hi Alarm occurs in AIS occurs AL 32 Function block 0x04000000 AI3 Lo Lo Alarm Lo_Lo Alarm occurs in AI3 occurs AL 32 Function block 0x02000000 Al4 Hi Hi Alarm Hi_Hi Alarm occurs in Al4 occurs AL 33 function block 0x01000000 AI4 Lo Lo Alarm Lo_Lo Alarm occurs in Al4 occurs AL 33 function block 0x00800000 AI5 Hi Hi Alarm Hi Hi Alarm occurs in AI5 occurs AL 34 function block 0x00400000 AI5 Lo Lo Alarm Lo Lo Alarm occurs in AI5 occurs AL 34 function block 0x00200000 PID Hi Hi Alarm Hi Hi Alarm occurs in PID occurs AL 35 Function block 0x00100000 PID Lo Lo Alarm Lo Lo Alarm occurs in PID occurs AL 35 Function block 0x00008000 RB in O S mode Resource Block is in O S AL 40 mode 0x00004000 Sensor TB in O S Sensor TB is in O S mode mode AL 41 0x00001000 Flow TB in O S FLOW TB is in O S mode mode AL 42 0x00000800 Al1 in O S mode AI1 block is in O S mode AL 43 0x00000400 AI2 in O S mode AI2 block is in O S mode AL 44 0x00000200 AI3 in O S mode AI3 block is in O S mode AL 45 0x00000100 Al4 in O S mode Al4 block is in O S mode AL 46 0x00000080 AI5 in O S mode AI5 block is in O S mode AL 47 8 2 T0804 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Table 8 5 Contents of DEVICE STATUS 5 index 1049
66. ALARM SUM Alarm Summary 31 DENSITY UNIT CODE Density Unit Code 32 LENGTH UNIT CODE Length Unit Code 33 PRIMARY DEVICE CODE Primary Device Code 34 PRIMARY DEVICE DIAMETER Primary Device Diameter 35 PRIMARY DEVICE Primary Device Expansion EXPANSION COEF Coefficient 36 PRIMARY DEVICE Primary Device Refference EF TEMPERATURE Temperature 37 PIPE DIAMETER Pipe Diameter 38 PIPE EXPANSION COEF Pipe Expansion Coefficient 39 PIPE REF TEMPERATURE Pipe Refference Temperature 40 BASE DENSITY FOR Base Density for Volume Flow VOLUME FLOW 41 FLOW CONFIG1 Flow Configuration Parameter 1 42 FLOW CONFIG2 Flow Configuration Parameter 2 43 FLOW CONFIG3 Flow Configuration Parameter 3 44 FLOW_CONFIG4 Flow Configuration Parameter 4 45 CORRECTION VALUE Correction Value 46 CONFIG SOFT REV Configuration Tool Software Revision 47 CONFIG DATE Configuration Date 48 CONFIG WHO Configurated Person 49 CONFIG STATUS Configuration Status 50 CONFIG VSTRING32 Configuration Memo 1 51 CONFIG VSTRING16 Configuration Memo 2 52 CONFIG OSTRING32 Configuration Memo 3 53 CONFIG OSTRING2 Configuration Memo 4 T0906 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E LCD Transducer Block 9 PARAMETER LISTS dey Parameter Name
67. Add 9 6 Parameter Names Cross Reference 3rd Feb 2008 2 1 through 2 7 2 1 Add applicable standard and certificate number for each approval 2 4 through 2 6 2 1 3 Add ATEX intrinsically safe type KS25 2 6 2 1 3 Revise information for ATEX flameproof type 2 7 2 1 4 Add IECEx Flameproof type SF2 10 2 10 3 Add KS25 and SF2 Remove KF2 and add KF21 4th Aug 2008 2 2 2 1 1 Add FM intrinsically safe and Nonincendive type FS15 2 4 2 1 2 Revise certificate number of CSA explosion proof type CF1 10 2 10 3 Add FS15 10 3 10 3 Add the description of Process Sealing Certification to CF1 5th Mar 2009 Add model EJX930A A 69 through A 93 APPENDIX8 Add Advanced diagnostic function 5 8 through 5 11 5 5 Add advanced diagnostic and LCD transducer block parameters 8 3 8 2 Add status regarding Advanced diagnostic 8 7 8 2 Add alarms regarding Advanced diagnostic 9 6 and 9 7 9 2 Add Advanced diagnostic parameters 9 12 through 9 14 9 4 Add LCD transducer block parameters 6th Aug 2009 Miscellaneous corrections REVISION RECORD EPS IM 01C25R03 01E
68. EJX tag or address is changed UNINITIALIZED No tag nor address is set Tag clear Tag setting INITIALIZED Only tag is set Address clear Address setting SM_OPERATIONAL Tag and address are retained and the function block can be executed F0504 EPS Figure 5 4 Status Transition by Setting PD Tag and Node Address EJX multivariable transmitter has a PD Tag FT2001 and node address 245 or hexadecimal F5 that are set upon shipment from the factory unless otherwise specified To change only the node address clear the address once and then set a new node address To set the PD Tag first clear the node address and clear the PD Tag then set the PD Tag and node address again Devices whose node addresses have been cleared will have the default address randomly chosen from a range of 248 to 251 or from hexadecimal F8 to FB At the same time it is necessary to specify the device ID in order to correctly specify the device The device ID of the EJX multivariable transmitter is 594543000Exxxxxxxx The xxxxxxxx at the end of the above device ID is a total of 8 alphanumeric characters IM 01C25R03 01E 5 5 Communication Setting To set the communication function it is necessary to change the database residing in SM VFD 5 5 1 VCR Setting Set VCR Virtual Communication Relationship which specifies the called party for communication and resources EJX multivariable transmitter has 33 VCRs whose applicati
69. IN is good and that of IN_LO is anything other than good IN gt RANGE_LO The status of IN applies IN RANGE_LO See A4 2 1 Main Inputs If the status of IN is anything other than good and that of IN_LO is good IN LO RANGE HI The status of IN LO applies IN LO z RANGE HI gt See A4 2 1 Main Inputs The exception is that if RANGE LO RANGE HI the PV status is made Bad Configuration Error The input status irrelevant to the computing equation selected by ARITH TYPE will be ignored and does not affect other statuses The statuses of outputs OUT Status and PRE_OUT Status are interpreted as the status of the worst input among the statuses of PV and auxiliary inputs IN 1 IN 2 and IN 3 to which INPUT OPTS has been applied Example Good Uncertain Bad Bad Handled as a good input if its status is uncertain No option INPUT OPTS s Handled as a good input if its status is bad IN_2 No option IN 3 No option 1 Flow compensation linear in A4 3 1 Computing Equations ARITH_TYPE Bad TA0404 EPS Uncertain OUT Status A 40 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 4 ARITHMETIC AR BLOCK A4 5 List of the Arithmetic Block Parameters
70. Label neata Parameter Name Label 0 BLOCK HEADER Characteristics 57 UNIT_SEL7 Unit Selection 7 1 ST REV Static Revision 58 DISPLAY_UNIT7 Display Unit 7 2 TAG_DESC Tag Description 59 EXP_MODE7 Exponent Mode 7 3 STRATEGY Strategy 60 BLOCK_TAG8 Block Tag 8 4 ALERT KEY Alert Key 61 PARAMETER SEL8 Parameter Selection 8 5 MODE BLK Block Mode 62 DISPLAY TAG8 Display Tag 8 6 BLOCK ERR Block Error 63 UNIT_SEL8 Unit Selection 8 7 UPDATE EVT Update Event 64 DISPLAY UNIT8 Display Unit 8 8 BLOCK ALM Block Alarm 65 EXP MODE8 Exponent Mode 8 9 TRANSDUCER DIRECTORY Transducer Directory Entry 66 BLOCK_TAG9 Block Tag 9 10 TRANSDUCER TYPE Transducer Type 67 PARAMETER SEL9 Parameter Selection 9 11 XD ERROR Transducer Error 68 DISPLAY TAG9 Display Tag 9 12 COLLECTION DIRECTORY Collection Directory 69 UNIT SEL9 Unit Selection 9 13 DISPLAY SEL Display Selection 70 DISPLAY UNIT9 Display Unit 9 14 INFO SEL Information Selection 71 EXP MODE9 Exponent Mode 9 15 BLOCK TAG1 Block Tag 1 72 BLOCK TAG10 Block Tag 10 16 PARAMETER SEL1 Parameter Selection 1 73 PARAMETER SEL10 Parameter Selection 10 17 DISPLAY TAG1 Display Tag 1 74 DISPLAY TAG10 Display Tag 10 18 UNIT SEL1 Unit Selection 1 75 UNIT SEL10 Unit Selection 10 19 DISPLAY UNIT1 Display Unit 1 76 DISPLAY UNIT10 Display Unit 10 20 EXP MODE 1 Exponent Mode 1 77 EXP MODE10 Exponent Mode 10 21 BLOCK TAG2 Block Tag 2 T0907 EPS 22 PARAMETER SEL2 Parameter Selection 2 23 DISPLAY TAG2 Display
71. No 30 C22 2 No 94 C22 2 No 61010 1 01 C22 2 No 60079 0 C22 2 No 60079 1 For CSA C22 2 Explosion proof for Class I Groups B C and D e Dustignition proof for Class I II Groups E F and G Enclosure TYPE 4X Temperature Code T6 T4 IM 01C25R03 01E For CSA E60079 Flameproof for Zone 1 Ex d IIC T6 T4 Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Maximum Process Temperature 120 C T4 100 C T5 85 C T6 Ambient Temperature 50 to 75 C T4 50 to 80 C T5 50 to 72 C T6 e Supply Voltage 32 V dc max Output Signal 15 mA dc Note 2 Wiring All wiring shall comply with Canadian Electrical Code Part I and Local Electrical Codes n hazardous location wiring shall be in conduit as shown in the figure WARNING A SEAL SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN 50cm OF THE ENCLOSURE UN SCELLEMENT DOIT TRE INSTALL MOINS DE 50cm DU BOITIER WARNING WHEN INSTALLED IN CL DIV 2 SEAL NOT REQUIRED UNE FOIS INSTALL DANS CL I DIV 2 AUCUN JOINT N EST REQUIS Note 3 Operation WARNING AFTER DE ENERGIZING DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING APR S POWER OFF ATTENDRE 5 MINUTES AVANT D OUVRIR WARNING WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 2 65 C USE THE HEAT RESISTING CABLES 2 90 C QUAND LA TEMPERATURE AMBIANTE gt 65 C UTILISEZ DES CABLES RESISTANTES A LA CHALEUR 2 90 C Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when accessing to the instrument and peripheral devices in a
72. Reset confirmation input It is a discrete signal OUT Block output value and status OUT PTRIP Set if the target value exceeds PRE_TRIP It is a discrete signal OUT TRIP Set if the target value exceeds TOTAL SP or 0 It is a discrete signal The Integrator block is classified into the following five sections for each function nput process section Determines the input value status converts the rate and accumulation and determines the input flow direction e Adder Adds the two inputs ntegrator Integrates the result of the adder into the integrated value Output process section Determines the status and value of each output parameter Reset process section Resets the integrated values A 9 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK A2 2 Input Process Section When executed the Integrator block first performs input processing in the order of Determining input status Converting Rate or Accum Determining the input flow direction Switching between Convert Rate and Convert Accum is made using bit O for IN_1 or bit 1 for IN_2 of INTEG_OPTS INTEG_OPTS is one of the system parameters and should be set by the user The values of IN_1 and IN_2 are not retained if the power is turned OFF A2 2 1 Determining Input Value Statuses The following shows the correlation between the statuses of input parameters IN 1 IN_2 and the statuses of input values used in the Integrator block
73. SP POINT HI 4 39 CAL SP POINT LO 4 40 CAL SP MIN SPAN 4 41 CAL SP UNIT 2 42 CAL SP DEVIATION HI 4 43 CAL SP DEVIATION LO 4 44 SP VALUE FTIME 4 45 ATM PRESS 4 46 CURRENT ATM PRESS ENABLE 1 47 EXT TEMP VAL 5 5 48 EXT TEMP RANGE 11 49 CAL EXT TEMP POINT HI 4 50 CAL EXT TEMP POINT LO 4 51 CAL EXT TEMP MIN SPAN 4 52 CAL EXT TEMP UNIT 2 53 CAL EXT TEMP DEVIATION HI 4 54 CAL EXT TEMP DEVIATION LO 4 55 EXT TEMP VALUE FTIME 4 56 EXT TEMP OPTS 2 57 FIXED EXT TEMP VALUE 4 58 SIMULATE MODE 1 T0512 1 EPS 5 8 IM 01C25R03 01E 5 CONFIGURATION Relative Barometer neniani VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW Index 1 2 31 32 33 34 41 42 43 44 45 59 SIMULATE_DPRESS 5 60 SIMULATE_SPRESS 5 61 SIMULATE_ETEMP 5 62 EXT TEMP SENSOR SN 63 CLEAR CAL 64 CAP TEMP VAL 5 5 65 CAP TEMP RANGE 11 66 AMP TEMP VAL 5 5 67 AMP TEMP RANGE 11 68 MODEL 69 SPECIAL ORDER ID 70 MANUFAC DATE 71 CAP GASKET MTL 72 FLANGE MTL 73 D VENT PLUG 74 FLANGE TYPE 75 REM SEAL ISOL MTL 76 FLANGE SIZE 77 REM SEAL NUM 78 REM SEAL FILL FLUID 79 REM SEAL TYPE 80 ALARM SUM 8 8 81 AUTO RECOVERY 1 82 MS CODE 83 DIAG MODE 1 84 DIAG PERIOD 2 85 DIAG PRI 1 86 DIAG_ERR 2 87 DIAG_H ALM 13 88 DIAG L ALM 13 89 DIAG_ OPTION 90 REF_LIM_FDP
74. Service A5 18 2Process Alarms There are six types of process alarms Only one process alarm can be generated at the same time and the process alarm having the highest priority level from among those occurring at the same time is generated The priority level is set for each process alarm type Parameter Process Containing Alarm Cause of Occurrence Priority Level Setting HI HI ALM Occurs when the PV increases HI HI PRI above the HI HI LIM value HI ALM Occurs when the PV increases HI PRI above HI LIM value LO ALM Occurs when the PV decreases LO PRI below the LO LIM value LO LO ALM Occurs when the PV decreases LO LO PRI below the LO LO LIM value DV HI ALM Occurs when the value of DV HI PRI PV SP increases above the DV HI LIM value DV LO ALM Occurs when the value of DV LO PRI PV SP decreases below the DV LO LIM value TA0112 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK A5 19 Example of Block Connec A5 20 View Object for PID Func tions tion Block Parameter Mnemonic kid VIEW VIEW VIEW 1 2 3 4 Al ST_REV a 2 2 2 TAG_DESC STRATEGY 2 IN ALERT_KEY 1 MODE_BLK 4 4 PID BLOCK_ERR 2 2 BKCAL IN OUT PV 5 5 SP 5 5 CAS IN OUT 5 5 AO PV SCALE 11 BKCAL_OUT OUT_SCALE 11 FA0106 EPS GRANT_DENY 2 Wh
75. Stipulates the target mode to which the BLK PID block transfers Actual Indicates the current mode of the PID block Permitted Stipulates all the modes that the PID block can enter The PID block is prohibited from entering any modes other than those set in this element Normal Stipulates the mode in which the PID block normally resides TA0105 EPS There are eight modes for a PID block as shown below Block Mode Description ROut Remote output mode in which the PID block outputs the value set in ROUT IN RCas Remote cascade mode in which the PID block carries out the PID control computation based on the setpoint SP set via the remote cascade connection such as from a computer and outputs the computed result Cas Cascade mode in which the PID block carries out the PID control computation based on the setpoint SP set from another fieldbus function block and outputs the computed result Auto The PID block carries out automatic control and outputs the result computed by the PID control computation Man Manual mode in which the PID block outputs the value set by the user manually LO The PID block outputs the value set in TRK VAL TA0106 1 EPS APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK Block Mode Description IMan Initialization and manual mode in which the control action is suspended The PID block enters this mode when the specified condition is met see Section A5 14 O S Out of service mo
76. Threshold Value The figure below shows the image of tuning effect with a monochrome bar a The tuning image of the threshold values for 1 RATIO_FDP Sart VALUE_FDP REFERENCE_FDP 2 RATIO FSPL Sqrt VALUE_FSPL REFERENCE_FSPL 3 RATIO_FSPH Sart VALUE_FSPH REFERENCE_FSPH 0 1 3 Threshold lower side Threshold upper side 1 DIAG_LIM 2 2 DIAG_LIM 4 3 DIAG_LIM 6 1 DIAG_LIM 1 2 DIAG_LIM 3 3 DIAG_LIM 5 FA0808 1 EPS b The tuning image of the threshold values for 4 Sqrt VALUE BLKF REFERENCE BLKF 4 0 1 EET F Threshold lower side Threshold upper side 4 DIAG_LIM 8 4 DIAG_LIM 7 FA0808 2 EPS Figure A8 7 Tuning Image of Threshold Value APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC Move the threshold toward the white t becomes increasingly likely to give an alarm due to the disturbance from environment change If flow differential pressure is below DIAG_LIM 10 or exceeds DIAG LIM 9 pressure fluctuation is likely too small or too large to detect the blockage Move the threshold toward the black e It enables to be insusceptible to disturbance such as environment change and to detect the blockage easier It becomes giving an alarm of the blockage after the blockage has been progressed The default values at the factory setting are the values of DIAG LIM 1 to 8 shown in Table A8 2 Change the threshold value to solve your problem according
77. To fine tune any errors three zero span adjustment functions can be used automatic and manual zero span adjustment by communication terminals and zero point adjustment by means of the external adjustment screw on the transmitter Automatic adjustment The value of the pressure exerted on the point where the adjustment is to be made is assigned to parameters CAL_POINT_LO CAL_POINT_HI After this assignment is set the amount of adjustment is calcu lated by the transmitter and automatically updated Manual adjustment From the exerted pressure and the output of the transmitter calculate the amount of zero span adjust ment manually and assign the calculated value to parameters CAL_DEVIATION_LO CAL_DEVIATION_HI Zero point adjustment by the external screw With pressure being exerted on the point where the adjustment is to be made zero adjustment needs to be performed To do this adjust the calculated value by turning the external Zero point adjustment screw so that it agrees with the actual input pressure true value The output value increases when the screw is rotated to the right It decreases when the screw is rotated to the left The adjustment width is small when the rotation speed is low and large when fast When performing zero point adjustment by the external screw EXTERNAL ZERO TRIM needs to be set to Enable 6 3 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS Procedure for automatic adjustment The pr
78. UNIT CODE 2 32 LENGTH UNIT CODE 2 33 PRIMARY DEVICE CODE 1 34 PRIMARY DEVICE DIAMETER 4 35 PRIMARY DEVICE 4 EXPANSION COEF 36 PRIMARY DEVICE 4 REF TEMPERATURE 37 PIPE DIAMETER 4 38 PIPE EXPANSION COEF 4 39 PIPE REF TEMPERATURE 4 40 BASE DENSITY FOR 4 VOLUME FLOW 41 FLOW CONFIG1 20 42 FLOW CONFIG2 12 43 FLOW CONFIG3 44 FLOW CONFIGA4 16 45 CORRECTION VALUE 32 46 CONFIG SOFT REV 16 47 CONFIG DATE 16 48 CONFIG WHO 32 49 CONFIG STATUS 2 50 CONFIG VSTRING32 32 51 CONFIG_VSTRING16 32 52 CONFIG_OSTRING32 32 53 CONFIG OSTRING2 2 Totals bytes 39 98 71 92 100 T0513 2 EPS Table 5 15 View Object for Al Function Block 5 CONFIGURATION ea Parameter Mnemonic WEM iud VS id 1 ST REV 2 2 2 2 2 TAG DESC 3 STRATEGY 2 4 ALERT KEY 1 5 MODE BLK 4 4 6 BLOCK ERR 2 2 7 PV 5 5 8 OUT 5 5 9 SIMULATE 10 XD_SCALE 11 11 OUT_SCALE 11 12 GRANT_DENY 2 13 IO_OPTS 2 14 STATUS_OPTS 2 15 CHANNEL 2 16 L_TYPE 1 17 LOW_CUT 4 18 PV_FTIME 19 FIELD_VAL 5 5 20 UPDATE_EVT 21 BLOCK_ALM 22 ALARM_SUM 8 8 23 ACK_OPTION 24 ALARM_HYS 25 HI_HI_PRI 1 26 HI_HI_LIM 4 27 HI_PRI 1 28 HI LIM 4 29 LO PRI 1 30 LO LIM 4 31 LO LO PRI 1 32 LO LO LIM 4 33 HI HI ALM 34 HI ALM 35 LO ALM 36 LO LO ALM 37 OUT D SEL 2 38 OUT D 2 Totals bytes 31 26 33 48 5
79. XIN LO PV IN P o 4 I I 4 Formula based on 1 and 2 LO 7 7 4 Z eee ee HH 1 Range for N 7 RANGE_LO RANGE HI FA0402 EPS Figure A4 2 Range Extension Function and PV 2 Range for IN APPENDIX 4 ARITHMETIC AR BLOCK PV is a parameter with status information and PV 2E status is determined by the value of g If g lt 0 5 gt The status of IN LO is used If g 0 5 gt The status of IN is used Determination of the status is made with a hysteresis of 10 provided for 0 5 If RANGE LO gt RANGE HI the statuses of PV and OUT are Bad Configuration Error Then Configu ration Error is output to BLOCK_ERR If there is only one main input the input is incorpo rated into the computation section as is not taking into account RANGE_HI and RANGE_LO Example Assuming that RANGE_LO 20 RANGE_HI 300 TA0401 EPS the following are established IN 310 IN_LO 20 gt PV 310 IN 230 IN LO 20 g 230 20 300 20 0 75 PV 0 75 X 230 1 0 75 X 20 177 5 IN 90 IN_LO 20 gz 90 20 300 20 0 25 PV 20 25 X 230 1 0 25 x 202 37 5 IN 19 INLO 10 gt PV 10 A4 2 2 Auxiliary Inputs There are bias and gain parameters for the IN_1 IN_2 and IN_3 auxiliary inputs The following shows the equation using them ti IN_i BIAS_IN_i X GAIN_IN_i The bias parameter is
80. alarm display on LCD regarding ILBD is de scribed in Table 8 12 of the section 8 E Reflect Blockage to PV SV TV Status Reflect Blockage to PV SV TV Status corresponding to bit 15 in DIAG OPTION is used to link the alarm to the OUT signal status of PRIMARY VALUE SECONDARY VALUE and TERTIARY VALUE When the ILBD algorithm detects the abnormality each signal status becomes UNCERTAIN Non Specific The alarm is linked to the signal status of PV SV and TV according to the following procedure 1 Set Stop to DIAG MODE 2 Check the checkbox of Availability for the Status of DIAG OPTION Note Set to Calculation after setting the parameters A NOTE The alarms of Invalid Ref xx Outside Diagno sis Range do not link to the signal status of PV SV and TV APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC A8 2 6 Condition Check After the EJX differential pressure pressure transmitter was installed it is necessary to confirm that the Primary Value PV is stable under the normal operat ing condition and that fluctuation amplitude under the normal operating condition is large enough to detect the blockage Bi Stability of Primary Value 1 Observe the value change of PRIMARY_VALUE under the normal operating condition for 10 minutes 2 Confirm the value change is less than 10 If the value change is more than 10 the error influences pressure fluctuation value so that the blockage detection becomes Unrel
81. all LMs on the segment and confirm that the following condition is met A4 1 Check that the LAS is connected on the network When using the EJX as the LAS EIX Other LMs follow the steps described in section A6 3 VSDXVUN lt MDA A4 2 Adjust the parameters of the LAS to that of the QA How can T makean EJX become the LAS EJX Refer to section 5 2 for details LAS EJX V ST gt V ST 4 or above V MID gt V MID 4 or above V MRD gt V MRD 12 or above A2 1 Check that the version numbers of the active schedules in the current LAS and the EJX are the same by reading LinkScheduleListCharacteristicsRecord index 374 for an EJX A4 3 Check that the correct Node Address is used for the EJX Refer to section 5 2 for details ActiveScheduleVersion subindex 3 Confirm that the Node Address of EJX should A2 2 Make the EJX declare itself as and become the be out of the parameters of the LAS of V LAS by writing FUN V FUN V NUN 0x00 false to Confirm that the Node Address is not within PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable in the current the default address OxF8 to OxFB LAS and A 60 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 7 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD APPENDIX 7 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD A7 1 Benefits of Software Download This function enables you to download software to field devices via a FOUNDATION Fieldbus to update their software Typical uses are to add new features such as function blocks and diagnostics to existing de
82. an EJX multivariable transmitter may have the following name 5945430008 000E EJX910A ORIGINAL RI0I ffd Refer to A7 11 3 DOMAIN HEADER about each keyword of the file name A 62 IM 01C25R03 01E The device type is 000E for an EJX multivariable transmitter The software name is ORIGINAL or UPDATE The former indicates an original file and the latter an update file Whenever performing a download to update the device revision obtain the original file In general an addition to the parameters or blocks requires a device revision update A7 6 Steps after Activating a Field Device When the communication with a field device has recovered after activating the device check using the download tool that the software revision of the field device has been updated accordingly The value of SOFT_REV of the resource block indicates the software revision The PD tag node address and transducer block calibration parameters that are retained in the nonvola tile memory inside the target device will remain unchanged after a software download However after a software update which causes an addition to the block parameters or blocks or to the system network management VFD parameters some parameters may be reset to the defaults thus requiring parameter setup and engineering again For details see the table below Also note that a change in the number of parameters or blocks requires the DD and capabilities files corre sp
83. and explains basic parameter settings Refer to Appen dixes for other function blocks LM function and software download function 6 2 Setting and Changing Param eters for the Whole Process A IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power immediately after setting When the parameters are saved to the EEPROM the redundant processing is executed for an improvement of reliability If the power is turned off within 60 seconds after setting is made the modified parameters are not saved and the settings may return to the original values Block mode Many parameters require a change of the block mode of the function block to O S Out of Service when their data is changed To change the block mode of the function block its MODE_BLK needs to be changed The MODE_BLK is comprised of the four sub parameters below 1 Target Target mode Sets the operating condition of the block 2 Actual Actual mode Indicates the current operating condition 3 Permit Permitted mode Indicates the operating condition that the block is allowed to take 4 Normal Normal mode Indicates the operating condition that the block will usually take 6 3 SENSOR Transducer Block The SENSOR transducer block is in between the sensor and the AI function blocks It calculates differential pressure static pressure external tempera ture and capsule temperature from sensor signals Then it performs damping and range checks for the measured values of
84. casing Never loosen the process connector nuts when the instrument is installed in a process This can lead to a sudden explosive release of process fluids When draining condensate from the pressure detector section take appropriate precautions to prevent the inhalation of harmful vapors and the contact of toxic process fluids with the skin or eyes When removing the instrument from a hazardous process avoid contact with the fluid and the interior of the meter All installation work shall comply with local installation requirements and the local electrical code b Wiring The instrument must be installed by an engineer or technician who has an expert knowledge of this instrument Operators are not permitted to carry out wiring unless they meet this condition Before connecting the power cables please confirm that there is no current flowing through the cables and that the power supply to the instrument is switched off 1 2 1 INTRODUCTION c Operation Wait 5 min after the power is turned off before opening the covers d Maintenance Please carry out only the maintenance procedures described in this manual If you require further assistance please contact the nearest Yokogawa office Care should be taken to prevent the build up of dust or other materials on the display glass and the name plate To clean these surfaces use a soft dry cloth e Explosion Protected Type Instrument
85. compressor blower etc is shut down As a result the pressure fluctuation amplitude decreases Level Measurement A transmitter is used to measure tank level and the flow of fluid into or out of the tank comes to a stop The agitator in the tank is shut down A source of pressure variation a compressor etc that controls the internal pressure of a sealed closed tank is shut down Before taking action in response to a blockage alarm you need to consider the plant operating conditions IM 01C25R03 01E E Functional block diagram APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC The figure below shows the functional block diagram of ILBD which is performed in the SENSOR Transducer block EJX SENSOR block Al gt F Output of Al Sensor Transducer block Y blockAl eee ALOUT 1 amp signals Process value FU block Al E ensor calculation A Function block Add result of STB RATIO_FDP blockage detection to status STB RATIO_FSPL Y Values of blockage degree STB RATIO_FSPH Blockage degree a gt STB VALUE FSPH 2 STB VALUE FSPL STB VALUE FSPH Y Result of STB VALUE BLKF Execution of zo Resource blockage detection 5 8 ILBD block eta RS DEVICE_STATUS_7 blockage detection g gt STB DIAG ERR 4 Alarm Blockage alarm STB DIAG_H_ALM 5 Masking STB DIAG_L_ALM LCD Transd
86. control period AMVn to the current read back value of the MV MVrs BKCAL IN This action can be expressed as AMVn AMVn x OUT SCALE EU100 OUT SCALE EU 0 PV SCALE EU 100 PV SCALE EU 0 Direct Acting is False in CONTROL OPTS OUT BKCAL IN AMVn Direct Acting is True in CONTROL OPTS OUT BKCAL IN AMVn A5 6 Direction of Control Action The direction of the control action is determined by the Direct Acting setting in CONTROL OPTS Value of Direct Acting Resulting Action True The output increases when the input PV is greater than the setpoint SP False The output decreases when the input PV is greater than the setpoint SP TA0104 EPS A5 7 Control Action Bypass The PID control computation can be bypassed so as to set the SP value in the control output OUT as shown below Setting BYPASS to On bypasses the PID control computation OUT CAS_IN mt RCAS_IN 9 Po n SP FA0102 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E A5 8 Feed forward Feed forward is an action to add a compensation output signal FF_VAL to the output of the PID control computation and is typically used for feed forward control The figure below illustrates the action FF_VAL Y FF SCALE OUT SCALE x re can O OUT PV PID computation FA0103 EPS A5 9 Block Modes The block mode is set in the parameter MODE BLK MODE_ Target
87. directory that specifies the number and starting indices of DIRECTORY the transducers 10 2010 TRANSDUCER 100 Standard Pre Identifies transducer TYPE ssure with Calibration 11 2011 XD ERROR The error code in transducer 0 No failure 18 Calibration error 20 Electronics failure 22 1 0 failure 12 2012 COLLECTION_ A directory that specifies the number starting indices and DIRECTORY DD Item Ids of the data collections in each transducer within a transducer block 9 3 T0902 1 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write x Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 13 2013 PRIMARY_ 107 differential O S The type of measurement represented by primary value VALUE_TYPE pressure 14 2014 PRIMARY_ The measured value and status available to the function VALUE block 15 2015 PRIMARY _ Range of The High and Low range limit values engineering units code VALUE RANGE capsule and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to be used to display the primary value 16 2016 CAL POINT HI Max range O S The highest calibrated value 17 2017 CAL POINT LO 0 O S The lowest calibrated value 18 2018 CAL MIN SPAN Minimum span of The minimum calibration span value allowed capsule 19 2019 CAL UNIT kPa The engineering unit for the calibrated values 20 2020 SENSOR
88. engineering tool parameter setting utility or the like before carrying out a software download and then reconfigure the field device s after the down load For details see Section A7 6 APPENDIX 7 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD AN CAUTION The current dissipation of the target field device increases transitorily immediately after a down load due to erasing of the FlashROM s contents Use a fieldbus power supply which has sufficient capacity to cover such increases in feed current A CAUTION Upon completion of the activation the target fieldbus device performs resetting internally which temporarily halts fieldbus communication and function block executions Be especially careful about a valve positioner the output air pressure will fall to the minimum level i e zero A CAUTION Do not turn off the power to a field device or disconnect the download tool during a download or activation The device may fail as a result A NOTE Be careful about the noise on the fieldbus link If the fieldbus is noisy the downloading may take a very long time or fail A7 5 Download Files Download files have the following filenames with the filename extension of ffd Take care to choose the correct download file for the target field device e 0 594543 device family _ device type software name software revision ffd domain name For example the name of the download file for
89. etc 5 4005 4105 4205 4305 4405 MODE_ AUTO AUTO The actual target permitted and normal modes of BLK the block 6 4006 4106 4206 4306 4406 BLOCK This parameter reflects the error status associated ERR with the hardware or software components associated with a block It is a bit string so that multiple errors may be shown 7 4007 4107 4207 4307 4407 PV Either the primary analog value for use in executing the function or a process value associated with it May also be calculated from the READBACK value of an AO block 8 4008 4108 4208 4308 4408 OUT Value The primary analog value calculated as a result of MAN executing the function 9 4009 4109 4209 4309 4409 SIMULATE Disable AUTO Allows the transducer analog input or output to the block to be manually supplied when simulate is enabled When simulation is disabled the simulate value and status track the actual value and status 10 4010 4110 4210 4310 4410 XD_ AI Al2 AI3 O S The high and low scale values engineering units SCALE Specified at the code and number of digits to the right of the decimal time of order point used with the value obtained from the Al4 0 to 1000 transducer for a specified channel kg h 11 4011 4111 4211 4311 4411 OUT Al Al2 AI3 O S The high and low scale values engineering units SCALE Specified at the code and number of digits to the right of the decimal time of
90. even if Automatic Auto or Manual Man is written to Target 6 6 3 IO OPTS IO OPTS is a parameter used to select whether options regarding input and output signals should be enabled or disabled In the case of the AI function block the only available option is Low cutoff When enabling the low cut function for outputs set this option Simulate SIMULATE Transducer Value Disable Enabl e o o ___ SIMULATE Enable FIELD_VAL Value Ind Sqr Root SIMULATE Simulate Value Filter PV_FTIME Scaling y 100 Scaling o 1p XD SCALE A00 OUT SCALE 0 1 Indirect Direct 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS 6 6 4 STATUS OPT STATUS OPT is a parameter to select options regard ing the status of signals The AI function block offers four options Propagate Fault Forward Uncertain if Limited BAD if Limited and Uncertain if Man mode Propagate Fault Forward If the status from the sensor is Bad Device failure or Bad Sensor failure propagate it to OUT without generating an alarm The use of these sub statuses in OUT is determined by this option Through this option the user may determine whether alarming sending of an alert will be done by the block or propagated downstream for alarming Uncertain if Man mode When the Uncertain if Man is enabled and the Actual mode is Man the OUT signal status should be Uncertain 6 6 5 OUT D OUT D value is 1 when the alarms selected b
91. floating point number RTotal Integrated value of the absolute values of the increments whose status is bad ATotal Integrated value of the absolute values of the increments regardless of the output status FA0204 EPS Figure A2 4 Status of OUT OUT TRIP and OUT PTRIP Outputs OUT Value OUT TRIP Status and OUT PTRIP Status are determined by the ratio of the Good integrated values to all integrated values which is stored in PCT INCL 096 to 10096 The user must set the threshold value of each status to UNCERT LIM and GOOD LIM The Integrator block determines the status of the output using the three parameters PCT INCL UNCERT LIM and GOOD LIM PCT INCLZGOOD LIM Good UNCERT LIMzPCT INCL GOOD LIM Uncertain PCT INCL UNCERT LIM Bad If INTEG TYPE is 5 6 or 7 the status of the trip output becomes Good NS Constant A 14 IM 01C25R03 01E A2 5 2 Determining the Output Value The value of OUT Value is determined as follows For counting up OUT integration start value 0 Total For counting down OUT integration start value TOTAL_SP _ Total APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK Total Total of integrated values This value is retained even if INTEG_TYPE is changed during integration in AUTO If OUT is rewritten in the MAN mode integration starts with the value rewritten in MAN mode after the mode was returned to AUTO The values in OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP are determined acc
92. following formula and used as treatable monitoring value when the flow change is too large or small CRATIO FDP Sqrt VALUE FDP REFERENCE FDP X REFERENCE DPAVG DPAVG When Compensation is selected in COMP FLG CRATIO FDP is used as monitoring value 112 2112 NRATIO_FDP When Non compensation is selected in COMP FLG NRATIO FDP is used as monitoring value NRATIO FDP Sqrt VALUE FDP REFERENCE FDP 113 2113 DIAG After the reference value is obtained the applicable blockage APPLICABLE detection is displayed on this parameter A 85 TA0810 3 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E A8 2 13 Checklist APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC Fill out the below checklist according to the operation flow of the ILBD in order to keep the important information for the blockage detection Checklist 1 5 No Items Parameters Result Example 1 Enable Analog Alert to Be Generated ALARM_SUM Index 2063 y Diag Alm Disable Uncheck the checkbox of Diag Alm Disable in ALARM SUM 2 Priority Setting of Analog Alert DIAG PRI Index 2085 3 Enter a value of more than 3 to DIAG PRI 3 is recommended 3 Stability of PRIMARY VALUE Status Good differential pressure pressure under normal condition Check that the status of PRIMARY VALUE Index 2014 Max Max
93. from Cas to Auto the cascade connection is opened and the control action of the primary block stops The SP of the secondary controller can be equalized to its cascade input signal CAS_IN also in this case The settings for measured value tracking are made in the parameter CONTROL_OPTS as shown in the table below A 48 IM 01C25R03 01E Options in CONTROL_OPTS Bypass Enable This parameter allows BYPASS to be set SP PV Track Description Equalizes SP to PV when in Man MODE_BLK target is set to Man SP PV Track Equalizes SP to PV when in ROut MODE_BLK target is set to ROut SP PV Track Equalizes SP to PV when actual mode of in LO or IMan the block is set to LO or IMan SP PV Track Equalizes SP to RCAS IN when MODE retained BLK target is set to RCas and to CAS IN Target when MODE BLK target is set to Cas when the actual mode of the block is IMan LO Man or ROut Set the PID block to a direct acting controller Direct Acting Track Enable This enables the external tracking function The value in TRK VAL will replace the value of OUT if TRK IN D becomes true and the target mode is not Man Track in Manual This enables TRK VAL to replace the value of OUT when the target mode is Man and TRK IN D is true The actual mode will then be LO Use PV for Sets the value of PV in BKCAL OUT and BKCAL OUT RCAS OUT instead of the value of SP Obey SP limits Puts the setpoint high low limi
94. gt Range pm Adjust xeu Damping o a EL EXT TEMP VAL calculation QE menm processing dos Channel4 Capsule Range Unit temperature gt 9 oec CAP TEMP VAL i calculation check CES Channel6 Amplifier gt temperature gt Range gt wa c AMP_TEMP_VAL calculation check CES Channel7 Flange L gt temperature gt Pange gt gt m FLG TEMP VAL calculation check d Channel8 Historical records Equipment information F0601 EPS Figure 6 2 SENSOR Transducer Functional Block 6 3 1 Functional block Figure 6 2 presents the functional block of the SEN SOR transducer The calculated values of differential pressure H side static pressure L side static pressure external temperature capsule temperature amplifier temperature and flange temperature option code DG1 are assigned to PRIMARY VALUE SECONDARY VALUE TERTIARY VALUE EXT TEMP VAL CAP TEMP VAL AMP TEMP VAL and FLG TEMP VAL option code DG1 respectively Measured values output to the AI function blocks are selected by the Channel parameter of those blocks 6 3 2 Block Mode The Block modes permitted for the SENSOR transducer block are Automatic Auto and Out of Service O S The mode must be set to Auto under normal operating conditions and to O S when making changes to an important parameter For parameters that can only be changed in the Auto and O S modes refer to the param eter list f
95. iioi trei eee a A 17 A2 6 3 Reset Process ssssssssssssssseese eene nennen A 18 A2 7 List of Integrator Block Parameters sse A 19 iii IM 01C25R03 01E CONTENTS APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK A 21 A3 1 Input Selector Function Block Schematic ssuaaaaa asa saaaaaaa A 21 A3 2 Input Section e esee eee ea aiee aaa tnnt nnns A 23 A3 2 1 Mode Handling itcr oer Wda dana A 23 A3 2 2 MIN GOOD Flandling ii ioni EA estne cage neta A 24 ASS Selectioli tein iren ec o tere TEE A 25 A3 351 OP SELECT Handling ttr ertet A 25 A3 3 2 SELECTION Handling eee A 26 ASA Output Processing crei e ce b pen ood co A 32 A3 4 1 Handling of SELECTED seen A 32 A3 4 2 OUT ProcesSSIIQ aan wzial oai ki AU a AE sinu A 33 A3 4 9 STATUS OPTS ritenere petro eren zeen Era rec erben sanete A 34 A3 5 List of Input Selector Block Parameters s A 34 A36 Application Example uns tt ee lu A 35 APPENDIX 4 ARITHMETIC AR BLOCK eeeeeneneennnn A 36 A4 1 Arithmetic Function Block Schematic ssssssssss A 36 A4 2 Input Section xui cien inrer te re da e odda uda A 37 A4 2 1 Main Inputs incor e euet oes Consuet Et eee Foe A 37 A4 2 2 Auxiliary Inputs ssseeeeennm enn A 37 A4 2 9 INPUT OPUS zuza ti rrr retener to peter ero
96. impulse line blockage is detected an alert is generated by divided into 5 DIAG LALM Transducer block high and low pressure sides Display on LCD When impulse line blockage is detected an alarm status is displayed on LCD TA0801 EPS A 70 IM 01C25R03 01E A8 2 1 Blockage Detection M DIAG_LIM When the parameter based on pressure fluctuation exceeds the preset value EJX diagnoses an impulse line as blockage and gives an alarm The threshold values are set to DIAG_LIM 1 to 10 in the SEN SOR Transducer block TableA8 2 shows the default values at the factory setting which are different according to the model A NOTE When ILBD is performed for the first time use the default value If the pressure fluctuation amplitude is low or a false alarm is often gener ated after ILBD is performed change the values of DIAG_LIM according to the procedure de scribed in A8 2 10 DIAG_LIM Threshold value Parameter 1 fdpmax Threshold to detect A Blocking by using E RATIO_FDP 2 fdpmin Threshold to detect B Blocking by using 2 RATIO FDP 3 fsplmax Threshold to detect Large Fluctuation of L Low Side by using RATIO_FSPL 4 fsplmin Threshold to detect Low Side Blocking by using RATIO_FSPL fsphmax Threshold to detect Large Fluctuation of 5 High Side by using RATIO_FSPH 6 fsphmin Threshold to detect High Side Blocking by using RATIO FSPH
97. in O S mode AL 73 0x00200000 IS in MAN mode IS block is in MAN mode AL 73 0x00100000 IS Non Schduled IS block is not scheduled AL 73 0x00080000 AR in O S mode AR block is in O S mode AL 74 0x00040000 AR in MAN mode AL 74 AR block is in MAN mode 0x00020000 AR Non Schduled AL 74 AR block is not scheduled 0x00000002 LCD Display Displayed value exceeds limit Outside Range Limit AL 79 0x00000001 LCD Display Specified settings for Display Config Error do not meet the conditions AL 79 T0806 EPS 8 3 8 DEVICE INFORMATION Table 8 7 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_7 index 1051 Hexadecimal 0x80000000 Display through DD Sensor TB Simulation Active AL 80 Description Simulation function of Sensor TB is active 0x40000000 Flow TB Configuration error occurs in Configuration Flow TB Error AL 81 0x20000000 Flow TB Configuration error Algorithm Error 1 AL 82 0x10000000 Flow TB Algorithm Error 2 AL 82 Configuration error 0x08000000 Flow TB Algorithm Error 3 AL 82 Configuration error 0x04000000 Flow TB Algorithm Error 4 AL 82 Configuration error 0x02000000 Flow TB Algorithm Error 5 AL 82 Configuration error 0x01000000 Flow TB Algorithm Error 6 AL 82 Configuration error 0x00800000 Flow TB Check Precise flow setting CHECK Sum Error SUM error AL
98. jeziku kontaktirajte va najbli i Yokogawa office ili predstaunika QD Az ATEX Ex m szerek g pk nyveit angol n met s francia nyelven adjuk ki Amennyiben helyi nyelven k rik az Ex eszk z k le r sait k rj k keress k fel a legk zelebbi Yokogawa irod t vagy k pviseletet BCHUKH yrrerBanuus 3a IpOJLYKTH or cepuara ATEX Ex ce rpejylaraT Ha aHTIM CKH HeMCKH H ppeHckn e3uK AKO ce myxlaere OT yIBTBAHHA 3a npo rykrH OT cepusra Ex Ha pojiuus BH e3HK ce CBbpxeTe c Hali OJM3KHA oduc HIM Ipe CTABHTEJICTBO Ha upma Yokogawa Toate manualele de instructiuni pentru produsele ATEX Ex sunt in limba engleza germana si franceza In cazul in care doriti instructiunile in limba locala trebuie sa contactati cel mai apropiat birou sau reprezentant Yokogawa Se Il manwali kollha ta l istruzzjonijiet ghal prodotti marbuta ma ATEX Ex huma disponibbli bl Ingli bil ermani u bil Fran i Jekk tkun te tie struzzjonijiet marbuta ma Ex fil lingwa lokali tieg ek g andek tikkuntattja lill eqreb rappre entan jew uffi ju ta Yokogawa 1 5 1 INTRODUCTION IM 01C25R03 01E 2 HANDLING CAUTIONS 2 HANDLING CAUTIONS 2 1 Installation of an Explosion Protected Instrument If a customer makes a repair or modification to an intrinsically safe or explosionproof instrument and the instrument is not restored to its original condition its intrinsically safe or explosionproof construction may
99. limit is exceeded the count returns to 0 4 Judging OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP see A2 5 OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP are judged again on the basis of the cleared integrated values There are three options relating to a reset i Confirm reset bit 8 of INTEG_OPTS ii Carry bit 6 of INTEG_OPTS iii Generate reset event bit 9 of INTEG_OPTS 1 Confirm reset bit 8 of INTEG_OPTS If this option is enabled the next reset is rejected until 1 is set to RESET CONFIRM ii Carry bit 6 of INTEG OPTS If this option is enabled while INTEG TYPE is UP AUTO or DN AUTO the value exceeding the threshold at a reset will be carried into the next integration If INTEG TYPE is any setting other than UP AUTO or DN AUTO this option is irrelevant m iii Generate reset event bit 9 of INTEG_OPTS If this option is enabled an alert event is generated if a reset occurs A 18 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK A2 7 List of Integrator Block Parameters Parameter Initial Write View p Index Definition Name Value Mode 1 2 3 0 BLOCK HEADER TAG IT Block Tag Information relating to this function block such as block tag ofs DD revision execution time 1 ST REV 0 2 2 2 The revision level of the set parameters associated with the Integrator block 2 TAG_DESC Null Stores comments describing tag
100. nonvolatile parameters to non volatile memory Zero means never 24 1024 FREE_SPACE 0 Percent of memory available for further configuration EJX has zero which means a preconfigured resource 25 1025 FREE_TIME 0 Percent of the block processing time that is free to process additional blocks EJX does not support this 26 1026 SHED_RCAS 640000 2S AUTO Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block RCas locations Supported only with PID function 27 1027 SHED ROUT 640000 2S AUTO Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block ROut locations Supported only with PID function 28 1028 FAULT_STATE 1 Condition set by loss of communication to an output block failure promoted to an output block or a physical contact When fail safe condition is set then output function blocks will perform their FSAFE actions 29 1029 SET_FSTATE 1 AUTO Allows the fail safe condition to be manually initiated by selecting Set 30 1030 CLR_FSTATE 1 AUTO Writing a Clear to this parameter will clear the device fail safe state if the field condition if any has cleared 31 1031 MAX_NOTIFY 3 Maximum number of unconfirmed notify messages possible 32 1032 LIM NOTIFY 3 AUTO Maximum number of unconfirmed alert notify messages allowed 33 1033 CONFIRM TIM 5000 ms AUTO The minimum time between retries of alert reports 34 1034 WRITE LOCK Not locked AUTO If set no writes from anywhere are allo
101. operation PV SV OUT Mode etc VIEW_2 Set of static parameters which need to be shown to plant operator at once Range etc VIEW_3 Set of all the dynamic parameters VIEW 4 Set of static parameters for configuration or maintenance T0510 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Table 5 11 View Object for Resource Block Parameter Mnemonic e a M a 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 2 TAG_DESC 3 STRATEGY 2 4 ALERT_KEY 1 5 MODE_BLK 6 BLOCK_ERR 7 RS_STATE 1 1 8 TEST_RW 9 DD_RESOURCE 10 MANUFAC_ID 4 11 DEV TYPE 2 12 DEV_REV 1 13 DD_REV 1 14 GRANT_DENY 2 15 HARD_TYPES 2 16 RESTART 17 FEATURES 2 18 FEATURE_SEL 2 19 CYCLE_TYPE 2 20 CYCLE_SEL 2 21 MIN_CYGLE_T 22 MEMORY SIZE 23 NV CYCLE T 24 FREE SPACE 25 FREE TIME 4 4 26 SHED RCAS 27 SHED ROUT 28 FAULT STATE 1 1 29 SET FSTATE 30 CLR FSTATE 31 MAX NOTIFY 1 32 LIM NOTIFY 1 33 CONFIRM TIME 4 34 WRITE LOCK 1 35 UPDATE EVT 36 BLOCK ALM 37 ALARM SUM 8 8 38 ACK OPTION 2 39 WRITE PRI 1 40 WRITE ALM 41 ITK VER 2 42 SOFT REV 43 SOFT DESC 44 SIM ENABLE MSG 45 DEVICE STATUS 1 4 T0511 1 EPS 5 7 5 CONFIGURATION der Parameter Mnemonic kir kij ow eri 46 DEVICE STATUS 2 4 47 DEVICE STATUS 3 4 48 DEVICE STATUS 4 4 49 DEVICE STATUS 5 4 50 DEVICE STATUS 6 4 51 DEVICE STATUS
102. order point to be used in displaying the OUT parameter Al4 0 to 1000 and parameters which have the same scaling as kg h OUT 12 4012 4112 4212 4312 4412 GRANT 0 AUTO Options for controlling access of host computers and DENY local control panels to operating tuning and alarm parameters of the block 13 4013 4113 4213 4313 4413 IO OPTS 0 O S Options which the user may select to alter input and output block processing 14 4014 4114 4214 4314 4414 STATUS_ 0 O S Options which the user may select in the block OPTS processing of status 15 4015 4115 4215 4315 4415 CHANNEL AI1 1 O S The number of the logical hardware channel that is Al2 2 connected to this I O block This information defines Al3 4 the transducer to be used going to or from the Al4 5 physical world AI5 6 1 PV 2 SV 3 TV 4 EXT_TEMP_VALUE 5 FLOW_VALUE 6 CAP TEMP VAL 7 AMP TEMP VAL 8 FLG TEMP VAL 9 15 T0904 1 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Index Index Index Index Index Parameter Factory Write Expia ati n Index AI Al2 AI3 AM AI5 Name Default Mode PRZ 16 4016 4116 4216 4316 4416 L TYPE Alt MAN Determines if the values passed by the transducer Specified at block to the Al block may be used directly Direct or the time of if the value is in different units and must be order converted linear
103. start blockage detection operation Check that an alarm of B Blocking is gener ated after the time that consists of DIAG_PERIOD and DIAG_COUNT passed Check also the operation of the analog alert if an analog alert is set Open the valves completely and check that there are no alarms 3 4 5 wm 6 wm A8 2 9 Start ILBD Operation If process condition and capability to detect a blockage are confirmed the ILBD operation can be started according to the following procedure 1 Check the value of sampling period DIAG_PERIOD Check the number of times that detect the blockage consecutively in order to give an alarm DIAG_COUNT The default value at the shipment is set to 3 times Set Calculation status to DIAG MODE If the reference value has not yet been obtained set Reference to DIAG_MODE After obtained the reference values the ILBD starts automatically At the same time DIAG_MODE changes automatically from Reference to Calculation 2 3 wm IM 01C25R03 01E A8 2 10 Tuning When the pressure fluctuation amplitude in fluids is not sufficiently large or an alarm is often generated according to the process condition tune up by chang ing the threshold for the blockage detection DIAG_LIM or the sampling period DIAG_PERIOD to enhance the accuracy of the blockage detection The ILBD operation must be stopped to tune up Set Stop to DIAG_MODE E
104. the number of inputs N For this determination is made to see if the sub status of each input is Not Connected Note that the main inputs may be accepted if IN or IN LO is not in Not Connected sub status In this case the number of inputs that are not in Not Connected sub status is regarded as N A4 4 Output Section After executing the computing equation the block applies a gain to the calculated result and then adds a bias to it It then substitutes the result into PRE_OUT and if the mode is in AUTO the value of PRE OUT is taken as OUT PRE OUT func X gain bias where func result of computing equation execution OUT PRE OUT when the mode is in AUTO Next the block performs limitation processing OUT HI LIM OUT LOW LIM This processing is described as follows with respect to the value of PRE OUT If PRE OUT OUT HI LIM PRE OUT OUT HI LIM The high limited processing is applied to the status of PRE OUT If PRE OUT OUT LO LIM PRE OUT OUT LO LIM The low limited processing is applied to the status of PRE OUT A 39 IM 01C25R03 01E A4 4 1 Mode Handling Mode Output Auto OUT PRE_OUT MAN For OUT the OUT value in the Auto mode just O S before change to MAN or O S is retained TA0403 EPS In the Manual mode including O S the value of OUT in the Auto mode just before a change to the Manual mode is held or the value written to OUT is output
105. used for calculating absolute temperature or absolute pressure while the gain parameter is used for normalization of square root extraction A 37 IM 01C25R03 01E A4 2 3 INPUT_OPTS INPUT_OPTS has an option that handles an input with uncertain or bad status as a good status input Bit Function 0 Handles IN as a good status input if its status is uncertain 1 Handles IN LO as a good status input if its status is uncertain 2 Handles IN_I as a good status input if its status is uncertain Handles IN 1 as a good status input if its status is bad 4 Handles IN 2 as a good status input if its status is uncertain 5 Handles IN 2 as a good status input if its status is bad 6 Handles IN 3 as a good status input if its status is uncertain 7 Handles IN 3 as a good status input if its status is bad 8 to 15 Reserved TA0402 EPS There are options called IN Use uncertain and IN_LO Use uncertain for the IN and IN_LO inputs When these options are valid IN and IN_LO are internally interpreted as good IN and IN_LO even if their statuses are uncertain There is no option for bad status For the IN_1 IN_2 and IN_3 auxiliary inputs there are options known as IN_i Use uncertain and IN_i Use bad If these options are valid an IN_i with u
106. with the following parameters is suitable R 90 1020 C 0 2 2 F 0 8 1 2 uF is required in operation The resistor must be infallible according to IEC 60079 11 Number of Devices The number of devices max 32 possible on a fieldbus link depends on factors such as the power consumption of each device the type of cable used use of repeaters etc Eniity Model Non Hazardous Hazardous Locations Locations Supply Unit and Safety Barrier Terminator Terminator Hand held Data Terminal xf Field Instruments Passive F0202 1 EPS I S fieldbus system complying with Entity model I S values Power supply field device Po 5 Pi Uo Ui Io S Ii Calculation of max allowed cable length Ccable X Co Ci Ci Terminator Leable X Lo Li 2 7 2 HANDLING CAUTIONS Number of Devices The number of devices max 32 possible on a fieldbus link depends on factors such as the power consumption of each device the type of cable used use of repeaters etc b CENELEC ATEX KEMA Flameproof Type Caution for CENELEC ATEX KEMA flameproof type Note 1 EJX multivariable transmitter with optional code KF21 for potentially explosive atmo spheres No KEMA 07ATEX0109 Applicable Standard EN 60079 0 2006 EN 60079 1 2004 EN 61241 0 2006 EN 61241 1 2004 Type of Protection and Marking Code Ex d IIC T6 T4 Ex tD A21 IP6x T85 T100
107. 0000 Wire medium AndData voltage mode Rates and 31 25 kbps Supported are supported 3 lceVersion 2 0x0403 IEC 4 3 is supported 4 NumOf 1 11 Channels 5 Power 1 10 0 Bus powered Mode 1 Self powered TA0210 EPS 10 ChannelStates Sub Size ra index Element bytes Value Description 1 Channel 1 1 0x00 In Use No Bad since last read No Silent since last read No Jabber since last read Tx Good Rx Good 2 Channel 2 1 0x80 Unused 3 Channel 3 1 0x80 Unused 4 Channel 4 1 0x80 Unused 5 Channel 5 1 0x80 Unused 6 Channel 6 1 0x80 Unused 7 Channel 7 1 0x80 Unused 8 Channel 8 1 0x80 Unused TA0211 EPS APPENDIX 6 LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS 11 PlmeBasiclnfo Element 1 lnterfaceMode Description 0 0 Half duplex 1 Full duplex 2 LoopBackMode 1 0 0 Disabled 1 MAU 2 MDS XmitEnabled 1 0x01 Channel 1 is enabled RcvEnebled 1 0x01 Channel 1 is enabled PreferredReceive 1 0x01 Channel 1 is used for Channel reception 6 MediaType 1 0x49 Wire medium voltage Selected mode and 31 25 kbps are selected 7 ReceiveSelect 0x01 Channel 1 is used for reception TA0212 EPS 12 LinkScheduleActivationVariable Writing the version number of an LAS schedule which has already been downloaded to the domain to this parameter causes the corresponding schedule to be executed On the other hand writing O to this p
108. 079 0 2006 EN 50020 2002 EN 60079 27 2006 EN 50284 1009 EN 50281 1 1 1998 A1 Certificate KEMA O6ATEX0278X Il 1GD Ex ia IIB IIC T4 Type of protection IP66 and IP67 Amb Temp 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Max Process Temp Tp 120 C 248 F Electrical data KS25 CENELEC ATEX Supply Output circuit terminals and FISCO IIC Ui 17 5V li 380mA Pi 5 32W Ci 1 76nF Li 0uH FISCO IIB Ui 17 5V li 460mA Pi 5 32W Ci 1 76nF Li 0uH Entity Ui 24V li 250mA Pi 1 2W Ci 1 76nF Li 0uH External Temperature Input circuit connector Uo 7 63V lo 3 85mA Po 8mW Co 4 8nF Lo 100 mH Max Surface Temp for dust proof T85 C Tp 80 C T100 C Tp 100 C T120 C Tp 120 C T1002 EPS 10 2 IM 01C25R03 01E 10 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Item Description Code CSA Explosionproof Approval Certificate 2014354 Applicable Standard C22 2 No 0 C22 2 No 0 4 C22 2 No 0 5 C22 2 No 25 C22 2 No 30 C22 2 No 94 C22 2 No 60079 0 C22 2 No 60079 1 C22 2 No 61010 1 01 Explosion proof for Class Groups B C and D Dustignition proof for Class II III Groups E F and G Canadian Standards When installed in Division 2 SEAL NOT REQUIRED Enclosure TYPE 4X Temp Code eri Association CSA T6 TA Ex d IIC T6 T4 Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Max Process Temp T4 120 C 248 F T5 100 C 212 F T6 85 C 185 F Amb Temp 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F for T4 50 to 80 C 58 to 176 F for T5 50
109. 1 HI ALM As above 62 LO ALM As above Reset when the PV value has increased above LO_LIM ALM HYS 63 LO LO ALM As above 64 DV HI ALM Alarm that is generated when the value of PV SP has exceeded the DV HI LIM value Other features are the same as HI HI ALM 65 DV LO ALM Alarm that is generated when the value of PV SP has decreased below the DV LO LIM value Other features are the same as LO LO ALM A 45 TA0102 2 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E A5 4 PID Computation Details A5 4 1 PV proportional and derivative Type PID I PD Control Algorithm For PID control the PID block employs the PV proportional and PV derivative type PID control algorithm referred to as the I PD control algorithm in Auto and RCas mode The I PD control algorithm ensures control stability against sudden changes in the setpoint such as when the user enters a new setpoint value At the same time the I PD algorithm ensures excellent controllability by performing proportional integral and derivative control actions in response to changes of characteristics in the controlled process changes in load and occurrences of disturbances In Cas mode PV derivative type PID control algorithm referred to as the PI D control algorithm is employed in order to obtain better performance against the changes in the setpoint The algorithm is automatically switched by the block according to the mode
110. 2326 REF_STATIC_ 0 101325 O S Sets the design reference static pressure value used in the PRESSURE Basic Mode 27 2327 REF_EXT_ 0 O S Sets the design reference temperature value used in the TEMPERATURE Basic Mode 28 2328 TEMP_K1_ 0 O S Sets the temperature coefficient for density compensation FOR_LIQUID used when calculating the liquid flow in the Basic Mode 29 2329 FLUID TYPE 2 O S Sets the fluid code in the Basic Mode CODE 1 Liquid 2 Gas 30 2330 ALARM SUM Alarm Enable Indicates the alarm state of the entire block 31 2331 DENSITY 1097 kg m3 O S Indicates the density unit UNIT CODE 1097 kg m3 1107 Ib ft3 32 2332 LENGTH 1010 m O S Indicates the length unit UNIT CODE 1018 ft 1010 m 1019 in 1012 cm 1013 mm 33 2333 PRIMARY 2 O S Indicates the diaphragm type code DEVICE CODE For details on type code see Table 9 1 34 2334 PRIMARY 0 03162 O S Indicates the diaphragm inner diameter DEVICE DIAMETER 35 2335 PRIMARY DEVICE 0 00001681 O S Indicates the diaphragm linear expansion coefficient value EXPANSION COEF 36 2336 PRIMARY DEVICE 20 O S Indicates the temperature during diaphragm inner diameter REF TEMPERATURE measurement 37 2337 PIPE DIAMETER 0 0527 O S Indicates the pipe inner diameter 38 2338 PIPE_ 0 00001148 O S Indicates the pipe linear expansion coefficient value EXPANSION COEF 39 2339 PIPE REF 20 O S Indicates the temperature during pipe inner diameter TEMPERATURE
111. 3 CAL EXT TEMP DEVIA Ext Temp Calibration Highest 3 STRATEGY Strategy TION HI Deviation 4 ALERT KEY Alert Key 54 CAL EXT TEMP DEVIA Ext Temp Calibration Lowest 5 MODE BLK Block Mode TION LO Deviation 6 BLOCK ERR Block Error 55 EXT TEMP VALUE FTIME Ext Temp Filter Time 7 UPDATE EVT Update Event 56 EXT TEMP OPTS Fixed Mode 8 BLOCK ALM Block Alarm 57 FIXED EXT TEMP VALUE Ext Temp at Fixed Mode 9 TRANSDUCER DIRECTORY Transducer Directory Entry 58 SIMULATE MODE Simulation Mode 10 TRANSDUCER TYPE Transducer Type 59 SIMULATE_DPRESS Simulation Pres 11 XD ERROR Transducer Error 60 SIMULATE_SPRESS Simulation Static Pres 12 COLLECTION DIRECTORY Collection Directory 61 SIMULATE ETEMP Simulation Ext Temp 13 PRIMARY VALUE TYPE Pressure Type 62 EXT TEMP SENSOR SN Ext Temp Sensor Serial Number 14 PRIMARY VALUE Pressure 63 CLEAR CAL Clear Calibration 15 PRIMARY VALUE RANGE Pressure Range 64 CAP TEMP VAL Cap Temp 16 CAL POINT HI Calibration Highest Point 65 CAP TEMP RANGE Cap Temp Range 17 CAL POINT LO Calibration Lowest Point 66 AMP TEMP VAL Amp Temp 18 CAL MIN SPAN Calibration Minimum Span 67 AMP TEMP RANGE Amp Temp range 19 CAL UNIT Calibration Units 68 MODEL Model 20 SENSOR TYPE Sensor Type 69 SPECIAL ORDER ID Special Order ID 21 SENSOR RANGE Sensor Range 70 MANUFAC DATE Manufacture Date 22 SENSOR SN Sensor Serial Number 71 CAP GASKET MTL Capsule Gasket Material 23 SENSOR CAL METHOD Sensor Calibration method 72 FLANGE
112. 33 2033 EXTERNAL_ 0 O S Permission of external zero adjustment ZERO_TRIM 34 2034 PRIMARY_ 2 O S Damping time constant for primary value VALUE_FTIME 35 2035 TERTIARY Value and status of static pressure at low side VALUE 36 2036 SP VALUE 109 O S Select the type of measurement for static pressure absolute TYPE absolute or gauge pressure 9 4 T0902 2 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 37 2037 SP VALUE Range of High and low range limit values engineering units and RANGE capsule decimal point place for static pressure 38 2038 CAL SP 25 O S The highest calibrated value for static pressure POINT HI 39 2039 CAL SP 0 O S The Lowest calibrated value for static pressure POINT LO 40 2040 CAL SP MIN 1 0 The minimum calibration span allowed for static pressure SPAN 41 2041 CAL SP UNIT 1545 MPaa The calibrated engineering unit for static pressure This unit is linked to XD_SCALE unit of Al blocks 42 2042 CAL_SP_ 0 O S Deviation value for span adjustment of static pressure DEVIATION_HI 43 2043 CAL_SP_ 0 O S Deviation value for zero adjustment of static pressure DEVIATION_LO 44 2044 SP VALUE FTIME 1 O S Damping time constant for static pressure 45 2045 ATM PRESS 101 325 O S Atmosphere pressure value used to obtain gauge pressure value from abso
113. 48 IN_4 2 34 p IN_5 23 6 p gt SELECTED 8 IN_6 15 5 p IN_7 32 5 p AREA 4 SELECT TYPE Average DISABLE 1 OFF SEM STATUS OPTS DISABLE 2 OFF y MIN GOOD 1 DISABLE_3 OFF p DISABLE_4 OFF p DISABLE_5 OFF p DISABLE_6 OFF p DISABLE_7 OFF p DISABLE 8 OFF p OP_SELECT 0 p FA0309 EPS Figure A3 9 Example 8 When SELECT TYPE is Latched Good The valid input with the smaller input number is selected as an output and is held until it becomes invalid When it becomes invalid the next valid input will be selected as an output regardless of the magnitude of the value Even if an input with the input number smaller than that of the currently selected input recovers the current selection is held Assuming that IN 2 is the valid input with the smallest input number the order of input selection is IN 2 gt IN_3 gt IN 8 gt IN1 gt If the power is turned OFF and then ON with SELECT TYPE set to Latched Good input selection starts with the IN that was selected before the power was turned OFF A 31 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK A3 4 Output Processing A3 4 1 Handling of SELECTED For the value output to SELECTED when OP SELECT has been selected that is not 0 the number specified by OP_SELECT will be stored as is However 0 is stored in the SELECTED in the follo
114. 4X and Class I Zone 2 Group IIC Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X and Class III Division 1 Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X Electrical Connection 1 2 NPT female M20 female Caution for FM Intrinsically safe type Following contents refer to DOC No IFM026 A12 p 1 to p 4 M IFM026 A12 Installation Diagram for Intrinsically safe Division 1 Installation Terminator o 1 RE A ZZA Pressure od Transmitter o Poo EE ee em ee a L ro 1 i o Field Instruments i 0 Ek GF aS Sy Go SS PAK we ZA awe Ss TALE I ro i o Field Instruments MOL i Hazardous Location oa NAE Non Hazardous Location Terminator MP DEUS a Safety Barrier I l EQ Q T L F0206 EPS Note 1 Barrier must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI ISA 61010 1 Note 2 Control equipment connected to the Associ ated Apparatus must not use or generate more than 250 Vrms or Vdc 2 2 2 HANDLING CAUTIONS Note 3 Installation should be in accordance with ANSI ISA 12 06 01 Installation of Intrinsi cally Safe Systems for Hazardous Classified Locations and the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Sections 504 and 505 Note 4 The configuration of Associated Apparatus must be Factory Mutual Research Approved under FISCO Concept Note 5 Associated Apparatus
115. 5 6 10 1 Initial Setting 2 Condition Check 3 Start up 1 1 Analog Alert Setting Enable an alert to be generated by ALM_SUM parameter Set the report priority to DIAG_PRI parameter Refer to A8 2 5 1 2 Alarm Masking Select the alarm status to display on LCD or to give an alert by DIAG_OPTION parameter Refer to A8 2 5 2 1 Check Stability of PV Check the stability of Primary value Refer to A8 2 6 2 2 Check Fluctuation Values Check whether the fluctuation values are available for ILBD APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC Refer to A8 2 6 i lt 3 1 Obtain Reference Values Obtain a reference fluctuation value of differential pressure pressure and static pressure under normal condition Refer to A8 2 7 3 2 Check Detection Capability Simulate the blockage detection operation with a three valve manifold or stop valve Tuning Change the threshold value by DIAG LIM parameter Change the sampling time by DIAG PERIOD parameter Refer to A8 2 8 y OK Refer to A8 2 10 4 Perform ILBD algorithm Refer to A8 2 9 Spurious alarm detection Process condition is changed by a comparison Reset Reference Values Reset a reference fluctuation value of differential pressure pressure according to process condition of th
116. 64 for other VCRs FasDllResidual ActivitySupported Specifies whether connection is monitored Set TRUE Oxff for Server This parameter is not used for other communication FasDlITimelinessClass Not used for EJX FasDllPublisherTime WindowSize Not used for EJX FasDllPublisher SynchronizaingDlcep Not used for EJX T0504 1 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Sub index Parameter Description 12 FasDllSubsriberTime Not used for EJX WindowSize 13 FasDllSubscriber SynchronizationDlcep 14 FmsVfdld Not used for EJX Sets VFD for EJX to be used 0x1 System network management VFD 0x1234 Function block VFD 15 FmsMaxOutstanding Set0 to Server It is not ServiceCalling used for other applications 16 FmsMaxOutstanding Set 1 to Server It is not ServiceCalled used for other applications 17 FmsFeatures Supported Indicates the type of services in the application layer In the EJX it is automatically set according to specific applications T0504 2 EPS 33 VCRs are factory set as shown in the table below Table 5 5 VCR List cay Na Factory Setting 293 1 For system management Fixed 294 2 Server LocalAddr OxF3 295 3 Server LocalAddr 0xF4 296 4 Server LocalAddr OxF7 297 5 Trend Source LocalAddr 0x07 Remote Address 0x1 11 298 6 Publisher for Al1 LocalAddr 0x20 299 7 Alert Source LocalAddr
117. 72 IT block is not scheduled or is MAN O S IT Depends on Depends on cause of Alarm ITO S mode cause of Alarm IT MAN NO SCHD AL 73 IS block is not scheduled or is MAN O S IS Depends on Depends on cause of Alarm IS O S mode cause of Alarm IS MAN NO SCHD AL 74 AR block is not scheduled or is MAN O S AR Depends on Depends on cause of Alarm AR O S mode cause of Alarm AR MAN NO SCHD AL 90 Simulation function of Al1 block is active All Simulate Active Specified Status ALSML AL 91 Simulation function of Al2 block is active Al2 Simulate Active Specified Status AI SML AL 92 Simulation function of AI3 block is active AI3 Simulate Active Specified Status AI SML AL 93 Simulation function of Al4 block is active Al4 Simulate Active Specified Status AI SML AL 94 Simulation function of AI5 block is active AI5 Simulate Active Specified Status AI SML AL 95 Al1 block is MAN mode AH z Depends on setting condition of STATUS_OPT AI MAN Limit Status Constant AL 96 Al2 block is MAN mode Al2 Depends on setting condition of STATUS OPT AI MAN Limit Status Constant AL 97 AI3 block is MAN mode Al3 Depends on setting condition of STATUS OPT AI MAN Limit Status Constant AL 98 Al4 block is MAN mode Al4 Depends on setting condition of STATUS OPT AI MAN Limit Status Constant AL 99 AI5 block is MAN mode AI5 Depends on setting condition of STATUS OPT AI MAN Limit Status Constant 1 Priority 0 the as
118. 80 ALARM SUM Alarm Enable The current alert status unacknowledged states unreported states and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block 81 2081 AUTO RECOVERY 1 ON O S Permission of auto recovery from sensor errors 82 2082 MS CODE Null Model suffix and codes 83 2083 DIAG MODE 0 stop AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 84 2084 DIAG PERIOD 180 AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 85 2085 DIAG PRI 1 AUTO Used for ILBD and Heat Trace Monitoring Refer to A8 2 12 86 2086 DIAG ERR Used for ILBD and Heat Trace Monitoring Refer to A8 2 12 87 2087 DIAG H ALM Used for ILBD and Heat Trace Monitoring Refer to A8 2 12 88 2088 DIAG_L_ALM Used for ILBD and Heat Trace Monitoring Refer to A8 2 12 89 2089 DIAG OPTION 0 AUTO Used for ILBD and Heat Trace Monitoring Refer to A8 2 12 9 6 T0902 4 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 90 2090 REF LIM FDPMIN 7 00E 10 AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 91 2091 REF LIM FSPMIN 1 00E 10 AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 92 2092 REF_LIM_ 0 5 AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 BLKFMAX 93 2093 COMP_FLAG 0 Compensation AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2 12 94 2094 DIAG_LIM Note AUTO Used for ILBD Refer to A8 2
119. A2 6 2 Reset Timing AII items are reset during execution of the function block Therefore the minimum period of a reset is the block execution period 5 second rule If a reset is made the next reset will not be accepted for 5 seconds after that Even if UP AUTO or DN AUTO is activated and TOTAL SP or 0 is reached within 5 seconds the next reset will not be made for 5 seconds from the previous reset CLOCK PER If INTEG TYPE is PERIODIC 5 or PER amp DEM 7 a reset is made at the period sec set to the CLOCK PER parameter If the value in CLOCK PER is smaller than the function block s execution period bit 1 of BLOCK ERR Block Configuration Error is set A 17 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK A2 6 3 Reset Process The basic reset process sequence is as follows 1 Snapshot 2 Clearing the integrated values 3 Reset count increment 4 Judging OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP see A2 5 1 Snapshot Saves the following values in the specified parameters before clearing the integrated values These values will be retained until the next reset is made STOTAL Total SRTOTAL RTotal SSP TOTAL_SP 2 Clearing the integrated values The reset process clears the Total ATotal and RTotal values in the internal registers Total 0 ATotal 0 RTotal 0 3 Reset count increment Each time a reset is made the N_RESET parameter will be incremented The high limit is 999 999 and if this
120. AI block For scheduling of communications for combina tion with the next function block the execution is so arranged as to start after a lapse of longer than 30 ms In no case should function blocks of the EJX be executed at the same time execution time is over lapped Figure 5 3 shows an example of schedule based on the loop shown in Figure 5 2 FC100 F0502 EPS Figure 5 2 Example of Loop Connecting Function Block of Two EJX with Other Instruments Macrocycle Control Period CAS IN BKCAL_OUT BKCAL_IN FIC100 FC100 mL H OUT BKCAL_IN BKCAL_OUT Unscheduled Communication Scheduled Communication F0503 EPS Commu nication Schedule Figure 5 3 Function Block Schedule and Communication Schedule When the control period macrocycle is set to more than 4 seconds set the following intervals to be more than 1 of the control period Interval between end of block execution and start of sending CD from LAS Interval between end of block execution and start of the next block execution 5 CONFIGURATION 5 4 Setting of Tags and Addresses This section describes the steps in the procedure to set PD Tags and node addresses in the EJX multivariable transmitter There are three states of Fieldbus devices as shown in Figure 5 4 and if the state is other than the lowest SM_OPERATIONAL state no function block is executed EJX must be transferred to this state when an
121. ATION LO and CAL EXT TEMP DEVIATION HI Diagnosis of adjustment When the adjustment amount exceeds the following adjustment ranges AL52 Out of external temperature span adjustment amount range AL52 Out of external temperature zero adjustment amount range generate an alarm The zero span adjustment ranges are as follows 1 The ramp for the input output of two adjustment points must be within 1096 of the ramp set before shipment from the factory 2 The zero point adjustment amount must be within 85 C of the temperature set before shipment from the factory 3 The zero point span adjustment point must be in the range 210 C to 860 C Fixed external temperature mode The value obtained from the external temperature sensor or a user specified fixed value can be selected for the external temperature signal At the 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS EXT TEMP OPTS parameter select one of Selection 0 No External temperature sensor 1 Yes External temperature fixed value mode and 2 Fall Back Fixed mode at broken wire When the external temperature fixed mode or fixed mode at broken wire is selected set the fixed value at FIXED EXT TEMP VALUE 6 3 6 Simulation Function There are two simulation functions in EJX multivari able transmitter one is the function commonly offered in FOUNDATION Fieldbus products to simulate input of each function block for loop check and the other is the flow simulation function t
122. ArTypeAndRole Description Indicates the type and role of communication VCR The following 4 types are used for EJX 0x32 Server Responds to requests from host 0x44 Source Transmits alarm or trend 0x66 Publisher Sends block output to other blocks 0x76 Subscriber Receives output of other blocks FasDllLocalAddr Sets the local address to specify VCR in EJX A range of 20 to F7 in hexadecimal FasDllConfigured RemoteAddr Sets the node address of the called party for communication and the address DLSAP or DLCEP used to specify VCR in that address For DLSAP or DLCEP a range of 20 to F7 in hexadecimal is used Addresses in Subindex 2 and 3 need to be set to the same contents of the VCR as the called party local and remote are reversed FasDIISDAP Specifies the quality of communication Usually one of the following types is set 0x2B Server 0x01 Source Alert 0x03 Source Trend 0x91 Publisher Subscriber FasDIIMaxConfirm DelayOnConnect To establish connection for communication a maximum wait time for the called party s response is set in ms Typical value is 60 secounds 60000 FasDllMaxConfirm DelayOnData For request of data a maximum wait time for the called party s response is set in ms Typical value is 60 secounds 60000 FasDllIMaxDlsduSize Specifies maximum DL Service Data unit Size DLSDU Set 256 for Server and Trend VCR and
123. CHD AL 22 Al2 block is not scheduled Al2 NO SCHD AL 23 AI3 block is not scheduled AIS NO SCHD AL 24 Al4 block is not scheduled Al4 NO SCHD AL 25 AI5 block is not scheduled AI5 NO SCHD AL 30 Hi Hi or Lo Lo Alarm occurs in Al1 Function AH Depends on specified High High Low Low HI H block Priority 1 LO LO AL 31 Hi Hi or Lo Lo Alarm occurs in Al2 Function Al2 Depends on specified High High Low Low HI H block Priority 1 LO LO AL 32 Hi Hi or Lo Lo Alarm occurs in AI3 Function AI3 Depends on specified High High Low Low HI H block Priority 1 LO LO AL 33 Hi Hi or Lo Lo Alarm occurs in PID Function PID Depends on specified High High Low Low HI H block Priority 1 LO LO AL 33 HI Hl or LO LO Alarm occurs in Al4 block Al4 Depends on specified High High Low Low HI H Priority 1 LO LO AL 34 HI Hl or LO LO occurs in AI5 block AI5 Depends on specified High High Low Low HI H Priority 1 LO LO AL 43 Al1 block is O S mode AM Out of Service BAD Out of Service Al O S AL 44 AI2 block is O S mode AI2 AI O S AL 45 AI3 block is O S mode AIS AI O S AL 46 Al4 block is O S mode Al4 ALO S AL 47 AI5 block is O S mode AI5 ALO S AL 70 PID block is not scheduled or is MAN O S PID Depends on Depends on cause of Alarm PID O S mode cause of Alarm PID MAN NO SCHD AL 71 SC block is not scheduled or is MAN O S SC Depends on Depends on cause of Alarm SC O S mode cause of Alarm SC MAN NO SCHD AL
124. DPhap EIK EJX910A and EJX930A Fieldbus Communication Type User s Manual IM 01C25R03 01E vigilantplant TT HUR I E um 5 p Ud ell 7 FOR THE DIGITAL VORLO IM 01C25R03 01E 6th Edition YOKOGAWA 4 Yokogawa Electric Corporation CONTENTS CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION iza ei akwa w 1 1 Regarding This Manual cic itte desierto terere erectus 1 1 111 Safe Use of This Product iiio critt ete iret AE AE ASA 1 2 t2 Warnan zerze eee e ERR ERE ao 1 3 5 ATEX Documentation aasa 2 2 n Ine 1 3 2 HANDLING CAUTIONS zaczac wic ciwie G RE GAAS 2 1 2 1 Installation of an Explosion Protected Instrument 2 1 2 1 1 EME approval iu ie takie hee iore ht ect 2 1 2 1 2 CSA Certification i icc eae 2 4 2 1 8 CENELEC ATEX Certification seseeeeeeenees 2 5 2 1 4 IECEX GertiflCallQn i icis ai tice dre tpa eco de 2 9 3 ABOUT FIELDBUS escirupi Doc Rau anas au nn aene ELLE UE E cc iii 3 1 Bed OQUUING ET 3 1 3 2 Internal Structure of EJX Multivariable Transmitter 3 1 3 2 1 System network Management VFD see 3 1 3 2 2 Function Block VED u eeeee eee ae aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaaaacea 3 1 3 3 Logical Structure of Each Block eeeeeeee ananin 3 2 3 4 Wiring System Configuration ee ssea aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa acea 3 2 4 GETTING STAHTEDL 2 2 arare O aaa kaaa iaaii an
125. Do not turn off the power to the EJX for 60 seconds after making a change to its parameter settings 1 DimeLinkMasterCapabilitiesVariable Bit Position Meaning Description Value LAS Schedule Whether the LAS schedule can B3 0x04 in Non volatile 1 or cannot 0 be saved 1 Memory to the non volatile memory Last Values Whether to support 1 or B2 0x02 Record not to support 0 0 Supported LastValuesRecord Link Master Whether to support 1 or Statistics not to support 0 B1 1 oxo Record DImeLinkMasterStatisticsRecord a Supported TA0206 EPS 2 DimeLinkMasterlnfoRecord E Element SRR 1 MaxSchedulingOverhead 1 V MSO 2 DefMinTokenDelegTime 2 V DMDT 3 DeflokenHoldTime 2 V DTHT 4 TargetlokenRotTime 2 V TTRT 5 LinkMaintTokHoldTime 2 V LTHT 6 TimeDistributionPeriod 4 V TDP 7 MaximumlnactivityToClaimLasDelay 2 V MICD 8 LasDatabaseStatusSpduDistributionPeriod 2 V LDDP TA0207 EPS 3 PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable Explicitly declares the LAS Writing true OxFF to this parameter in a device causes that device to attempt to become the LAS However a request of writing true to this parameter in a device is rejected if the value of the same parameter in any other device that has a smaller node address within the same segment is true 4 LiveListStatusArrayVariable A 32 byte variable in which ea
126. EJX multivariable transmitter has passed the interoperability test conducted by The Fieldbus Foundation In order to properly start Fieldbus it is recommended that the devices used satisfy the requirements of the above test Host Used for accessing field devices A minimum of one device with the bus control function is needed Cable Used for connecting devices Refer to Fieldbus Technical Information for details of instrumentation cabling Provide a cable sufficiently long to connect all devices For field branch cabling use terminal boards or a connection box as required First check the capacity of the power supply The power supply capacity must be greater than the sum of the maximum current consumed by all devices to be connected to Fieldbus The maximum current con sumed power supply voltage 9 V to 32 V for the EJX multivariable transmitter is 15 mA 24 mA in Software download operation The cable used for the spur must be of the minimum possible length 5 2 Network Definition Before connection of devices with Fieldbus define the Fieldbus network Allocate PD Tag and node addresses to all devices excluding such passive devices as terminators The PD Tag is the same as the conventional one used for the device Up to 32 alphanumeric characters may be used for definition Use a hyphen as a delimiter as required The node address is used to specify devices for communication purposes Because this data is too lon
127. Element Default Description V FUN wa 1 SlotTime 20 4095 V ST Not used I NUN 3 MaxResponseDelay 6 5 V MRD V FUN V NUN 6 MinInterPduDelay 12 12 V MID 0xF7 Basic device TA0202 EPS EL Default address 3 In the LAS settings of the EJX set the values of OxFC V FUN and V NUN so that they include the Portable device address ere OxFF node addresses of all nodes within the same ee segment See also Figure 3 Figure A6 3 Node Address Ranges ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord EJX Index 369 SM 2 In the LAS settings of the EJX set the values of Subindex Element Default Value Description V ST V MRD and V MID to the same as the 4 FirstUnpolledNodeld 0x25 V FUN respective lowest capability values in all the 7 NumConsecUnpolledNodeld OxBA V NUN TA0203 EPS devices within the segment An example is shown below A 54 IM 01C25R03 01E A6 4 LM Functions No Function LM initialization Description When a fieldbus segment starts the LM with the smallest V ST x V TN value within the segment becomes the LAS At all times each LM is checking whether or not a carrier is on the segment 2 Startup of other Transmits a PN Probe Node nodes PN and message and Node Activation Node Activation SPDU message to devices which SPDU return a new PR Probe Response transmissions message 3 PT transmission Passes a PT Pass Token incl
128. Explanation Index Mode 47 2047 CAP_TEMP_VAL Measured capsule temperature value and status 48 2048 CAP TEMP RANGE 50 0 to 130 0 C High and low range limit values engineering units decimal point place for capsule temperature 49 2049 AMP_TEMP_VAL Measured Amplifier temperature value and status 50 2050 AMP_TEMP_RANGE 50 0 to 95 0 C High and low range limit values engineering units decimal point place for Amplifier temperature 114 2114 FLG TEMP VAL Note Calculated flange temperature valueand status 115 2115 FLG_TEMP_RANGE 50 0 to 130 0 C High and low range limit values engineering units decimal point place for flange temperature 116 2116 FLG_TEMP_COEFF 0 AUTO Coefficient to calculate flange temperature 117 2117 FLG_TEMP PRI 1 AUTO Priority of the flange temperature alarm Not used 118 2118 FLG_TEMP H LIM 130 AUTO Threshold to generate Flg Temp High Alarm 119 2119 FLG_TEMP_L_LIM 50 AUTO Threshold to generate Flg Temp Low Alarm 120 2120 FLG_TEMP_ALM Status of flange temperature alarm TA0816 EPS Note The factory default of FLG TEMP COEF is 0 so the factory default of FLG TEMP VAL indicates the same value as that of CAP TEMP VAL A 93 IM 01C25R03 01E REVISION RECORD Title Model EJX910A and EJX930A Fieldbus Communication Type Manual No IM 01C25R03 01E Edition Date Page Revised Item 1st Jun 2006 B New publication 2nd Sep 2006 Correct errors 9 14
129. FLG_TEMP_COEF Setting The value calculated according to the following procedure is set to the FLG_TEMP_COEFF To enhance the calculation accuracy of the flange temperature measure the actual flange temperature by using the temperature sensor etc Calculate the ratio of the capsule temperature to the capsule temperature minus the amplifier temperature from the two temperature values measured by EJX e Derive the FLG TEMP COEFF from the measured flange temperature and the ratio of the capsule temperature to the amplifier temperature in accor dance with the following calculation formula FLG TEMP COEFF C Actual measured value of Flange temperature CT DT AT LO LIM HI HI LIM or LO LO LIM in the AI function block an analog alert is generated SENSOR Transducer block Al function Block PRIMARY VALUE P CHANNEL 1 Amplifier Temperature gt AMP TEMP VAL gt CHANNEL 7 Tapper gt CAP TEMP VAL A P CHANNEL 6 Calculation of FLANG TEMP VAL w FLG TEMP COEFF CT CT AT x Cf HI LIM i l gt CHANNEL 8 E LO LIM Heat Trace Monitoring FLG_TEMP_H_LIM FLG_TEMP_VAL gt FLG_TEMP_L_LIM Resorce Block DIAG OPTION DIAG PRI v y DEVICE DIAG ERR um Y
130. G_MODE Stop must be set when you change a threshold value or set an alarm Reference is set in order to obtain the reference fluctuation values under the normal configuration APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC Available Blockage Detection B Blocking detection by using RATIO FDP Low side blockage detection by using RATIO FSPL High side blockage detection by using RATIO FSPH High Low side blockage detection by using VALUE BLKF A B Blocking detection by using RATIO FDP Low Side Blocking detection by using RATIO FSPL High Side Blocking detection by using RATIO FSPH A Blocking detection by using RATIO FDP High Side Blocking detection by using RATIO FSPH B Blocking detection by using RATIO FDP Available Blockage Detection B Blocking detection by using RATIO FDP gt FA0803 EPS M DIAG PERIOD The values such as RATIO FDP and BLKF are averaged based on several hundreds of pressure fluctuation values in constant time DIAG PERIOD defines the sampling time The default value at the shipment is set to 180 seconds For the information on how to change the sampling period refer to A8 2 10 E DIAG COUNT When the value as RATIO FDP or BLKF exceeds the threshold value for several times in a row it is estimated that the impulse line is plugged DIAG COUNT defines the number of times to estimate blockage detection If DIAG COU
131. II the ILBD parameters belong to the SENSOR Transducer block APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC Note The Write Mode column contains the modes in which each parameter is write enabled O S Write enabled in O S mode AUTO MAN Write enabled in Man mode and O S mode Write enabled in Auto mode Man mode and O S mode Relative Index 83 Index 2083 Parameter Name DIAG_MODE Factory Default Stop 0 Write Mode AUTO Explanation Select the function mode for the ILBD Stop 0 The blockage detection is stopped Calculation 1 The blockage detection is carried out The alarms are generated along with the detected result The reference values are obtained and the update values are overwritten After setting this mode changes automatically to Calculation 1 Reference 2 84 2084 DIAG_PERIOD 180 sec AUTO Set the data acquisition period for ILBD within the range of 20 to 65535 sec Writable only when DIAG MODE is Stop 0 If the process fluctuation values are unsteady change this value to the longer to enhance the accuracy of the blockage detection 85 2085 DIAG_PRI AUTO Set alert DIAG_H_ALM and DIAG_L_ALM priority for ILBD Writable only when DIAG_MODE is Stop 0 86 87 2086 2087 DIAG_ERR DIAG_H_ALM 0x0000 The following ILBD results are shown A Blocking bit 2 Large Fluctuation of Low Side bit 3 Large Fluctuat
132. MIN 91 REF LIM FSPMIN 92 REF LIM BLKFMAX la a inv 93 COMP FLAG 94 DIAG_LIM 4 95 DIAG COUNT 96 REFERENCE TIME 97 REFERENCE FDP 98 REFERENCE FSPL 99 REFERENCE FSPH 100 REFERENCE BLKF ajajajaja 101 REFERENCE DPAVG 102 VALUE TIME 103 VALUE FDP 104 VALUE FSPL 105 VALUE FSPH 106 VALUE BLKF 107 VALUE DPAVG 108 RATIO FDP 109 RATIO FSPL 110 RATIO FSPH 111 CRATIO FDP 112 NRATIO FDP m O1r O1 O1 O1 O1 O1 O1 O01 O1 O1 CO 113 DIAG APPLICABLE T0512 2 EPS 5 9 IM 01C25R03 01E 5 CONFIGURATION Relative Parameter Mnemonic VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW Index 1 2 31 32 33 34 4 1 42 43 44 45 114 FLG TEMP VAL 5 115 FLG TEMP RANGE 11 116 FLG TEMP COEF 4 117 FLG TEMP PRI 1 118 FLG TEMP H LIM 4 119 FLG TEMP L LIM 4 120 FLG TEMP ALM 13 121 TEST KEY1 4 122 TEST KEY2 16 123 TEST KEY3 32 124 TESTI 125 TEST2 126 TEST3 127 TEST4 128 TEST5 129 TEST6 2 130 TEST7 2 131 TEST8 1 132 TEST9 1 133 TEST10 1 134 TESTI 2 135 TEST12 2 136 TEST13 15 137 TEST14 38 138 TEST15 30 139 TEST16 33 Totals bytes 49 82 101 32 108 103
133. MTL Flange Material 24 SENSOR CAL LOC Sensor Calibration Location 73 D VENT PLUG Drain Vent Plug 25 SENSOR CAL DATE Sensor Calibration Date 74 FLANGE TYPE Flange Type 26 SENSOR CAL WHO Sensor Calibration Who 75 REM SEAL ISOL MTL Remote Seal Isolator Material 27 SENSOR ISOLATOR MTL Sensor Isolator Metal 76 FLANGE SIZE Flange Size 28 SENSOR FILL FLUID Sensor Fill Fluid 77 REM SEAL NUM Remote Seal Number 29 SECONDARY VALUE Static Pres High Connector 78 REM SEAL FILL FLUID Remote Seal Fill Fluid 30 SECONDARY VALUE UNIT Static Pres Unit 79 REM SEAL TYPE Remote Seal Type 31 CAL DEVIATION HI Calibration Highest Deviation 80 ALARM SUM Alarm Summary 32 CAL DEVIATION LO Calibration Lowest Deviation 81 AUTO RECOVERY Auto Recovery 33 EXTERNAL ZERO TRIM External Zero Trim 82 MS CODE Model Suffix Code 34 PRIMARY VALUE FTIME Pressure Filter Time 83 DIAG MODE Diag Mode 35 TERTIARY VALUE Static Pres Low Connector 84 DIAG PERIOD Diag Period 36 SP VALUE TYPE Static Pres Type 85 DIAG PRI Diag Priority 37 SP VALUE RANGE Static Pres Range 86 DIAG ERR Diag Error 38 CAL SP POINT HI Static Pres Calibration Highest Point 87 DIAG H ALM Diag High Side Alarm 39 CAL SP POINT LO Static Pres Calibration Lowest Point 88 DIAG L ALM Diag Low Side Alarm 40 CAL SP MIN SPAN Static Pres Calibration Minimum Span 89 DIAG OPTION Diag Option 41 CAL SP UNIT Static Pres Calibration Units 90 REF LIM FDPMIN Ref Lim fDPmin 42 CAL SP DEVIATION HI Static Pres C
134. NCERTAIN UNCERTAIN UNCERTAIN PRESS outside measurement Sensor Subnormal Sensor range limit of capsule Conversion z ES Conversion not Accurate not Accurate AL 11 Static pressure is UNCERTAIN UNCERTAIN UNCERTAIN ST PRSS outside the Subnormal Sensor Sensor measurement range Conversion Conversion limit of capsule not Accurate not Accurate AL 12 Capsule UNCERTAIN UNCERTAIN UNCERTAIN UNCERTAIN CAP TMP Temperature is out of Subnormal Subnormal Sensor Sensor range Conversion m Conversion not Accurate not Accurate AL 13 Amplifier temperature UNCERTAIN UNCERTAIN AMP TMP is outside the Sensor Sensor measurement range e m Conversion not Conversion limit Accurate not Accurate AL 14 External temperature UNCERTAIN UNCERTAIN EXT TMP is outside of the Sensor a Sensor range limit m Conversion Conversion not Accurate not Accurate AL 20 No communication is NOT RDY found with LAS sa m m m m m AL 40 RESOURCE Out of Service BAD BAD BAD BAD BAD BAD RS O S block is in O S mode m zx Non specific Non specific Non specific Non specific Non specific Non specific AL 41 SENSOR transducer Out of Out of BAD Outof BAD Outof BAD Outof BAD Outof X BAD Out of z TB O S block is in O S mode m Service Service Service Service Service Service Service AL 42 FLOW transducer BAD Out of TB O S block is in O S mode m m sg m m m Service AL 50 Trimming range error other Calibration UNCERTAIN P SDEV for differentia
135. NDIX 8 3 6 3 9 BLOCK_ERR BLOCK_ERR presents the cause of an error in the block The SENSOR transducer block checks the following causes and sets the relevant bits BLOCK_ERR Bit Error Cause Differential pressure adjusted by zero span adjustment out of measurement range Static pressure adjusted by zero span adjustment out of measurement range Pressure sensor failure Capsule temperature sensor failure Electronic circuit failure MODE_BLK Target is O S T0601 EPS O other 15 Out of Service 6 3 10 XD ERROR XD ERROR is a parameter that contains codes for the most significant errors that can occur in the SENSOR transducer block The errors of XD ERROR supported by EJX multivariable transmitter and their causes are presented in the table below When multiple errors occur and their error codes are different the error with a larger code value is stored first XD ERROR Bit Error Cause 15 Out of Service Sensor TB is in O S mode Calibration An error occurred during calibration or a 18 bd error calibration error has been detected Electronics 20 Failure 22 I O Failure An I O failure has occurred An electronic component has failed T0602 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 6 4 FLOW Transducer Block 6 4 1 Outline of the Functions The differential pressure static pressure and external temperature signal calculated in the SENSOR trans ducer block are input to
136. NT is set to three times an alarm is not generated at part A in Figure A8 3 The reason is that only the first and second values exceeded consecu tively the threshold A 73 IM 01C25R03 01E When the value exceeds consecutively the threshold value three times an alarm is generated see part B in Figure A8 3 DIAG_COUNT Number of times 3 An alarm is generated Time Lower Threshold DIAG_LIM l DIAG PERIOD An alarm is generated COUNT Number of times 3 Time FA0804 EPS Figure A8 3 Relationship of DIAG COUNT and Alarm A 74 APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC The number of detection to give an alarm is set for each blockage detection function The default value at the shipment is set to three times If fluctuating around the threshold value an alarm may be often generated In this case change the threshold value DIAG LIM or the sampling time DIAG PERIOD to enhance the accuracy of the blockage detection Refer to A8 2 10 A8 2 4 Operating Procedure The basic flow of the ILBD operation is as follows 1 Initial setting 2 Condition check 3 Start up 4 Perform the ILBD algorithm If an alarm is often generated or the process condition changed in the ILBD operation do tuning to change the alarm setting or to reset the reference values Fill out the information to the checklist at the process shown in below figure IM 01C25R03 01E Items on Check sheet
137. OFF oPsEECT 0 FA0305 EPS Figure A3 5 Example 4 A 27 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK When SELECT TYPE is Maximum The IS block selects the input with the maximum value among valid inputs and transmits the value of that input to OUT The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED SELECTION IN_1 23 p UT PER gt OUT 32 5 IN_3 45 p IN_4 2 34 p A EA gt SELECTED 7 IN6 155 O b IN 7 325 p fee _ SELECT TYPE Maximum DISABLE 1 OFF p 4 STATUS OPTS DISABLE 2 ON p 4 MIN GOOD 1 DISABLE 3 ON p DISABLE_4 OFF p DISABLE_5 OFF p DISABLE_6 OFF p DISABLE_7 OFF p DISABLE_8 OFF p OP_SELECT 0 p FA0306 EPS Figure A3 6 Example 5 Because DISABLE_2 and DISABLE_3 are ON IN_2 and IN_3 are disabled and the IN with the maximum value among the remaining IN_n is selected for output In the above example since IN_7 has the maximum value among the remaining valid INs it is output A 28 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK When SELECT TYPE is Middle If there is more than one valid input and the number of such input is an odd number the value of the middle input wi
138. P of the capsule set the status of PRIMARY VALUE to Uncertain Subnormal Also set the status of SECONDARY VALUE and TERTIARY VALUE to Uncertain Sensor Conversion not Accurate The status under normal conditions is Good Non Specific Adjustment of static pressure signal The zero span adjustment function can be used for static signals as in the case of differential pressure signals However the zero point adjustment by the external screw function is not supported for static pressure signal Automatic adjustment The value of the static pressure exerted on the point where adjustment is to be made is assigned to param eters CAL SP POINT LO CAL SP POINT HI 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS After this assignment is set the amount of adjustment is calculated by the transmitter and automatically updated The procedure for adjusting the static pressure signal is the same as that of differential pressure signal Manual adjustment From the exerted pressure and the output of the transmitter calculate the amount of zero span adjust ment manually and assign the calculated value to parameters CAL SP DEVIATION LO CAL SP DEVIATION HI Selection of static pressure signal type EJX910 multivariable transmitter measure the absolute static pressure Based on the assumption that atmo spheric pressure is constant these transmitters can output signal equivalent to gauge pressure calculated by deducting the atmospheric pressure
139. PV Process Value 8 OUT Output 9 SIMULATE Simulation Wizard 10 XD SCALE Transducer Scale 11 OUT SCALE Output Scale 12 GRANT_DENY Grant Deny 13 lO OPTS I O Options 14 STATUS OPTS Status Options 15 CHANNEL Channel 16 L TYPE Linearization Type 17 LOW CUT Low Cutoff 18 PV FTIME Process Value Filter Time 19 FIELD VAL Field Value 20 UPDATE EVT Update Event 21 BLOCK ALM Block Alarm 22 ALARM SUM Alarm Summary 23 ACK OPTION Acknowledge Option 24 ALARM HYS Alarm Hysteresis 25 HI HI PRI High High Priority 26 HI HI LIM High High Limit 27 HI PRI High Priority 28 HI LIM High Limit 29 LO PRI Low Priority 30 LO LIM Low Limit 31 LO LO PRI Low Low Priority 32 LO LO LIM Low Low Limit 33 HI HI ALM High High Alarm 34 HI ALM High Alarm 35 LO ALM Low Alarm 36 LO LO ALM Low Low Alarm 37 OUT D SEL Output Discrete Select 38 OUT D Output Discrete T0908 EPS 9 20 9 PARAMETER LISTS IM 01C25R03 01E 10 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 10 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 10 1 Standard specifications For items other than those described below refer to each User s Manual Applicable Model EJX910A and EJX930A Output Digital communication signal based on FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol Supply Voltage 9 to 32 V DC for general use flameproof type and Type n Communication Requirements Supply Voltage 9 to 32 V DC Current Draw Stedy state 15 mA max Current Draw Software Download state 24 mA max Response Time for P
140. RR A1 2 1 Determining the Mode The following describes operations of the Signal Characterizer block Supported Mode O S System stopped status Out of Service e Configuration change Rules Man transmit the value to OUT If you do not want to output the value and the status from IN you can manually Auto Automatic system operation status A1 2 2 Judging BLOCK ERR TA0102 EPS BLOCK ERR indicates the cause of an error in the function block If the cause of an error indicated by BLOCK ERR occurs the following configuration error is generated Name Block Configuration Error 5 A configuration error when monotone manner Description 1 INFINITY has been configured for CURVE X and CURVE Y 2 INFINITY has been configured for X1 of CURVE X 3 INFINITY has been configured for Yl of CURVE Y 4 A value of the array of CURVE X does not increase in a monotone manner SWAP 2 is on A value of the array of CURVE Y does not increase or decrease in a 6 The value of SWAP 2 is any value other than 1 or 2 The mode changes to O S if a block configuration error occurs TA0103 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 1 SIGNAL CHARACTERIZER SC BLOCK A1 3 Line segment Factor Determination Section When the mode is AUTO and no bit in BLOCK_ERR is set the gradient and intercept of a line passing through two points that are considered line segment approximat
141. Specifies how trends are taken Choose one of the following 2 types 1 Sampled upon execution of a function block 2 The average value is sampled 4 Sample Interval Specifies sampling intervals in units of 1 32 ms Set the integer multiple of the function block execution cycle 5 Last Update The last sampling time 6 to 21 List of Status Status part of a sampled parameter 21 to 37 List of Samples Data part of a sampled parameter T0508 EPS Seven trend objects are factory set as shown Table 5 9 Table 5 9 Trend Object are Factory Set Index Parameters Factory Settings 32000 to TREND FLT 1 to Not used 32005 TREND_FLT 5 32006 TREND_DIS 1 Not used T0509 EPS 5 CONFIGURATION SMIB System Resource Transducer Management Al OUT AI2 OUT Information block Base NMIB Network Management Information Base t N z fees P POPPSSELLE Fieldbus Cable F0505 EPS Figure 5 5 Example of Default Configuration 5 6 3 View Object This object forms a group of parameters in a block One advantage brought by forming groups of param eters is the reduction of load for data transactions View Object has the parameters listed in Table 5 11 to 5 15 Purpose of View Objects is shown in Table 5 10 Table 5 10 Purpose of Each View Object Description VIEW_1 Set of dynamic parameters required by operator for plant
142. T KEY1 Test Key 1 122 TEST KEY2 Test Key 2 123 TEST KEYS Test Key 3 T0905 EPS 9 18 Flow Transducer Block 9 PARAMETER LISTS jes Parameter Name Label 0 BLOCK_HEADER Characteristics 1 ST REV Static Revision 2 TAG_DESC Tag Description 3 STRATEGY Strategy 4 ALERT KEY Alert Key 5 MODE BLK Block Mode 6 BLOCK ERR Block Error 7 UPDATE EVT Update Event 8 BLOCK ALM Block Alarm 9 TRANSDUCER DIRECTORY Transducer Directory Entry A2 310 TRANSDUCER_TYPE XD_ERROR Transducer Type Transducer Error 12 COLLECTION_DIRECTORY Collection Directory 13 FLOW VALUE TYPE Flow Type 14 FLOW VALUE Flow 15 FLOW VALUE UNIT Flow Unit 16 FLOW VALUE DECIMAL Flow Decimal 17 FLOW VALUE FTIME Flow Filter Time 18 DIFF PRESSURE Differential Pressure 19 DIFF PRESSURE UNIT Differential Pressure Unit 20 STATIC PRESSURE Static Pressure 21 STATIC PRESSURE UNIT Static Pressure Unit 22 EXT TEMPERATURE External Temperature 23 EXT TEMPERAURE UNIT External Temperature Unit 24 FLOW CALCULATION MODE Flow Calculation Mode 25 FIXED FLOW VALUE Fixed Flow Value 26 REF STATIC PRESSURE Reference Static Pressure 27 REF EXT TEMPERATURE Reference External Temperature 28 TEMP K1 FOR LIQUID Temp K1 for Liquid Variable 29 FLUID TYPE CODE Fluid Type Code 30
143. T6 8 53 EXP_MODE6 1 54 BLOCK_TAG7 32 55 PARAMETER SEL7 2 56 DISPLAY TAG7 8 57 UNIT_SEL7 1 58 DISPLAY_UNIT7 8 59 EXP_MODE7 1 60 BLOCK_TAG8 32 61 PARAMETER SEL8 2 62 DISPLAY TAG8 8 63 UNIT_SEL8 1 64 DISPLAY_UNIT8 8 65 EXP_MODE8 1 66 BLOCK TAG9 32 67 PARAMETER SEL9 2 68 DISPLAY TAG9 8 69 UNIT_SEL9 1 70 DISPLAY UNIT9 8 71 EXP MODE9 1 72 BLOCK TAG10 32 73 PARAMETER SEL10 2 74 DISPLAY_TAG10 8 75 UNIT_SEL10 1 76 DISPLAY_UNIT10 8 77 EXP MODE10 1 Totals bytes 11 112 11 113 106 106 106 T0513 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Table 5 14 View Object for Flow Transducer Block Ra Parameter Mnemonic ic kw ic a bey 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 2 TAG_DESC 3 STRATEGY 2 4 ALERT_KEY 1 5 MODE_BLK 4 4 6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2 7 UPDATE_EVT 8 BLOCK_ALM 9 TRANSDUCER_DIRECTORY 10 TRANSDUCER_TYPE 2 2 2 2 11 XD_ERROR 1 1 13 FLOW_VALUE_TYPE 1 14 FLOW VALUE 5 5 15 FLOW VALUE UNIT 2 16 FLOW VALUE DECIMAL 1 17 FLOW VALUE FTIME 4 18 DIFF PRESSURE 5 5 19 DIFF PRESSURE UNIT 2 20 STATIC PRESSURE 5 5 21 STATIC PRESSURE UNIT 2 22 EXT TEMPERATURE 5 5 23 EXT TEMPERAURE UNIT 2 24 FLOW CALCULATION MODE 1 25 FIXED FLOW VALUE 4 26 REF STATIC PRESSURE 4 27 REF EXT TEMPERATURE 4 28 TEMP K1 FOR LIQUID 4 29 FLUID TYPE CODE 1 30 ALARM SUM 8 8 31 DENSITY
144. TYPE Silicon resonant The type of sensor 21 2021 SENSOR Range of The High and Low range limit values engineering units code RANGE capsule and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the sensor 22 2022 SENSOR SN Serial No Serial number 23 2023 SENSOR CAL 103 factory trim O S The method of the last sensor calibration METHOD standard 100 volumetric calibration 101 static weight 102 dynamic weight 103 factory trim standard calibration 104 user trim standard calibration 105 factory trim special calibration 106 user trim special calibration 255 others 24 2024 SENSOR_CAL_ O S Set indicate the location of the last sensor calibration LOC 25 2025 SENSOR CAL O S Set indicate the date of the last sensor calibration DATE 26 2026 SENSOR CAL O S Set indicate the name of the person responsible for the last WHO sensor calibration 27 2027 SENSOR_ Unkown Defines the construction material of the isolating diaphragms ISOLATOR_MTL 28 2028 SENSOR_FILL_ Unkown Defines the type of fluid used in the sensor FLUID 29 2029 SECONDARY_ Static pressure high pressure side value and status VALUE 30 2030 SECONDARY _ 1545 MPaa The engineering unit of static pressure high pressure side VALUE_UNIT This unit is linked to XD_SCALE unit of Al blocks 31 2031 CAL_ 0 O S Deviation value for span adjustment DEVIATION HI 32 2032 CAL_ 0 O S Deviation value for zero adjustment DEVIATION_LO
145. Tag 2 24 UNIT SEL2 Unit Selection 2 25 DISPLAY UNIT2 Display Unit 2 26 EXP MODE2 Exponent Mode 2 27 BLOCK TAG3 Block Tag 3 28 PARAMETER SEL3 Parameter Selection 3 29 DISPLAY TAG3 Display Tag 3 30 UNIT_SEL3 Unit Selection 3 31 DISPLAY UNIT3 Display Unit 3 32 EXP_MODE3 Exponent Mode 3 33 BLOCK TAG4 Block Tag 4 34 PARAMETER_SEL4 Parameter Selection 4 35 DISPLAY_TAG4 Display Tag 4 36 UNIT_SEL4 Unit Selection 4 37 DISPLAY_UNIT4 Display Unit 4 38 EXP_MODE4 Exponent Mode 4 39 BAR GRAPH SELECT Bar Graph Selection 40 DISPLAY CYCLE Display CycleDisplay Cycle 41 TEST40 LCD TEST 42 BLOCK TAG5 Block Tag 5 43 PARAMETER SEL5 Parameter Selection 5 44 DISPLAY TAG5 Display Tag 5 45 UNIT SEL5 Unit Selection 5 46 DISPLAY UNIT5 Display Unit 5 47 EXP MODE5 Exponent Mode 5 48 BLOCK TAG6 Block Tag 6 49 PARAMETER SEL6 Parameter Selection 6 50 DISPLAY TAG6 Display Tag 6 51 UNIT SEL6 Unit Selection 6 52 DISPLAY UNIT6 Display Unit 6 53 EXP_MODE6 Exponent Mode 6 54 BLOCK TAG7 Block Tag 7 55 PARAMETER SEL7 Parameter Selection 7 56 DISPLAY TAG7 Display Tag 7 9 19 IM 01C25R03 01E Al Function Block jej Parameter Name Label 0 BLOCK_HEADER Characteristics 1 ST REV Static Revision 2 TAG_DESC Tag Description 3 STRATEGY Strategy 4 ALERT KEY Alert Key 5 MODE_BLK Block Mode 6 BLOCK ERR Block Error 7
146. The value is substituted into OUT in Auto mode 10 PV_SCALE O S Indicates PV scaling for making a memo 11 OUT RANGE Output scaling for the host for making a memo The parameter used to check if various operations have been executed The bits in the GRANT parameter corresponding to various operations are set before any of them 12 GRANT DENY are executed After the operations are completed the DENY parameter is checked to find out if any bit corresponding to the relevant operation has been set If no bit has been set it is evident that the operations have been executed successfully Determines whether an input is used as a good input when the input status is bad or uncertain Bit Function 0 Handles IN as good input if its status is uncertain 1 Handles IN LO as good input if its status is uncertain 2 Handles IN_1 as good input if its status is uncertain 13 INPUT_OPTS Y 5 r 3 Handles IN_1 as good input if its status is bad 4 Handles IN_2 as good input if its status is uncertain 5 Handles IN_2 as good input if its status is bad 6 Handles IN_3 as good input if its status is uncertain 7 Handles IN_3 as good input if its status is bad 81015 Reserved 14 IN Input block Input for a low range transmitter 15 IN_LO This is used for the range extension function 16 IN_1 0 Auxiliary input 1 17 IN_2 0 Auxiliary input 2 18 IN 3 0 Auxi
147. UT SELECTED is set to 0 A 29 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK If there is an odd number of valid inputs SELECTION IN 1 23 p IN_2 34 5 gt gt OUT 23 6 IN_3 45 gt IN_4 2 34 IN 5 23 6 gt gt SELECTED 5 IN 62155 p IN_7 32 5 gt 27 DRE SELECT_TYPE Middle STATUS_OPTS MIN_GOOD 1 DISABLE_1 OFF gt DISABLE_2 OFF gt DISABLE_3 OFF DISABLE_4 OFF gt DISABLE_5 OFF gt DISABLE_6 OFF DISABLE_7 OFF gt DISABLE_8 ON gt OPSELECT 0 OG gt FA0308 EPS Figure A3 8 Example 7 If the number of valid INs is an odd multiple the IN with the middle value will be output In the above example the IN_5 input having the middle value is output A 30 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK When SELECT TYPE is Average The block calculates the average of the valid inputs and transmits it to OUT The number of inputs used to calculate its value is indicated in SELECTED SELECTION IN 1 23 p IN 2 34 5 ENS OUT 25 48 IN_3 45 M IN_1 1N_8 8 25
148. Users of explosion proof instruments should refer first to section 2 1 Installation of an Explosion Protected Instrument of this manual The use of this instrument is restricted to those who have received appropriate training in the device Take care not to create sparks when accessing the instrument or peripheral devices in a hazardous location f Modification Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or damage resulting from any modification made to this instrument by the customer IM 01C25R03 01E 1 2 Warranty The warranty shall cover the period noted on the quotation presented to the purchaser at the time of purchase Problems occurring during the warranty period shall basically be repaired free of charge e If any problems are experienced with this instru ment the customer should contact the Yokogawa representative from which this instrument was purchased or the nearest Yokogawa office Ifa problem arises with this instrument please inform us of the nature of the problem and the circumstances under which it developed including the model specification and serial number Any diagrams data and other information you can include in your communication will also be helpful The party responsible for the cost of fixing the problem shall be determined by Yokogawa follow ing an investigation conducted by Yokogawa The purchaser shall bear the responsibility for repair costs even during the warranty per
149. able 8 1 9 2 T0901 2 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write x Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 46 1046 DEVICE STATUS 2 0 Device status For details refer to Table 8 2 47 1047 DEVICE STATUS 3 0 Device status For details refer to Table 8 3 48 1048 DEVICE STATUS 4 0 Device status For details refer to Table 8 4 49 1049 DEVICE STATUS 5 0 Device status For details refer to Table 8 5 50 1050 DEVICE STATUS 6 0 Device status For details refer to Table 8 6 51 1051 DEVICE STATUS 7 0 Device status For details refer to Table 8 7 52 1052 DEVICE STATUS 8 0 Device status For details refer to Table 8 8 53 1053 SOFTDWN PROTECT 0x01 AUTO Defines whether to accept software downloads 0x01 Unprotected 0x02 Protected 54 1054 SOFTDWN FORMAT 0x01 AUTO Selects the software download method 0x01 Standard 55 1055 SOFTDWN COUNT Indicates the number of times the internal FlashROM was erased 56 1056 SOFTDWN ACT Indicates the ROM number of the currently working FlashROM AREA 0 FlashROM 0 working 1 FlashROM 1 working 57 1057 SOFTDWN MOD REV 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Indicates the software module revision 58 1058 SOFTDWN ERROR 0 Indicates the error during a software download Refer Table A7 4 9 2 SENSOR Transducer Block T0901 3 EPS
150. acturer ID 4 Device Family 5 Device Type 6 Device Revision 7 DD Revision 8 Software Revision 9 Software Name 10 Domain Name 430 DOMAIN HEADER 2 0 1 Header Version Number 1 2 Header Size 44 3 Manufacturer ID 0x594543 4 Device Family DEV_TYPE of RB 5 Device Type DEV_TYPE of RB 6 Device Revision DEV_REV of RB i DD Revision DD REV of RB 8 Software Revision SOFT_REV of RB 9 Software Name ORIGINAL 10 Domain Name Device name 440 DOMAIN Read write prohibited Get OD permitted A 66 TA0108 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 7 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD A7 10 Comments on System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software Download A IMPORTANT Do not turn off the power to a field device immediately after changing parameter settings Data writing actions to the EEPROM are dual redandant to ensure reliability If the power is turned off within 60 seconds after setup the parameters may revert to the previous settings 1 DWNLD_PROPERTY BI Element See Description Index Bytes 1 Download Class 1 Indicates the download class 1 Class 1 2 Write Rsp Returned For 1 Indicates whether a write response is returned to the ACTIVATE ACTIVATE command 1 Write Response Returned 3 Write Rsp Returned For 1 Indicates whether a write response is returned to the PREPARE PREPARE command 1 Write Response Returned 4 Reserved 1 Reserved 5 ReadyForDwnid Delay Secs 2 Indicates the max
151. alibration Highest Deviation 91 REF LIM FSPMIN Ref Lim fSPmin 43 CAL SP DEVIATION LO Static Pres Calibration Lowest Deviation 92 REF LIM BLKFMAX Ref Lim BlkFmax 44 SP VALUE FTIME Static Pres Filter Time 93 COMP FLAG Diag Dpcomp 45 ATM PRESS Atmosphere Pressure 94 DIAG LIM Diag Limit 46 CURRENT ATM One Push Atm Pressure 95 DIAG COUNT Diag Suppress Count PRESS ENABLE Enabled 96 REFERENCE TIME Ref Time 47 EXT TEMP VAL Ext Temp 97 REFERENCE FDP Ref fDP 48 EXT TEMP RANGE Ext Temp Range 98 REFERENCE FSPL Ref fSPI 49 CAL EXT TEMP POINT HI Ext Temp Calibration Highest Point 99 REFERENCE FSPH ReffSPh 50 CAL EXT TEMP POINT LO Ext Temp Calibration Lowest Point 100 REFERENCE_BLKF___ Ref BIkF T0905 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E ie Parameter Name Label 101 REFERENCE DPAVG Ref DP Avg 102 VALUE TIME Curr Time 103 VALUE FDP Curr fDP 104 VALUE FSPL Curr fSPI 105 VALUE FSPH Curr fSPh 106 VALUE BLKF Curr BIKF 107 VALUE DPAVG Curr DP Avg 108 RATIO FDP Ratio fDP 109 RATIO FSPL Ratio fSPI 110 RATIO FSPH Ratio fSPh 111 CRATIO FDP Cratio fDP 112 NRATIO_FDP Nratio fDP 113 DIAG_APPLICABLE Diag Applicable 114 FLG_TEMP_VAL Flg Temp 115 FLG TEMP RANGE Flg Temp Range 116 FLG TEMP COEF Flg Temp Coefficient 117 FLG TEMP PRI Flg Temp Diag Priority 118 FLG TEMP H LIM Flg Temp High Limit 119 FLG TEMP L LIM Flg Temp Low Limit 120 FLG TEMP ALM Flg Temp Alarm 121 TES
152. all Back Selection at broken wire output of FIXED EXT TEMP VALUE at broken wire 57 2057 FIXED EXT 20 0 O S Sets the external temperature fixed value TEMP VALUE 58 2058 SIMULATE_ 0 AUTO This is the switch for enabling simulation MODE 0 Simulation OFF 1 Differential pressure signal simulation ON 2 Static pressure signal simulation ON 3 Differential pressure signal static pressure signal simulation ON 4 External temperature signal simulation ON 5 Differential pressure signal external temperature signal simulation ON 6 Static pressure signal external temperature signal simulation ON 7 Differential pressure signal static pressure signal external temperature signal simulation ON 15 Differential pressure signal static pressure signal external temperature signal without damping processing simulation ON 9 5 T0902 3 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 59 2059 SIMULATE 0 AUTO Sets the differential pressure value and status for simulation DPRESS 60 2060 SIMULATE_ 0 AUTO Sets the static pressure value and status for simulation SPRESS 61 2061 SIMULATE_ 0 AUTO Sets the external temperature value and status for simulation ETEMP 62 2062 EXT_TEMP_ space AUTO This parameter is for recording the serial No of the external SENSOR_SN te
153. and x1000 27 2527 BLOCK TAG3 2029 SECONDARY Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on VALUE display3 28 2528 PARAMETER 1 SECONDARY O S Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display3 SEL3 VALUE Select a parameter from Table 6 1 29 2529 DISPLAY TAGS3 Null O S Name of block tag to be displayed on display3 up to six alphanumeric plus a slash and a period 30 2530 UNIT SEL3 0 Auto O S Selection of unit to be displayed The unit of the parameter which is selected at PARAMETER SELS will be displayed when Auto is selected user specified unit at DISPLAY UNITS will be displayed when Custom is selected 31 2531 DISPLAY UNITS Null O S User specified unit to be displayed on display3 which will be available when Custom is selected at UNIT SEL3 32 2532 EXP MODE3 0 O S Selection of the displayed value in exponent such as x1 x10 x100 and x1000 33 2533 BLOCK TAG4 2047 CAP Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on TEMP_VAL display4 34 2034 PARAMETER_ 3 CAP TEMP O S Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display4 SEL4 VAL Select a parameter from Table 6 1 35 2535 DISPLAY_TAG4 Null O S Name of block tag to be displayed on display4 up to six alphanumeric plus a slash and a period 36 2536 UNIT SEL4 0 Auto O S Selection of unit to be displayed The unit of the parameter which is selected at PARAMETER SEL4 will be displayed when Auto is sele
154. aracterizer Block Parameters A 6 A1 5 Application Example e sseeee eee aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaaa ec A 7 ANSA Input Compensation a awa ska naw O W A zada de A 7 A1 5 2 Calorie Flow Compensation e seaa aaa aaa aaa aeenae A 7 A1 5 3 Backward Control sse A 7 APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK cessere A 9 A2 1 Schematic Diagram of Integrator Block sssssessses A 9 A2 2 Input Process Section ssssssssssssseeen A 10 A2 2 1 Determining Input Value Statuses sssssss A 10 A2 2 2 Converting the Rate ssssssssssssseeeeeeenne A 10 A2 2 3 Converting Accumulation sairis nisi iain A 11 A2 2 4 Determining the Input Flow Direction ssesssss A 11 A2 3 Adde iuste cni tea iie AR tar odia re ceo Eure cadens A 12 A2 3 1 Status of Value after Addition ssssssssssss A 12 A232 AQAIOM A 12 A2 4 Integratori detti te tg ete ao rye A 13 A2 5 Output Process sesorahe aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa ewa nnns A 14 A2 5 1 Status Determination eeeee eee aaa aaa aaa aaa anawa A 14 A2 5 2 Determining the Output Value sess A 15 A2 5 8 Mode Handing ihi e E ee Ete n eroe zd A 16 A2 O TROSCU dares w dt EA zlo gada geta A 17 A2 6 1 Reset Trigger A 17 A2 6 2 Reset Timing
155. aram eter stops execution of the active schedule 13 LinkScheduleListCharacteristicsRecord Size Element bytes Description NumOf 1 Indicates the total number of Schedules LAS schedules that have been downloaded to the domain NumOfSub 1 Indicates the maximum number SchedulesPer of sub schedules an LAS Schedule schedule can contain This is fixed to 1 in the Yokogawa communication stacks ActiveSchedule 2 Indicates the version number of Version the schedule currently executed 4 ActiveSchedule 2 Indicates the index number of Odlndex the domain that stores the schedule currently executed 5 ActiveSchedule 6 Indicates the time when the StaringTime current schedule began being executed TA0213 EPS 14 DimeScheduleDescriptor This parameter exists for the same number as the total number of domains and each describes the LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding domain For the domain to which a schedule has not yet been downloaded the values in this parameter are all zeros A 59 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 6 LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS Size Description OxFF true to P PrimaryLinkMasterFlag Variable index 364 1 Version 2 Indicates the version number of in the EJX the LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding domain index Element bytes Q3 On a segment where an EJX works as the 2 Macrocycle 4 lndicates the macro cycle of the Duration LAS s
156. arm of A Blocking On the other hand if this value is below the value of DIAG_LIM 2 EJX gives an alarm of B Blocking As a high or low pressure side blockage progresses VALUE_FDP increases Therefore A Blocking with a differential pressure transmitter indicates that a single side impulse line is plugged for a differential pressure transmitter As the both side blockages progress simultaneously VALUE_FDP decreases Therefore B Blocking with a differential pressure transmitter indicates that both side impulse lines are plugged A NOTE A single side impulse line blockage may gener ate B blocking under the condition where the fluctuation amplitude is much different between high and low pressure sides With a transmitter to measure pressure or tank level B Blocking only is detected IM 01C25R03 01E E H L Side Blocking Detection EJX differential pressure transmitter enables to detect both a high or low pressure side blockage The blockage degree characterized by a comparison of high pressure side and low pressure side fluctuation values VALUE BLKF is used to detect it The value changes within a range of 1 to 1 As VALUE BLKF approaches 1 the high pressure side blockage progresses On the other hand if it approaches 1 the low pressure side blockage progresses 1A 1 Threshold Blockage Progress Blockage Progress VALUE BLKF o VALUE BLKF o Threshold
157. atus is Uncertain 4 Use uncertain DEN A a regarding it as a value of Good ates Uses an input value of IN_1 or IN 2 whose status is Bad regarding 29 INTEG OPTS 0x0004 gt Use bad it as a value of Good 6 Carr Carries over an excess exceeding the threshold at reset to the next 7 integration Note that this does not apply to UP_AUTO or DN_AUTO 7 Add zero if bad Interprets an increment as zero if the status of the increment is Bad Contrm Tesei After a reset rejects the next reset until Confirm is set to ii RESET CONFIRM 9 Generate reset event Generates an alert event at reset 107415 Reserved If both forward and reverse flows are enabled or disabled both forward and reverse flows are integrated TA0206 1 EPS A 19 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK Parameter Initial NEPA Index Definition Name Value 30 CLOCK_PER 86400 0 sec Specify the period at which a periodic reset is made 31 PRE_TRIP 100000 0 Set an allowance applied before an integrated value exceeds the setpoint 32 N RESET 0 0 Indicates the number of resets in the range of 0 to 999999 The ratio of the integrated values of the absolute values of the increments whose status is 33 PCT INCL 0 0 Good to the integrated values of the absolute values of the increments irrelevant to the status E
158. ay function check that the EJX multivariable transmitter is in operation on the bus The device information including PD tag Node address and Device ID is described on the sheet attached to the device The device information is given in duplicate on this sheet DEVICE INFORMATION Device ID i 594543000EXXXXXXXX PD Tag i FT1001 Device Revision 1 Node Address E Oxf5 Serial No t XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Physical Location Note Our Device Description Files and Capabilities Files available at http www yokogawa com fld English or http www yokogawa co jp Sensor fieldbus fieldbus htm Japanese DEVICE INFORMATION Device ID 594543000EXXXXXXXX PD Tag E FT1001 Device Revision H 1 Node Address gt Oxf5 Serial No i XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Physical Location Note Our Device Description Files and Capabilities Files available at http www yokogawa com fld English or http www yokogawa co jp Sensor fieldbus fieldbus htm Japanese F0403 EPS Figure 4 3 Device Information Sheet Attached to EJX If no EJX multivariable transmitter is detected check the available address range and the polarity of the power supply If the node address and PD tag are not specified when ordering default value is factory set If two or more devices are connected at a time with default value only one device will be detected from the host as devices have the same initial address Separately conn
159. bscriber set this parameter to 2 or more T0506 EPS 1 Locallndex 2 VcrNumber 3 Remotelndex ServiceOperation 5 StaleCountLimit Set link objects as shown in Table 5 7 Table 5 7 Factory Settings of Link Objects example Index Link Object Factory Settings 30000 1 Al1 OUT gt VCR 6 30001 2 Trend gt VCR 5 30002 3 Alert gt VCR 7 30003 4 Al2 0UT VCR 9 d 5 to 40 Not used T0507 EPS 5 5 IM 01C25R03 01E 5 6 2 Trend Object It is possible to set the parameter so that the function block automatically transmits Trend EJX multivariable transmitter has seven Trend objects six of which are used for Trend in analog mode parameters and one is used for Trend in discrete mode parameter A single Trend object specifies the trend of one parameter Each Trend object has the parameters listed in Table 5 8 The first four parameters are the items to be set Before writing to a Trend object it is necessary to release the WRITE_LOCK parameter Table 5 8 Parameters for Trend Objects Sub cos index Parameters Description 1 Block Index Sets the leading index of the function block that takes a trend 2 Parameter Relative Sets the index of Index parameters taking a trend by a value relative to the beginning of the function block In the EJX AI block the following three types of trends are possible 7 PV 8 OUT 19 FIELD VAL 3 Sample Type
160. can be interpreted by AO and backward information from AO is converted into an information quantity that can be interpreted by PID before being transmitted to the PID BKCAL OUT SWAP 2 ON FA0110 EPS Figure A1 10 Backward Control SWAP_2 On IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 1 SIGNAL CHARACTERIZER SC BLOCK To enable backward control which inverts the X and Y axes the line segment function must be set so that the elements of the curve increase in a monotone manner As shown in Figure A1 11 If they do not increase in a monotone manner the mode changes to O S disabling calculation No CURVE_X CURVE_Y 1 5 5 2 10 10 3 15 11 4 20 20 5 25 25 6 30 26 7 35 30 8 40 40 9 45 45 10 50 50 11 51 51 12 52 54 13 53 59 14 54 66 15 55 75 16 65 80 17 75 81 18 80 85 19 85 86 20 90 90 21 95 95 TA0105 EPS Line segment function 100 90 80 70 60 50 CURVE Y 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 CURVE X X RANGE 100 0 0x00 Y RANGE 100 0 95 0x00 EADIIPERS Figure A1 11 Setting Example of a Line segment Function A 8 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK The Integrator IT block adds two main inputs and integrates them for output The block compares the integrated or accumulated val
161. case that the high pressure side VALUE_FDP Index 2103 7 48562e 9 valve is closed Record the values of VALUE_ after the certain time DIAG_PERIOD x DIAG_COUNT passed VALUE_FSPH Index 2105 7 14085e 9 Record the value after checked that the status is GOOD For the case that the low pressure side VALUE_FDP Index 2103 7 48562e 9 valve is closed VALUE_FSPL Index 2104 7 23277e 9 Record the values of VALUE _ after the certain time DIAG PERIOD x DIAG COUNT passed Record the value after checked that the status is GOOD Record the status of Checkbox in DIAG OPTION Index 2089 DIAG OPTION A Blocking L1 e Check that the alarms status of B 7 77 7 77 7 o ccce a ps Large Fluctuation of Low Side LI Blockingisse hc SEE mich wazon a cack daja WJ EE AO Eee ian Large Fluctuation of High Side JL 1 T Note If the alarm of Outside Diagnosis Low Side Blocking LI Range is generated the valve may High Side Blocking g be closed too m chtightly Open pas S S aasin ada eia E ao sos aoa aosi ane Ea Ea ae a eee valve a little and record the updated _ B Blocking Ni ERA EN status of the parameters Invalid Ref BIKE JA N NR Invalid Ref fSPh O SA Invalid Ref SPI Mo Invalid Ref fDP u O A Outside Diagnosis Range O RZA Reflect Blockage to PV SV TV Status LI Check that the alarm of B Blocking is DIAG_ERR Index 2086 Generated B Blocking Al
162. cator The components of the integral indicator are the bar graph the title field the center field for numerical values the lower text field and auxiliary characters The contents and meanings of these components are as follows 40 000 fe P selt LE OU PUUN UNE WAENI KARA A JR anao MAUNA ZNUDZONY AUN Yo 37 000 F0604 EPS Figure 6 3 Screen Display of the integral indicator Component Contents name n Bar Shows the value displayed in the center field for graph numerical values scaled in terms of percentage Center Presents values of inputs and outputs While the field for alarm is on the alarm number alternates with numerical the displayed value here values Lower text Displays tag parameter name unit and signal field status While the alarm is on the alarm contents alternate Title field Depicts the type of the value displayed on the center field for numerical value P Flashes when differential pressure is displayed SP Flashes when static pressure is displayed T Flashes when temperature is displayed F Flashes when flow rate is displayed Auxiliary Flashes when the center field for characters numerical values displays a value YN Flashes when square root display is selected Key Flashes when Write Protect is selected mark x10 Used when the calculated value x100 displayed in the center field for X 1000 numerical values is roun
163. ch bit represents the status of whether a device on the same segment is live or not The leading bit corresponds to the device address 0x00 and final bit to OxFF The value of LiveListStatusArray Variable in the case where devices having the addresses 0x10 and 0x15 in the fieldbus segment is shown below 0x00 00 84 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Bit correspondences 00000000000 0x00 0000010000100 0x10 0x15 APPENDIX 6 LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS 5 MaxTokenHoldTimeArray An 8X64 byte array variable in which each set of 2 bytes represents the delegation time set as an octet time assigned to a device The delegation time denotes a time period that is given to a device by means of a PT message sent from the LAS within each token circulation cycle The leading 2 bytes correspond to the device address 0x00 and the final 2 bytes to the device address OxFF Specify the subindex to access this parameter 6 BootOperatFunctionalClass Writing 1 to this parameter in a device and restarting the device causes the device to start as a basic device On the contrary writing 2 to this parameter and restarting the device causes the device to start as an LM 7 CurrentLinkSettingRecord and ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord CurrentLinkSettingRecord indicates the bus parameter settings currently used ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord indicates the bus parameter settings to be used when the dev
164. chedule downloaded to LAS another device cannot be connected the corresponding domain How come 3 TimeResolution 2 Indicates the time resolution that is required to execute the A3 1 Check the following bus parameters that LAS schedule downloaded to indicate the bus parameter as being the LAS for the corresponding domain the EJX and the capabilities of being the LAS i SA for the device that cannot be connected 15 Domain V ST V MID V MRD of EJX Read write impossible get OD possible ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord index 369 Carrying out the GenericDomainDownload command V ST V MID V MRD of problematic from a host writes an LAS schedule to Domain device DimeBasicInfo Then confirm that the following conditions are met AN CAUTION O EJX Problematic When downloading a LAS schedule to EJX Device maximum allowable linkages between devices V ST gt V ST are 18 V MID gt V MID V MRD gt V MRD A6 6 FAQs A3 2 Check the node address of the problematic Q1 When the LAS stops an EJX does not back it Ry UM Mere Als up by becoming the LAS Why A1 1 Is that EJX running as an LM Check that the value of BootOperatFunctionalClass index 367 is 2 indicating that it is an LM The LAS does not exist or is not identified in the fieldbus network or the EJX is not able to establish communication with the LAS Q4 AL 20 is kept shown on LCD A1 2 Check the values of V ST and V TN in
165. ck Changes the block mode to Auto when it is Cas and continues the control action with the setpoint set by the operator Mode shedding upon computer failure Changes the block mode in accordance with the SHED_OPT setting upon a computer failure Alarm processing Generates block alarms and process alarms and performs event updates TA0101 EPS A 43 IM 01C25R03 01E A5 3 Parameters of PID Block APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK NOTE In the table below the Write column shows the modes in which the respective parameters can be written A blank in the Write column indicates that the corresponding parameter can be written in all modes of the PID block A dash indicates that the corresponding parameter cannot be written in any mode Parameter Default z Index Name factory setting Write Valid Range Description 0 Block Header TAG PID Block Tag Same as that for an AI block O S 1 ST REV Same as that for an AI block 2 TAG DESC Null Same as that for an Al block 3 STRATEGY 1 Same as that for an AI block 4 ALERT KEY 1 1 to 255 Same as that for an Al block 5 MODE_BLK 6 BLOCK_ERR Same as that for an Al block 7 PV Measured value the non dimensional value that is converted from the input IN value based on the PV SCALE values and filtered 8 SP 0 AUTO PV SCALE 10 S
166. component of OUT status to IFS if IN status is Bad except when PID control bypass is on IFS if BAD CAS IN Sets the sub status component of OUT status to IFS if CAS IN status is Bad Use Uncertain Does not regard IN as being in Bad as Good status when IN status is Uncertain to prevent mode transitions from being affected when it is Uncertain Target to Manual Automatically changes the value of if BAD IN MODE BLK target to MAN when IN falls into Bad status Target to next Automatically changes the value of permitted mode MODE BLK target to Auto or to Man if BAD CAS IN if Auto is not set in Permitted when CAS IN falls into Bad status TA0109 EPS A5 16 Auto Fallback Auto fallback denotes an action in which a PID block changes mode from Cas to Auto and continues auto matic PID control with the user set setpoint Auto fallback takes place automatically when the following condition is met N status data status of IN is Bad except when the control action bypass is on To enable the manual fallback action to take place when the above condition is met Target to next permitted mode if BAD CAS IN must be previously specified in STATUS OPTS AND Auto must be previously set in MODE BLK permitted A 49 IM 01C25R03 01E A5 17 Mode Shedding upon Com puter Failure When the data status of RCAS_IN or ROUT IN which is the setting received from a computer as the setpoint SP falls to Ba
167. ct a parameter from Table 6 1 68 2568 DISPLAY_TAG9 Null O S Name of block tag to be displayed on display9 up to six alphanumeric plus a slash and a period 9 13 T0903 3 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 69 2569 UNIT SEL9 O Auto O S Selection of unit to be displayed The unit of the parameter which is selected at PARAMETER SEL will be displayed when Auto is selected user specified unit at DISPLAY UNIT9 will be displayed when Custom is selected 70 2570 DISPLAY UNIT9 Null O S User specified unit to be displayed on display9 which will be available when Custom is selected at UNIT SEL9 71 2571 EXP MODE9 0 O S Selection of the displayed value in exponent such as x1 x10 x100 and x1000 72 2572 BLOCK TAG10 Null Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on display10 73 2573 PARAMETER_ 2314 O S Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display10 SEL10 Select a parameter from Table 6 1 74 2574 DISPLAY_TAG10 Null O S Name of block tag to be displayed on display10 up to six alphanumeric plus a slash and a period 75 2575 UNIT_SEL10 0 Auto O S Selection of unit to be displayed The unit of the parameter which is selected at PARAMETER SEL10 will be displayed when Auto is selected user specified unit at DISPLAY UNIT10 will be displayed when Custom i
168. cted user specified unit at DISPLAY UNIT4 will be displayed when Custom is selected 37 2537 DISPLAY UNITA Null O S User specified unit to be displayed on display4 which will be available when Custom is selected at UNIT SEL4 38 2038 EXP _MODE4 0 O S Selection of the displayed value in exponent such as x1 x10 x100 and x1000 39 2039 BAR GRAPH 1 display O S Selection of bar graph indicator SELECT 40 2540 DISPLAY CYCLE 3 2 4sec O S Duration of display cycle Time unit 1 800msec 41 2541 TEST40 0 Not used for EJX 42 2542 BLOCK TAG5 Null Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on display5 43 2543 PARAMETER 4008 O S Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display5 SEL5 Select a parameter from Table 6 1 44 2544 DISPLAY TAGS Null O S Name of block tag to be displayed on display5 up to six alphanumeric plus a slash and a period 9 12 T0903 2 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write A Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 45 2545 UNIT SEL5 O Auto O S Selection of unit to be displayed The unit of the parameter which is selected at PARAMETER SELS will be displayed when Auto is selected user specified unit at DISPLAY UNITS will be displayed when Custom is selected 46 2546 DISPLAY_UNIT5 Null O S User specified unit to be displayed on displa
169. d to the value of SP RATE UP A decrease of the SP value at each execution period period of execution in the Block Header is limited to the value of SP RATE DOWN A5 11 2 When PID Block Is in Cas or RCas Mode By selecting Obey SP Limits if Cas or RCas in CONTROL OPTS see Section A5 13 the setpoint high low limits can be put into force also when the value of MODE BLK is Cas or RCas APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK A5 12 External output Tracking External tracking is an action of outputting the value of the remote output TRK VAL set from outside the PID block as illustrated in the figure below External tracking is performed when the block mode is LO TRK VAL TRK SCALE OUT SCALE PID control i computation result to D gt OUT LO mode FA0104 EPS To change the block mode to LO 1 Select Track Enable in CONTROL_OPTS 2 Set TRK_IN_D to true However to change the block mode from Man to LO Track in Manual must also be specified in CONTROL_OPTS A5 13 Measured value Tracking Measured value tracking also referred to as SP PV tracking is an action to equalize the setpoint SP to the measured value PV when the block mode MODE_BLK actual is Man in order to prevent a sudden change in control output from being caused by a mode change to Auto While a cascade primary control block is performing the automatic or cascade control in the Auto or Cas mode when the mode of its secondary control block is changed
170. d while the PID block is running in the RCas or ROut mode the mode shedding occurs in accordance with the settings in SHED_OPT If the RCAS_IN data is not renewed within the time specified by SHED_RCAS in resource block the data status of RCAS_IN falls to Bad A5 17 1SHED_OPT The SHED_OPT setting stipulates the specifications of mode shedding as shown below Only one can be set Available Setting for SHED_OPT Normal shed normal return Actions upon Computer Failure Sets MODE BLK actual to Cas and leaves MODE BLK target unchanged Normal shed no return Shed to Auto normal return Sets both MODE BLK actual and MODE BLK target to Cas 1 Sets MODE BLK actual to Auto and leaves MODE BLK target unchanged Shed to Auto no return Sets both MODE BLK actual and MODE BLK target to Auto Shed to Manual normal return Sets MODE BLK actual to Man and leaves MODE BLK target unchanged Shed to Manual no return Sets both MODE BLK actual and MODE BLK target to Man Shed to retained target normal return If Cas is in MODE BLK target sets MODE BLK actual to Cas and leaves MODE BLK target unchanged If Cas is not set in MODE BLK target sets MODE BLK actual to Auto and leaves MODE BLK target unchanged Shed to retained target no return If Cas is set in MODE BLK target sets both MODE_BLK actual and MODE BLK target to Cas 1 If Cas is not set in MODE_BLK
171. dard IEC60079 0 2004 IEC60079 1 2003 Flameproof for Zone 1 Ex d IIC T6 T4 Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Maximum Process Temperature 120 C T4 100 C T5 85 C T6 e Ambient Temperature 50 to 75 C T4 50 to 80 C T5 50 to 75 C T6 e Supply Voltage 32 V dc max Output Signal 15 mA dc Note 2 Wiring n hazardous locations the cable entry devices shall be of a certified flameproof type suitable for the conditions of use and correctly installed Unused apertures shall be closed with suitable flameproof certified blanking elements Note 3 Operation WARNING AFTER DE ENERGIZING DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING WARNING WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 2 65 C USE THE HEAT RESISTING CABLES gt 90 C Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when accessing to the instrument and peripheral devices in a hazardous location Note 4 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void IECEx Certification 2 9 2 HANDLING CAUTIONS IM 01C25R03 01E 3 ABOUT FIELDBUS 3 ABOUT FIELDBUS 3 1 Outline Fieldbus is a widely used bi directional digital commu nication protocol for field devices that enable the simultaneous output to many types of data to the process control system The EJX multivariable transmitter Fieldbus communication type employs the specification
172. de in which neither the control computation nor action is carried out and the output is kept at the value that was output before the PID block entered into O S mode TA0106 2 EPS A5 9 1 Mode Transitions Transition Destination Condition GORE Mode O S 1 If O S is set in MODE_ BLK target or if O S is set in target inside the resource block IMan 2 If the specified condition is NOT if met see Section A5 14 condition 1 is met LO 3 If Track Enable is specified in NOT if either CONTROL_OPTS and the or both of value of TRK_IN_D is true conditions 1 and 2 are met Man 4 If Man is set in MODE_ NOT if any BLK target or if IN status one or more input status is Bad of conditions 1 to 3 are met Auto 5 If Auto is set in MODE_ NOT if any BLK target one or more AND of conditions 1 if IN status input status is to 3 are met not Bad Cas 6 If Cas is set in MODE_ NOT if any BLK target one or more AND of conditions 1 if neither IN status input to 3 are met status nor CAS_IN status is Bad RCas 7 lf RCas is set in MODE_ NOT if any BLK target one or more AND of conditions 1 if neither IN status input to 3 are met status nor RCAS_IN status is Bad ROut 8 If ROut is set in MODE_ NOT if any BLK target one or more AND of conditions 1 if ROUT_IN status input to 3 are met status is not Bad In accordance 9 If RCAS_IN status or ROUT_ with the IN status is Bad in
173. de is plugged 2 L Side Blocking It is a low pressur side blockage detection based on the change of VALUE_BLKF or low pressure side fluctuation value 3 H Side Blocking It is a high pressure side blockage detection based on the change of VALUE BLKF or high pressure side fluctuation VALUE_BIKF indicates blockage degree character ized by a comparison of the high and low pressure side fluctuation values For the details refer to A8 2 1 A IMPORTANT The pressure fluctuation amplitude in fluids must be sufficiently large for blockages to be detected f the pressure fluctuation amplitude is too low for a reference value to be obtained blockages detection operation cannot be performed with an alarm that the reference value is invalid The pressure fluctuation amplitude may change due to other causes unrelated with a blockage according to process condition In above case a false alarm of an impulse line blockage may be generated Before taking action in response to a blockage alarm you need to consider the plant operating conditions E Notes for Pressure or Level measurement With pressure or level measurement the pressure fluctuation amplitude may reduce especially for the following cases Pressure Measurement Operational pressure is near outside diagnostic range Even though pressure is constant the flow decreases than that under normal condition A source of pressure fluctuation pump
174. ded T0603 EPS 6 8 IM 01C25R03 01E 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS 6 5 4 Example Displays of the integral indicator Example display of AII OUT and PID FF VAL respectively J t J r I r Display of I rza 4 ee FZ GE ODT ngos 1 PUDAGAdK 4 cQOB2U 4 KAQ BYH HI OUT kPa CoD 1 Pressure Value 2 Pressure Value 3 Pressure Value 4 Pressure Value I Block tag Parameter name Unit Status K T DC CQ D Display of I PID FFVAL em Gate orn Sa 3999 0 0039980 5 013990 0 o 3909 PID SERRE kPa 56003 5 Pressure Value 6 Pressure Valie 7 Pressure Value 8 Pressure Value Block tag Parameter name Unit Status I L J F0605 EPS Example display during mechanical failure alarm o m a CAPERR pto F0606 EPS Alarm number and Error Massage Capsule error 6 9 IM 01C25R03 01E 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS 6 5 5 Procedure to Set the Built in Display Select from Parameter Displays 1 to 10 DISPLAY SEL Specify which DISPLAY to display 1 to 10 Specify whether tag parameter unit or status should be displayed Specify parameters to be displayed Select parameters to be displayed from PARAMETER_SEL PARAMETER SEL listed in Table 6 1 Set the display contents for the block tag to be displayed in the lower text field DISPLAY TAG Select items to be displayed in the lower text field INFO SEL
175. dicating a SHED_OPT computer failure see Section setting A5 17 1 for details TA0107 EPS To activate mode transitions to Auto Cas RCas and ROut the respective target modes must be set beforehand to MODE_BLK permitted _A transition to Cas RCas or ROut requires that initialization of the cascade connection has been completed A 47 IM 01C25R03 01E A5 10 Bumpless Transfer Prevents a sudden change in the control output OUT at changes in block mode MODE_BLK and at switch ing of the connection from the control output OUT to the cascaded secondary function block The action to perform a bumpless transfer differs depending on the MODE_BLK values A5 11 Setpoint Limiters Active setpoint limiters that limit the changes in the SP value differ depending on the block mode as follows A5 11 1When PID Block Is in Auto Mode When the value of MODE_BLK is Auto the four types of limiters are in force high limit low limit rate of increase limit and rate of decrease limit Setpoint High Low Limits A value larger than the value of SP_HI_LIM cannot be set for SP A value smaller than the value of SP LO LIM cannot be set for SP Setpoint Rate Limits The setpoint rate limits are used to restrict the magni tude of changes in the SP value so as to change the SP value gradually towards a new setpoint e An increase of the SP value at each execution period period of execution in the Block Header is limite
176. e EJX multivariable transmitter if Link object and VCR static entry are set Analog Alerts Generated when a process value exceeds threshold By AI Block Hi Hi Alarm Hi Alarm Low Alarm Low Low Alarm Discret Alerts Generated when an abnormal condition is detected By Resource Block Block Alarm Write Alarm By Transducer Block Block Alarm Diagnostic Alarm option code DG1 By AI SC IT IS AR and PID Blocks Block Alarm Update Alerts Generated when an important restorable parameter is updated By Resource Block Update Event By Transducer Block Update Event By AI SC IT IS AR and PID Blocks Update Event An alert has following structure Table 7 1 Alert Object Subindex Parameter Explanation Name Block Index Index of block from which alert is generated Alert Key Alert Key copied from the block Standard Type of the alert Type Mfr Type Alert Name identified by manufacturer specific DD Message Reason of alert notification Type 6 6 6 Priority Priority of the alarm 7 7 7 Time Stamp Time when this alert is first detected 8 8 Subcode Enumerated cause of this alert 9 9 Value Value of referenced data 10 10 Relative Relative index of referenced Index data 8 Static Value of static revision Revision ST_REV of the block 11 11 9 Unit Index Unit code of referenced data T0701 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 7 3 Simulation Function There are two simulati
177. e 0 AEx ia IIC Factory Mutual FM Enclosure NEMA 4X Temp Class T4 Amb Temp 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Intrinsically Apparatus Parameters FISCO IIC Ui 17 5 V li 380 mA Pi 5 32 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH FISCO IIB Ui 17 5 V li 460 mA Pi 5 32 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH Entity Ui 24 V li 250 mA Pi 1 2 W Ci 3 52 nF Li 0 uH Sensor Circuit Uo 6 51 V lo 4 mA Po 6 mW Co 34 uF Lo 500 mH Nonincendive for Class I Division 2 Groups A B C and D NIFW FNICO Class I Zone 2 Group IIC NIFW FNICO Class Il Division 2 Groups F amp G and Class III Division 1 Enclosure NEMA 4X Temp Class T4 Amb Temp 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Nonincendive Apparatus Parameters Vmax 32 V Ci 1 76 nF Li 0 uH CENELEC ATEX KEMA Flameproof Approval Applicable Standard EN 60079 0 EN 60079 1 EN 61241 0 EN 61241 1 Certificate KEMA 07ATEX0109 Il 2G 2D Exd IIC T4 T5 T6 Ex tD A21 IP6X T85 T100 T120 Degree of protection IP66 and IP67 Amb Temp Tamb for gas proof T4 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F T5 50 to 80 C 58 to 176 F T6 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F Max process Temp Tp T4 120 C 248 F T5 100 C 212 F T6 85 C 185 F Max surface Temp for dust proof T85 C Tamb 40 to 40 C Tp 85 C T100 C Tamb 40 to 60 C Tp 100 C T120 C Tamb 40 to 80 C Tp 120 C FS15 KF21 CENELEC ATEX KEMA Intrinsically Safe Approval Applicable Standards EN 60
178. e A 38 A4 2 4 Relationship between the Main Inputs and PV A 38 A4 3 Computation Section secrete en re e Ed AAAA A 39 A4 3 1 Computing Equations ssssssseeeeeen A 39 A4 3 2 Compensated Values ssssssssseeeeeeeenn A 39 A4 3 3 Average Calculation ssssssssseseseeeeeenee A 39 A4 4 Output Section sisine aaa aras A 39 PAAT Mode Handling tette ee en ene Re ens A 40 A4 4 2 Status Handling ssssssseeeeeenee A 40 A4 5 List of the Arithmetic Block Parameters ssssssss A 41 APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK isis ic laickie eu Gaci o VH Rea v akies Bass A 43 AGT Funcion Digraness ieir A OE raza od aa A 43 A5 2 Functions of PID Block ee eeeees esse i aaa aaa aaa aaa A 43 A53 Parameters of PID BIOCK saa iza da A ee A 44 A5 4 PID Computation Details seen A 46 A5 4 1 PV proportional and derivative Type PID I PD Control AIGONINM e E A 46 A5 4 2 PID Control Parameters sss A 46 AS 5 Control QUIDUE es io O O Az E A 46 A5 5 1 Velocity Type Output Action A 46 A5 6 Direction of Control Action sessin A 46 A5 7 Control Action Bypass sssssssseeeeee eene A 46 A5 8 Feed TOr Wald i trice w eee ripper a tice cesi ierra esa A 47 A5 9 Block Modes UR essi isin ie A 47 A5 9 1 Mode Transitions ssssssssseeeeneneennnen nnn A 47 A5 10Bumpless Transfer
179. e condition when the reference values were obtained Y Blockage Detection Alarm is generated Figure A8 4 Flow Chart of ILBD Operation A 75 Refer to A8 2 11 FA0805 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E A8 2 5 Alarm and Alert setting The abnormal results as the blockage detection and high low flange temperature heat trace monitoring are given by an analog alert or the LCD display of alarm status The analog alert or the LCD display of alarm status is set according to the flow shown in below figure Storage of Abnormal results STB DIAG_ERR Alarm Masking STB DIAG_OPTION Alarm Enabling STB ALAM_SUM DISABLED Report Setting Outside Diagnosis Range STB DIAG_PRI Invalid Ref xx Masking Reflection Flag STB DIAG OPTION Discrete Alarm FF Alert Notification STB DIAG H ALM STB DIAG L ALM PV SV TV Status Y PV SV TV Status Discrete Alarm Device Status FF Alert Notify and RB DEVICE STATUS 7 STB FLG TEMP ALM v Alarm Display on LCD FA0806 EPS A 4 Figure A8 5 Alarm and Alert Setting E Alarm Status When the algorithm of ILBD and Heat trace monitor ing detect the abnormality the result is stored in DIAG_ERR The alarm status based on the detected abnormality is displayed to DIAG_ERR in the SEN SOR Transducer block APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC
180. e control systems A3 1 Input Selector Function Block Schematic The following shows the Input Selector function block schematic SELECTION IN_1 Man IN_2 First Good MODE IN_3 p 5 gt OUT IN_4 gt Auto IN 5 IN 6 y MINIMUM gt SELECTED IN 7 IN 8 DISABLE_1 S a MAXIMUM Configuration DISABLE_2 DISABLE_3 _ gt le STATUS OPTS DISABLE_4 gt MIDDLE DISABLE_5 E SELECT TYPE DISABLE 6 DISABLE_7 gt DISABLE lt MIN_Good 8 AVERAGE OP SELECT FA0301 EPS Figure A3 1 IS Block Input Parameters Input Terms IN 1 Block input 1 IN 2 Block input 2 IN 3 Block input 3 IN 4 Block input 4 IN 5 Block input 5 IN 6 Block input 6 IN 7 Block input 7 IN 8 Block input 8 DISABLE 1 Selector switch 1 to disable input 1 from being selected DISABLE 2 Selector switch 2 to disable input 2 from being selected DISABLE 3 Selector switch 3 to disable input 3 from being selected DISABLE 4 Selector switch 4 to disable input 4 from being selected DISABLE 5 Selector switch 5 to disable input 5 from being selected DISABLE 6 Selector switch 6 to disable input 6 from being selected DISABLE 7 Selector switch 7 to disable i
181. e display of the integral indicator 5 AI function block Condition raw data from the Transducer block Output differential pressure static pressure and capsule temperature signals Carry out scaling damping and square root extrac tion 6 SC function block e Converts the input signal value based on the segment table function 7 IT function block ntegrates one or two input signals and outputs the result 8 IS function block Selects one of multiple input signals according to the specified selection method and outputs the signal 9 AR function block Performs ten types of calculations on a combination of two main input signals and three auxiliary input signals 10 PID function block Performs the PID control computation based on the deviation of the measured value from the setpoint IM 01C25R03 01E 3 3 Logical Structure of Each Block EJX Multivariable Transmitter Fieldbus System network management VFD Node address address m block execution schedule Link Master Function block VFD LCD LCD Transducer block PID function block option Block tag Parameters AR function block IS function block IT function lock Parameters Sensor Al function block DE Al function T lock ransducer bloc Block tag Al function Parameters block Al function
182. e in control output AMV to the manipulated value MV that is to be actually output Switching of direction of control action Switches over the direction of control action between direct and reverse i e the direction of changes in the control output depending on the changes in the deviation Control action bypass When the bypass is on the value of the SP is scaled to the range of the OUT and output as the OUT Feed forward Adds the value of the FF_VAL input to the PID block to the output from the PID computation Measured value tracking Equalizes the setpoint SP to the measured value PV Setpoint limiters Limit the value of setpoint SP within the preset upper and lower levels as well as limit the rate of change when the PID block is in Auto mode External output tracking Performs the scaling of the value of TRK_VAL to the range of the OUT and outputs it as the OUT Mode change Changes the block mode between 8 modes O S IMan LO Man Auto Cas RCas ROut Bumpless transfer Prevents a sudden change in the control output OUT at changes in block mode and at switching of the connection from the control output OUT to the cascaded secondary function block Initialization and manual fallback Changes the block mode to IMan and suspends the control action when the specified condition is met Manual fallback Changes the block mode to Man and aborts the control action Auto fallba
183. e parameter which is selected at PARAMETER SEL7 will be displayed when Auto is selected user specified unit at DISPLAY UNIT7 will be displayed when Custom is selected 58 2558 DISPLAY UNIT7 Null O S User specified unit to be displayed on display7 which will be available when Custom is selected at UNIT SEL7 59 2559 EXP MODE7 0 O S Selection of the displayed value in exponent such as x1 x10 x100 and x1000 60 2560 BLOCK TAG8 Null _ Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on display8 61 2561 PARAMETER_ 2035 O S Selection of a parameter to be displayed on displays SEL8 Select a parameter from Table 6 1 62 2562 DISPLAY_TAG8 Null O S Name of block tag to be displayed on display8 up to six alphanumeric plus a slash and a period 63 2563 UNIT SEL8 O Auto O S Selection of unit to be displayed The unit of the parameter which is selected at PARAMETER SEL8 will be displayed when Auto is selected user specified unit at DISPLAY UNIT8 will be displayed when Custom is selected 64 2564 DISPLAY UNIT8 Null O S User specified unit to be displayed on display8 which will be available when Custom is selected at UNIT SEL8 65 2565 EXP MODE8 0 O S Selection of the displayed value in exponent such as x1 x10 x100 and x1000 66 2566 BLOCK TAG9 Null Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on display9 67 2567 PARAMETER_ 2064 O S Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display9 SEL9 Sele
184. e s or to function as a rotary position switch When used as a rotary position switch the block can receive operator inputs or switch information from connected inputs The IS block supports the concept of middle selection This function outputs the average of two middle signals if even multiple valid signals are configured or a middle signal if odd multiple valid signals are configured Application of the block is to supply a selected control signal in the forward path The SELECTED parameter is the 2nd output indicating which input has been selected using the algorithm A 22 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK A3 2 Input Section A3 2 1 Mode Handling The Input Selector block s operations are determined by the mode parameter name MODE_BLK The following describes operations in each mode Supported Mode Role O S System stopped status Out of Service Allows you to make changes to configuration Man If you do not want to output the value and status from IN or if the value or status thus output is not preferable you can manually transmit the value to OUT Auto Automatic system operation status TA0301 EPS Valid Input When the following conditions are satisfied the value of IN n becomes valid 1 The QUALITY in each status of IN n is either Good NC Good C or Uncertain 2 The values of DISABLE n corresponding to each IN n are OFF and the QUALITY in the status of w
185. ea surement In such case simulate the blockage detection by closing the valve where the fluctua tion existed M Simulation of High pressure side Blockage 1 2 Close the high pressure side valve Confirm the value of PRIMARY VALUE is stable If unstable open valve a little Set Calculation to DIAG_MODE so as to start blockage detection operation Check that an alarm of High Side Blocking is generated after the time that consists of DIAG_PERIOD and DIAG_COUNT passed Check also the operation of the analog alert if an analog alert is set Open the valve completely and check that there are no alarms 3 4 5 6 E Simulation of Low pressure side Blockage 1 2 Close the low pressure side valve Confirm the value of PRIMARY_VALUE is stable If unstable open valve a little Set Calculation to DIAG_MODE so as to start blockage detection operation Check that an alarm of Low Side Blocking is generated after the time that consists of DIAG_PERIOD and DIAG_COUNT passed Check also the operation of the analog alert if an analog alert is set Open the valve completely and check that there are no alarms 3 4 5 6 A 80 APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC EM Simulation of Both pressure side Blockage 1 2 Close the both pressure side valves Confirm the value of PRIMARY VALUE is stable If unstable open valve a little Set Calculation to DIAG_MODE so as to
186. easing the number of DIAG_COUNT M ILBD Range Setting When the VALUE_DPAVG is less than the value of the DIAG_LIM 10 or exceeds the value of DIAG_LIM 9 shown in Table A8 2 EJX gives an alarm of Outside Diagnosis Range If flow differential pressure is less than the default threshold value of DIAG_LIM 10 pressure fluctua tion is not large enough to detect the blockage To prevent the fault blockage detection the threshold value should be changed to larger value 1 Set Stop to DIAG_MODE 2 Enter the value to DIAG_LIM 10 Note Set to Calculation after setting the parameters E COMP FLG When Compensation is selected in COMP FLG RATIO FDP is compensated by following formula and used as treatable monitoring value CRATIO FDP VALUE FDP __VALUE_FDP__ X CRATIOTFDP REFERENCE_FDP On the other hand if the compensation is not neces sary Non compensation is selected in COMP_FLG and RATIO_FDP is used as NRATIO_FDP VALUE_FDP NRATIO_FDP REFERENCE_FDP FA0808 4 EPS REFERENCE_DPAVG VALUE_DPAVG FA0808 3 EPS A 82 APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC A8 2 11 Reset of Reference Value When there are large flow change or the change of fluid under the measured process conditions obtain the reference value again If flow change by a comparison of the reference value is 25 or more you need to obtain the reference value again IM 01C25R03 01E A8 2 12 ILBD Parameter Lists A
187. ect each device and set a different address for each 4 GETTING STARTED 4 4 Integration of DD If the host supports DD Device Description the DD of the EJX multivariable transmitter needs to be installed Check if host has the following directory under its default DD directory 594543 000E 594543 is the manufacturer number of Yokogawa Electric Corporation and OOOE is the EJX multivari able transmitter device number respectively If this directory is not found the DD of the EJX910A has not been included Create the above directory and copy the DD file 0mOn ffo OmOn sym m n is a numeral into the directory Om in the file name shows the device revision and On shows the DD revision If you do not have the DD or capabilities files you can download them from our web site http www yokogawa com fld Once the DD is installed in the directory the name and attribute of all parameters of the EJX multivariable transmitter are displayed Off line configuration is possible by using capabilities files EJX has two capabilities levels 1 and 2 Select Capabilities level 1 when the EJX don t have LCI PID function option Select Capabilities level 2 when the EJX has LC1 PID function option The capabilities level defines the kind and the number of function blocks that can be used The table below shows the relation The relation between and function blocks that can be used
188. eecssssens 6 8 DEZ XD ERROR razi EE at AE PoE a UE 6 8 65 LGD Transducer BloGk ence inen enne nnn enn ncs 6 8 6 5 1 Outline of the Functions sssssssssseseeeeerennenenn 6 8 0 5 2 BOCK MOJE i A a tenta ter pe aea 6 8 6 5 3 Display Contents of the integral indicator sss 6 8 6 5 4 Example Displays of the integral indicator 6 9 6 5 5 Procedure to Set the Built in Display ssssss 6 10 6 5 6 Units That Can Be Displayed on the LCD by the Automatic Link FUNCION RM 6 12 6 6 Al Funcion BIOCK ana id ene ERS 6 14 6 0 1 Eunction BlIoGkS zoe enaa Rex A AE E ERR A 6 14 6 6 2 Block Mode iiie erre nee rn e aiai 6 14 6 6 9 10 OPTS esesten c actes ree ume dr ee atu ZE guten 6 14 6 6 4 STATUS OPT icc tester WO Aaa eda eee uinea 6 14 0 0 5 QUT MI dowi Z cose res Bea EE A a ae AAA 6 14 6 6 6 Basic Parameters of the Al Block seeu eau oaaaaaaaaaaaae 6 15 7 IN PROCESS OPERATION saaaaaanaaananeeeneeeaoooaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaananawawa 7 1 FA Mode Iran NiOM esse ana O A ad aaa 7 1 7 2 Generation Of Alarm aaa taaa adds 7 1 7 2 1 Indication of Alarm ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseccaaeaeseeeeeeeeeeees 7 1 4 2 2 Alaimis a d EVente sete Stetit Santa Ero 7 1 7 3 Simulation Function sssssssssesseeeneeeennnn enne 7 2 8 DEVICE INFORMATION ce eeee
189. eeeee enne nnn n nnn n ness nana nhan anna a anna nn 8 1 Bal DEVICE STATUS ERREUR EUN URINE IINE NEUE 8 1 8 2 Status of each parameter in failure mode sssssssss 8 5 ii IM 01C25R03 01E CONTENTS 9 PARAMETER LIS ES ao widoczna 9 1 9 15 Hesource BOCK ate a RZA EE O YE hee 9 1 9 2 SENSOR Transducer Block sse 9 3 9 3 FLOW Transducer Block e eeeeeee ee ea aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaaaaaacnea 9 8 94 LGD Transducer BIOCko zet zain eene t a oo AAA 9 11 9 5 Al Function Block eeeeue eee aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa a nnne 9 15 9 6 Parameter Names Cross Reference sss 9 17 10 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS woo awiwia 10 1 10 1 Standard Specifications zie AA ere te dtt dee Rs 10 1 10 2 Optional specifications sssssssseeennenns 10 1 10 3 Optional specifications For Explosion Protected type 10 2 APPENDIX 1 SIGNAL CHARACTERIZER SC BLOCK A 1 A1 1 Schematic Diagram of Signal Characterizer Block A 1 A12 Input Section uio re irr ec e rris Eee aan RR EE A 3 A1 2 1 Determining the MOdGsiusiss nici inna A 3 A1 2 2 Judging BLOCK ERR sse nennen A 3 A1 3 Line segment Factor Determination Section sssssss A 4 A1 3 1 Conditions for Configuring Valid Coefficients CURVE X CURVE Y uuu eeea enne A 4 A1 4 List of Signal Ch
190. efault address OxFB OxFC Portable device address OxFF F0501 EPS Figure 5 1 Available Range of Node Addresses To ensure stable operation of Fieldbus determine the operation parameters and set them to the LM devices While the parameters in Table 5 2 are to be set the worst case value of all the devices to be connected to the same Fieldbus must be used Refer to the specifica tion of each device for details Table 5 2 lists EJX specification values 5 CONFIGURATION Table 5 2 Operation Parameter Values of the EJX to be Set to LM Devices Symbol Parameters V ST Slot Time Description and Settings Indicates the time necessary for immediate reply of the device Unit of time is in octets 256 us Set maximum specification for all devices For EJX set a value of 5 or greater Minimum Inter PDU Minimum value of Delay communication data intervals Unit of time is in octets 256 us Set the maximum specification for all devices For EJX set a value of 4 or greater V MRD Maximum Reply Delay The worst case time elapsed until a reply is recorded The unit is Slot time set the value so that V MRD XV ST is the maximum value of the specification for all devices For EJX the Setting must be a value of 12 or greater V MID T0502 EPS 5 3 Definition of Combining Function Blocks The input output parameters for function blocks are combined As required they can be co
191. eldbus system The allowed voltage Uo Voc or Vt of the associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus used to supply the bus cable must be limited to the range 14Vdc to 17 5Vdc All other equipment connected to the bus cable has to be passive meaning that the apparatus is not allowed to provide energy to the system except a leakage current of 50 uA for each connected device Separately powered equipment needs galvanic isolation to ensure the nonincendive field wiring Fieldbus circuit remains passive Cable The cable used to interconnect the devices needs to comply with the following parameters Loop resistance R 15 150 Q km Inductance per unit length L 0 4 1 mH km Capacitance per unit length C 45 200 nF km C C line line 0 5 C line screen if both lines are floating or C C line line C line screen if the screen is connected to one line Length of spur cable max 60 m Length of trunk cable max I km Group IIC or 5 km Group IIB Length of splice max 1 m Terminators At the end of each trunk cable an FM Approved line terminator with the following parameters is suitable R 90 100 Q C 0 2 2 uF 2 1 2 CSA Certification a CSA Explosionproof Type Caution for CSA explosionproof type Note 1 EJX multivariable transmitter with optional code CF1 is applicable for use in hazardous locations Certificate 2014354 Applicable Standard C22 2 No 0 C22 2 No 0 4 C22 2 No 0 5 C22 2 No 25 C22 2
192. emporarily disturb the communication Always connect the tool before starting opera tion IM 01C25R03 01E A NOTE The download tool can not execute downloading during other system connects to the system network management VFD of the device A7 4 Software Download Se quence The flowchart below outlines the software download procedure Although the time taken for the entire procedure varies depending on the size of the field bus device s software it generally take about 20 minutes where there is a one to one connection between a fieldbus device and download tool and longer when multiple field devices are connected to the fieldbus Start download tool y Select the software file s you Select file s want to download v Select the device s to which you Select device s want to download software Y Carry out download X Activate device s Transmit the software to the field device s Activate the device s to start with new software FA0102 EPS Figure A7 2 Flow of Software Download Procedure A CAUTION Carrying out a software download leaves the PD tag node address and transducer block calibra tion parameters that are retained in the nonvola tile memory inside the target device but may reset other parameters to the defaults except a minor update that does not change the number of parameters Hence where necessary save the parameters using an
193. en configuring a simple PID control loop by CONTROL_OPTS 2 combining an EJX transmitter with a fieldbus valve STATUS_OPTS 2 positioner that contains an AO block follow the IN 5 procedure below to make the settings of the corre PV_FTIME 4 sponding fieldbus function blocks BYPASS 1 1 Connect the AI block and PID block of the EJX CAS_IN 5 5 and the AO block of the valve positioner as shown SP_RATE_DN 4 above SP_RATE_UP 4 2 Set MODE_BLK target of the PID block to O S SP_HI_LIM 4 and then set GAIN RESET and RATE to appropri SP LO LIM 4 ate values GAIN 4 3 Check mat the value of MODE BLK actual of the RESET 4 AI block is Auto BAL TIME 7 4 Set MODE_BLK target of the AO block to RATE i CASIAUTO meaning Cas and Auto 5 Check that the value of BKCAL_IN status of the ef PRERLI PID block is not Bad a ke HM i 6 Check that the value of IN status of the PID block is 29 OUT LO LIM 4 not Bad 30 BKCAL_HYS 4 7 Check that Auto is set in MODE_BLK permitted of 31 BKCAL_OUT 5 the PID block 32 RCAS IN 5 8 Set MODE_BLK target of the PID block to Auto 38 ROUT_IN 5 When finishing all steps in order the PID block and Subtotals 28 43 58 41 AO block exchange the respective information and initialize the cascade connection Consequently the value of MODE_BLK actual of the PID block changes to Auto and automatic PID control starts TA0113 1 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E
194. eter Name Sub oe Name hi Access Remarks 362 DLME_LINK_MASTER_CAPABILITIES_VARIABLE 0x04 RW 363 DLME_LINK_MASTER_ 0 RW INFO_RECORD 1 MaxSchedulingOverhead 0 2 DefMinTokenDelegTime 100 3 DefTokenHoldTime 300 4 TargetTokenRotTime 4096 5 LinkMaintTokHoldTime 400 6 TimeDistributionPeriod 5000 7 MaximumlnactivityToClaimLasDelay 2 8 LasDatabaseStatusSpduDistributionPeriod 6000 364 PRIMARY LINK MASTER FLAG VARIABLE 0 RW LAS True OxFF non LAS False 0x00 365 LIVE LIST STATUS ARRAY VARIABLE 0 R 366 MAX TOKEN HOLD 0 RW TIME ARRAY 1 Elementi 0 2 Element2 0 3 Element3 0 4 Element4 0 5 Element5 0 6 Element6 0 7 Element7 0 8 Element8 0 367 BOOT OPERAT FUNCTIONAL CLASS Specified at the time of order RW 0x01 basic device 0x02 LM 368 CURRENT LINK 0 R Settings for LAS SETTING RECORD 1 SlotTime 0 2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead 0 3 MaxResponseDelay 0 4 FirstUnpolledNodeld 0 5 ThisLink 0 6 MinlnterPduDelay 0 7 NumConseeUnpolledNodeld 0 8 PreambleExtension 0 9 PostTransGapExtension 0 10 MaxlnterChanSignalSkew 0 11 TimeSyncClass 0 369 CONFIGURED LINK 0 RW SETTING RECORD 1 SlotTime 4095 2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead 4 3 MaxResponseDelay 5 4 FirstUnpolledNodeld 37 5 ThisLink 0 6 MinlnterPduDelay 12 7 NumConseeUnpolledNodeld 186 8 PreambleExtension 2 9 PostTransGapExtension 1 10 MaxlnterChanSignalSkew 0 11 TimeSyncClass 4 TA0205 1 EPS A 56 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 6 LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS
195. etpoint OUT MAN Output 10 PV_SCALE 100 O S Upper and lower scale limit values used for scaling of the 0 input IN value 1133 1 11 OUT SCALE 100 O S Upper and lower scale limit values used for scaling of the 0 control output OUT value to the values in the 1342 engineering unit 1 12 GRANT_DENY 0 AUTO Same as that for an Al block 13 CONTROL OPTS 0 O S Setting for control action See Section A5 13 for details 14 STATUS OPTS 0 O S See Section A5 15 for details 15 IN 0 Controlled value input 16 PV FTIME 2 AUTO Non negative Time constant in seconds of the first order lag filter applied to IN 17 BYPASS 1 off MAN 1 2 Whether to bypass the control computation 1 off Do not bypass 2 on Bypass 18 CAS IN 0 Cascade setpoint 19 SP RATE DN INF Positive Rate of decrease limit for setpoint SP 20 SP RATE UP INF Positive Rate of increase limit for setpoint SP 21 SP HI LIM 100 PV SCALE 10 Upper limit for setpoint SP 22 SP LO LIM 0 PV SCALE 10 Lower limit for setpoint SP 23 GAIN 1 Proportional gain 100 proportional band 24 RESET 10 Integration time seconds 25 BAL TIME Positive Unused 26 RATE Positive Derivative time seconds 27 BKCAL_IN Read back of control output 28 OUT HI LIM 100 OUT SCALE 10 Upper limit for control output OUT 29 OUT LO LIM OUT SCALE 10 Lower limit for control output OUT 30 BKCAL HYS 0 5 96 0 to 50 Hysteresis for release from a limit for OUT status 31 BKCAL_OUT 0
196. etting refer to 6 6 5 A 92 APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC A8 3 5 Out of Temperature Measurement Range If the measurement value of the capsule temperature or the amplifier temperature is out of the measurement range the OUT signal status of PRIMARY VALUE SECONDARY VALUE and TERTIARY VALUE becomes Uncertain Subnormal and the status of CAP TEMP VAL AMP TEMP VAL and FLG TEMP VAL become Uncertain Sensor Conver sion not Accurate The measurement range of the capsule temperature and the amplifier temperature is as follows Amplifier temperature 40 to 85 C e Capsule temperature 40 to 120 C The out of range is detected by the margin of 10 C added with the measurement range A8 3 6 Status Error There are three statuses of GOOD UNCERTAIN and BAD for the status of FLG_TEMP_VAL The factor that becomes GOOD UNCERTAIN BAD is as follows Good Normal status Uncertain Capsule or Amplifier temperature is out of range Bad Capsule or Amplifier temperature sensor failure Capsule or Amplifier EEPROM failure Resource block or SENSOR Transducer block is in O S mode IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC A8 3 7 Parameter Lists for Heat Trace Monitoring function AII the parameters for Heat Trace Monitoring function belong to the SENSOR Transducer block Relative index Parameter Name Factory Default Write
197. f the setting of SWAP_2 is changed from off to on the values of CURVE_Y must increase or decrease in a monotone manner Thus if a value of CURVE_Y does not increase or decrease in a monotone manner in this setting the mode changes to O S causing the Block Configuration Error bit in BLOCK_ERR to be set For any points of the curve that are not used configure INFINITY for all of them A 4 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 1 SIGNAL CHARACTERIZER SC BLOCK Example of the case where SWAP_2 is on monotone increase The input range of IN_1 is always in CURVE X The following shows the input output graph of the IN_1 values Y Output Y6 High limit Y1 Low limit f gt X1 x2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 INFINITY X Input FA0104 EPS Figure A1 4 Example of Curve for IN 1 SWAP 2 on The input range of IN 2 is always in CURVE Y The following shows the input output graph of the IN 2 values Output X X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X14 Y Input d i gt YA Y5Y6 Y7 INFINITY Low limit High limit FA0105 EPS Figure A1 5 Example of Curve for IN 2 SWAP 2 on When SWAP_2 is on the array elements of CURVE_Y must be configured for a monotone increase or decrease Yl Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 or Y6 Y5 YA Y3 Y2 YI A 5 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 1 SIGNAL CHARACTERIZER SC BLOCK A1 4 List of Signal Characterizer Block Parameter
198. factory setting is not enabled to display them Enable to display the alarm status to DIAG_H_ALM and DIAG L ALM according to the following procedure 1 Set Stop to DIAG MODE 2 Uncheck the checkbox of Diag Alm Disabled which is corresponding to bit 8 in ALARM SUM Note Set to Calculation after setting the parameters Report Setting DIAG_PRI in SENSOR Transducer block defines the priority to transfer the analog alert to the host The alert is generated according to the priority when interfering in other EJX alerts DIAG_PRI Bit Description 0 An alert is not generated 1 An alert does not be reported to the host 2 Disabled 3 7 ADVISORY 8 15 CRITICAL TA0807 EPS The default value at the factory setting is set to 1 Set the priority according to the following procedure 1 Set Stop to DIAG_MODE 2 Enter the value to DIAG_PRI in the number of 3 to 15 Note The setting of the highest priority is 15 Set to Calculation after setting the parameters A 77 IM 01C25R03 01E E Alarm Display on LCD If the ILBD algorithm detects the abnormality the content of the detected result is displayed with AL 88 or AL 89 on the LCD AL 88 indicates that condition is not applicable for the abnormality detection and AL 89 indicates the abnormality is detected PITS M P FA0807 EPS Figure A8 6 Display Example of High Side Blocking The
199. fied by MIN_Good gt the number of valid inputs Auto If there is no valid input Auto If the input status is bad or uncertain when the value of OP SELECT is anything other than 0 Auto with the exception of the case where the Uncertain as good bit in STATUS_OPTS is set If the value of OP_SELECT is greater than 8 which is the maximum number of inputs Auto If OP SELECT has selected IN whose status is bad or uncertain Auto See the item Transition of Sub status in the Case Where OP SELECT is Selected If the value is out of the SELECT TYPE setting range when the value of OP SELECT is 0 Auto TA0305 EPS A 33 IM 01C25R03 01E A3 4 3 STATUS_OPTS APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK Bit Use Uncertain as Good Causes all inputs OP_SELECT IN_n and DISABLE_n the status of which is uncertain to be handled as good NC status inputs and the others to be handled as bad status inputs Description Uncertain if Man mode When the mode is Man the status of OUT is interpreted as uncertain This does not apply to SELECTED TA0306 EPS A3 5 List of Input Selector Block Parameters pese Parameter Write Mode Valid Range Initial Value 1 visn 4 Description Remarks 0 BLOCK HEADER Block Tag O S TAG
200. fixed value from the measured absolute pressure The type of static pressure signal output to SECONDARY VALUE and TERTIARY VALUE is selected in SP VALUE TYPE SP VALUE TYPE allows selection of gauge pressure or absolute pressure When selecting gauge pressure set the value of the atmo spheric pressure fixed value to ATM PRESS The default value of ATM PRESS is equal to the value of standard atmospheric pressure 101 325 kPa Atmospheric pressure automatic setting When Set is set to the CURRENT ATM PRESS ENABLE parameter the present L side static pressure can be automatically assigned as the atmospheric pressure ATM PRESS To make this assignment the SENSOR transducer block must be set to the O S mode After the L side static pressure has been assigned to ATM PRESS the value of CURRENT ATM PRESS ENABLE auto matically returns to off 6 3 5 Functions Relating to External Temperature Reference to external temperature value The contact temperature and status of the RTD connected at EXT TEMP VAL can be referenced The update period of this value is about 800 msec The external temperature unit is the unit selected at XD SCALE Unit in the AI block where EXT TEMP VAL is selected Usually the status indicates Good Non Specific however it changes to Bad or Uncertain during a sensor malfunction or when the measuring range is exceeded For actual details see Table 8 9 Parameter Operations at Error Occurrence
201. ftware Damping 2 2 seconds or as specified in order Static pressure display range 0 to 25 MPa for EJX910A M and H capsule and 0 to 16 MPa for EJX910A L capsule absolute value 0 to 32 MPa for EJX930A Measuring high pressure side T1004 EPS Primary means differential pressure in case of differential pressure transmitters and pressure in case of pressure transmitters 2 To specify this item CC option is required 10 3 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 1 SIGNAL CHARACTERIZER SC BLOCK APPENDIX 1 SIGNAL CHARACTERIZER SC BLOCK The Signal Characterizer SC block is used to convert the values of input signals according to a line segment function The line segment function is created using 21 points of the X Y coordinates specified by the user This function block can also be used as a transmission line for control signals and supports backward control Application The Signal Characterizer block is primarily used if you wish for one of the following reasons to correct signals using the coordinates rather than a computational expression The computational expression for correction in relation to input signals is complex The relationship between input signals and the signals after correction is only empirically known A1 1 Schematic Diagram of Signal Characterizer Block The following shows the schematic diagram of the Signal Characterizer block A Inverse X function
202. g Refer to A8 2 12 117 2417 FLG TEMP PRI 1 AUTO Used for Heat Trace monitoring Refer to A8 2 12 118 2118 FLG TEMP H LIM 130 AUTO Used for Heat Trace monitoring Refer to A8 2 12 119 2119 FLG TEMP L LIM 50 AUTO Used for Heat Trace monitoring Refer to A8 2 12 120 2120 FLG_TEMP_ALM Used for Heat Trace monitoring Refer to A8 2 12 121 2121 TET KEY1 Not used for EJX multivariable transmitter 122 2122 TET_KEY2 Not used for EJX multivariable transmitter 123 2123 TET KEYS Not used for EJX multivariable transmitter 124 2124 TEST1 to 16 Not used for EJX multivariable transmitter to to 139 2139 Note Refer to A8 2 1 9 7 T0902 4 1 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 3 FLOW Transducer Block 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write r Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 0 2300 Block Header TAG FTB Block Tag Information such as Block Tag DD Revision and Execution O S Time relating to this block 1 2301 ST REV This parameter expresses the revision level of the transducer block setting parameters This revision is updated when the setting value is changed This parameter is used for example to investigate if parameters have been changed 2 2302 TAG DESC AUTO Universal parameter for storing comments to describe the content of tags 3 2303 STRATEGY 1 AUTO U
203. g for a PD Tag the host uses the node address in place of the PD Tag for communication A range of 20 to 247 or hexadecimal 14 to F7 can be set The device IM 01C25R03 01E LM device with bus control function Link Master function is allocated from a smaller address number 20 side and other devices BASIC device without bus control function allocated from a larger address number 247 side respectively Place the EJX multivariable transmitter in the range of the BASIC device When the EJX multivariable transmitter is used as Link Master place it in the range of the LM device Set the range of addresses to be used to the LM device Set the following parameters Table 5 1 Parameters for Setting Address Range Symbol Parameters V FUN First Unpolled Node Description Indicates the address next to the address range used for the host or other LM device V NUN Number of consecutive Unpolled Node Unused address range T0501 EPS The devices within the address range written as Unused in Figure 5 1 cannot be used on a Fieldbus For other address ranges the range is periodically checked to identify when a new device is mounted Care must be taken to keep the unused device range as narrow as possible so as to lessen the load on the Fieldbus 0x00 Not used Ox0F 0x10 Bridge device 0x13 0x14 LM device V FUN Unused V NUN V FUN V NUN BASIC device OxE7 OxF8 D
204. git The flow unit is indicated in the FLOW_VALUE_UNIT parameter and the number of digits past the flow decimal point is indicated in the FLOW_VALUE_DECIMAL parameter As the content of these parameters is interlocked with sub parameters Unit and Decimal of XD_SCALE in the AI function block where the flow signal is selected FLOW_VALUE_UNIT and FLOW_VALUE_DECIMAL also are automatically changed when XD_SCALE Unit and XD_SCALE Decimal are changed 6 4 5 Flow Type Selection Mass flow volume flow and standard volume flow are automatically selected according to the flow unit The currently selected flow type can be referenced at the FLOW_VALUE_TYPE parameter IM 01C25R03 01E 6 4 6 BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR parameter indicates the cause of errors that occur in the block On the FLOW transducer block check the following error causes and set the bit corresponding to the cause Bit Name Measurement function Multi Sensing Mass Flow Measurement 0 Other Setting error Compensation coefficient setting error 2 Precision flow setting checksum error 3 15 Outof Not supported O S is set for ModeBLK Target Service T0602b EPS 1 The mode other than O S is set for ModeBLK Target 2 The flow value is zero or less This is supported only in the Auto Compensation mode 3 The sum value of the Auto Compensation flow setting does not agree with the value when it was written by the setup tool
205. gnati con Ex sono disponibili in inglese tedesco e francese Se si desidera ricevere i manuali operativi di prodotti Ex in lingua locale mettersi in contatto con l ufficio Yokogawa pi vicino o con un rappresentante CEJ Todos los manuales de instrucciones para los productos antiexplosivos de ATEX estan disponibles en ingl s aleman y franc s Si desea solicitar las instrucciones de estos articulos antiexplosivos en su idioma local deber ponerse en contacto con la oficina o el representante de Yokogawa m s cercano Ge Alle handleidingen voor producten die te maken hebben met ATEX explosiebeveiliging Ex zijn verkrijgbaar in het Engels Duits en Frans Neem indien u aanwijzingen op het gebied van explosiebeveiliging nodig hebt in uw eigen taal contact op met de dichtstbijzijnde vestiging van Yokogawa of met een vertegenwoordiger IM 01C25R03 01E GD Kaikkien ATEX Ex tyyppisten tuotteiden k ytt hjeet ovat saatavilla englannin saksan ja ranskankielisin Mik li tarvitsette Ex tyyppisten tuotteiden ohjeita omalla paikallisella kielell nnne ottakaa yhteytt l himp n Yokogawa toimistoon tai edustajaan o Todos os manuais de instru es referentes aos produtos Ex da ATEX est o dispon veis em Ingl s Alem o e Franc s Se necessitar de instru es na sua l ngua relacionadas com produtos Ex dever entrar em contacto com a delega o mais pr xima ou com um representante da Yokogawa D Tous
206. gnosis Range Writable only when DIAG_MODE is Stop 0 95 2095 DIAG_COUNT AUTO When the statistical value such as VALUE_FDP and VALUE_BLKF exceeds consecutively the threshold by number of times preset to this parameter it is estimated that the impulse line is plugged Writable only when DIAG_MODE is Stop 0 If the process fluctuation values are unsteady increase this numbers to enhance the accuracy of the blockage detection A 84 TA0810 2 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC Relative Factory Write index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 96 2096 REFERENCE 0x00000000 AUTO The date and time when the reference values were obtained _TIME are automatically recorded when DIAG MODE is set to Reference 2 97 2097 REFERENCE 0x00 0 AUTO The reference value of VALUE_FDP obtained at normal _FDP operating condition is automatically recorded when DIAG_MODE is set to Reference 2 98 2098 REFERENCE 0x00 0 AUTO The reference value of VALUE_FSPL obtained at normal _FSPL operating condition is automatically recorded when DIAG_MODE is set to Reference 2 99 2099 REFERENCE 0x00 0 AUTO The reference value of VALUE_FSPH obtained at normal _FSPH operating condition is automatically recorded when DIAG_MODE is set to Reference 2 100 2100 REFERENCE 0x00 0 AUTO VALUE_BLKF obtained under normal condition _BLKF
207. hazardous location Note 4 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation and Yokogawa Corporation of America is prohibited and will void Canadian Standards Explosionproof Certification Non Hazardous Locations Non hazardous Location Equipment 2 HANDLING CAUTIONS Hazardous Locations Division 1 50 cm Max 32 V DC Max 15 mA DC Signal Non Hazardous Locations Non hazardous Sealing Fitting C ECL Multivariable Transmitter Hazardous Locations Division 2 Location Equipment 32 V DC Max y 15 mA DC Sealing Fitting m add Signal Multivariable Transmitter F0205E EPS 2 1 3 CENELEC ATEX Certification 1 Technical Data a CENELEC ATEX KEMA Intrinsically Safe Type Caution for CENELEC ATEX KEMA Intrinsically safe type Note 1 Note 2 2 5 EJX multivariable transmitter with optional code KS25 for potentially explosive atmo spheres No KEMA 06ATEX0278 X Applicable Standard EN 60079 0 2006 EN 50020 2002 EN 60079 27 2006 EN 50284 1999 EN 50281 1 1 1998 Ratings Ex ia HC T4 Type of Protection and Marking Code Ex ia IIC T4 Group II Category 1GD Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C Maximum Process Temperature Tp 120 C Maximum Surface Temperature for dust proof T85 C Tamb 40 C to 60 C Tp 80 C T100 C Tamb 40 C to 60 C Tp
208. he device requirements and settings when configuring the system The following steps must be taken 1 Network design Determines the devices to be connected to Fieldbus and checks the capacity of the power supply 2 Network definition Determines the tag and node addresses for all devices 3 Definition of combining function blocks Determines how function blocks are combined 4 Setting tags and addresses Sets the PD Tag and node addresses for each device 5 Communication setting Sets the link between communication parameters and function blocks 6 Block setting Sets the parameters for function blocks The following section describes in sequence each step of this procedure The use of a dedicated configuration tool significantly simplifies this procedure Refer to Appendix 6 when the EJX multivariable transmitter is used as Link Master 5 1 Network Design Select the devices to be connected to the Fieldbus network The following are essential for the operation of Fieldbus Power supply Fieldbus requires a dedicated power supply It is recommended that current capacity be well over the total value of the maximum current consumed by all devices including the host Conventional DC current cannot be used as is Terminator Fieldbus requires two terminators Refer to the supplier for details of terminators that are attached to the host Field devices Connect the field devices necessary for instrumenta tion The
209. hen Auto is selected user specified unit at DISPLAY UNIT1 will be displayed when Custom is selected 19 2519 DISPLAY UNIT1 Null O S User specified unit to be displayed on display 1 which will be available when Custom is selected at UNIT SEL1 9 11 T0903 1 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 20 2520 EXP MODE1 0 O S Selection of the displayed value in exponent such as x1 x10 x100 and x1000 21 2521 BLOCK_TAG2 2014 PRIMARY Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on VALUE display2 22 2522 PARAMETER_ 0 PRIMARY_ O S Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display2 SEL2 VALUE Select a parameter from Table 6 1 23 2523 DISPLAY TAG2 Null O S Name of block tag to be displayed on display2 up to six alphanumeric plus a slash and a period 24 2524 UNIT SEL2 0 Auto O S Selection of unit to be displayed The unit of the parameter which is selected at PARAMETER SEL2 will be displayed when Auto is selected user specified unit at DISPLAY UNIT2 will be displayed when Custom is selected 25 2525 DISPLAY UNIT2 Null O S User specified unit to be displayed on display2 which will be available when Custom is selected at UNIT SEL2 26 2526 EXP MODE2 0 O S Selection of the displayed value in exponent such as x1 x10 x100
210. hich is either Good NC Good C or Uncertain 3 The number of inputs that are good is greater than the value of MIN GOOD Note 1 Uncertain is applicable when Use Uncertain as Good is selected in the STATUS OPTS parameter 2 If the status of DISABLE n is Bad or Uncertain its quality is lower so that the status of IN n is also defined as lower quality When DISABLE n is ON the value of IN n becomes invalid For the priority of DISABLE n is higher than that of IN n Status in SELECT TYPE except OP SELECT QUALITY of DISABLE IN Status IN Good NC Valid Good C Valid Uncertain Valid Uncertain Invalid Bad Invalid TA0301 1 EPS Condition The number of inputs that are good is greater than the value of MIN_GOOD 3 Priority of IN_n when the same value is input Priority Input 1 Highest 8 Lowest 1 IN_1 2 IN_2 3 IN_3 4 IN_4 5 IN_5 6 IN_6 7 IN_7 8 IN_8 TA0301 2 EPS 4 Refer to A3 2 2 for the details of MIN_GOOD A 23 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK A3 2 2 MIN_GOOD Handling If there is no selectable input or if the number of selectable inputs is less than the value of MIN_GOOD SE LECTED becomes 0 A case where the number of valid INs is less than the value of MIN_GOOD
211. ia 4 1 4 1 Connection of Devices e eeeeeaa oaza aaa nnne 4 1 42 Host Setting xui AE eR U RO GRA A 4 2 4 3 Bus Power ON aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aa aaa aaa enne nnne 4 3 4 4 Integration of DD o oo eee eee ea aaa aaa meer 4 3 45 Reading the Parameters e eoos eee aaa a 4 3 4 6 Continuous Record of Values seeeeeeeuaa eau aaa aanaeci 4 4 4 7 Generation of Alarm eee aaa aaa aaa nter 4 4 5 GONFIGURATION me 5 1 Dik Network DesIgriaoudi ierit A tee Era e Ele ete bete LER eet Epub es 5 1 5 2 Network Definition essen nennen nenne 5 1 5 3 Definition of Combining Function Blocks ssseesss 5 2 5 4 Setting of Tags and Addresses ssssssssseeees 5 3 5 5 Communication Setting sssssssseeeeeeeneennes 5 4 5 521 CIE E 5 4 5 5 2 Function Block Execution Control sssssssss 5 5 5 6 Block Settling eiie iei certiora ea Ex eR ens 5 5 50 1 LNK ODJECU AES 5 5 56 2 Trend OD OCs rrisin ZE AES AE A eiat te aaa secre siens 5 6 5 6 9 View ODJ6CL inui ex dob ent aa EW EEE reared hey 5 6 5 6 4 Function Block Parameters eee 5 13 FD No IM 01C25R03 01E 6th Edition Aug 2009 KP i IM 01C25R03 01E All Rights Reserved Copyright 2006 Yokogawa Electric Corporation
212. iable You need to consider the plant operating conditions E Fluctuation Value A NOTE The blockage detection may not be carried out correctly when pressure fluctuation amplitude especially with the pressure and level measure ment is small Confirm that each value of VALUE_FDP VALUE_FSPL VALUE_FSPH and VALUE_BLKF is more than the value specified in the below table Table A8 3 Requiremnents to apply ILBD Condition 7x1010 or more VALUE_FDP VALUE_FSPL VALUE_FSPH VALUE_BLKF 1x101 or more 1x1010 or more 0 5 to 0 5 TA0808 EPS VALUE_FDP is not enough No blockage can be detected if VALUE_FDP is not larger than the specified value Only VALUE_FDP is enough A Blocking or B Blocking can be detected if VALUE_FSPL and VALUE_FSPH are not larger than specified values A 78 IM 01C25R03 01E VALUE_FDP and VALUE_FSPL are enough High Side Blocking and Large Fluctuation of High Side can not be detected if VALUE_FSPH is not larger than specified value VALUE FDP and VALUE FSPH are enough Low Side Blocking and Large Fluctuation of Low Side can not be detected if VALUE FSPL is not larger than specified value VALUE FDP VALUE FSPL and VALUE FSPH are enough All alarm modes ca be detected even if VALUE BLKF is not within the specified values A8 2 7 Obtain Reference Values The pressure fluctuation values are reduced
213. ice becomes the LAS Thus when a device is the LAS its CurrentLinkSettingRecord and ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord have the same values we Element Palka 1 SlotTime 2 V ST 2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead 1 V PhLO 3 MaxResponseDelay 1 V MRD 4 FirstUnpolledNodeld 1 V FUN 5 ThisLink 2 V TL 6 MinlnterPduDelay 1 V MID 7 NumConsecUnpolledNodeld 1 V NUN 8 PreambleExtension 1 V PhPE 9 PostTransGapExtension 1 V PhGE 10 MaxlnterChanSignalSkew 1 V PhlS 11 TimeSyncClass 1 V TSC TA0208 EPS A 58 IM 01C25R03 01E 8 DImeBasiclnfo Sub index Element SlotTime 2 Description Indicates the capability value for V ST of the device PerDlpduPhlOverhead 1 V PhLO MaxResponseDelay 1 Indicates the capability value for V MRD of the device ThisNode 1 V TN node address ThisLink 2 V TL link id MininterPduDelay 1 Indicates the capability value for V MID of the device 7 TimeSyncClass 1 Indicates the capability value for V TSC of the device PreambleExtension 1 V PhPE PostTransGapExtension 1 V PhGE 10 MaxlnterChanSignalskew 1 V PhIS TA0209 EPS 9 PlmeBasicCharacteristics Sub Size E index Element bytes Value Description 1 Channel 1 00 Statistics data Statistics are not Supported supported 2 Medium 8 0x490000000000
214. ill not cause difficulty to the user from a functional or performance standpoint The following safety symbols are used in this manual 1 1 A WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices A IMPORTANT Indicates that operating the hardware or software in this manner may damage it or lead to system failure A NOTE Draws attention to information essential for understanding the operation and features IM 01C25R03 01E 1 1 Safe Use of This Product For the safety of the operator and to protect the instrument and the system please be sure to follow this manual s safety instructions when handling this instrument If these instructions are not heeded the protection provided by this instrument may be im paired In this case Yokogawa cannot guarantee that the instrument can be safely operated Please pay special attention to the following points a Installation e This instrument may only be installed by an engi neer or technician who has an expert knowledge of this device Operators are not allowed to carry out installation unless they meet this condition With high process temperatures care must be taken not to burn yourself by touching the instrument or its
215. imum delay after receipt of the PREPARE_FOR_DWNLD command to proceed to transition from DWNLD_NOT_READY to DWNLD_READY 6 Activation Delay Secs 2 Indicates the maximum delay after receipt of the ACTIVATE command to proceed to transition from DWNLD_OK to DWNLD_NOT_READY TA0109 EPS A 67 IM 01C25R03 01E 2 DOMAIN_DESCRIPTOR APPENDIX 7 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD Sub Element Size Description Index Bytes 1 Command 1 Reads writes software download commands 1 PREPARE_FOR_DWNLD instruction of download preparation 2 ACTIVATE activation instruction 3 CANCEL_DWNLD instruction of download cancellation 2 State 1 Indicates the current download status 1 DWNLD_NOT_READY download not ready 2 DWNLD_PREPARING download under preparation 3 DWNLD_READY ready for download 4 DWNLD_OK download complete 5 DOWNLOADING download underway 6 CHECKSUM FAIL not used in this product 7 FMS DOWNLOAD FAIL failure during download 8 DWNLD INCOMPLETE download error detected at restart 9 VCR FAIL not used in this product 10 OTHER download error other than 6 and 7 detected 3 Error Code 2 Indicates the error during a download and activation 0 success configuration retained download successfully completed 32768 65535 Download error See Table 4 for error codes 4 Download Domain Index Indicates the index number of the domain for software downloading Do
216. imum value of communication data intervals Unit of time is in octets 256 us Set the maximum specification for all devices For EJX set a value of 4 or greater Minimum Inter PDU Delay V MRD The worst case time elapsed until a reply is recorded The unit is Slot time set the value so that V MRD xV ST is the maximum value of the specification for all devices For EJX the setting must be a value of 12 or greater Maximum Reply Delay V FUN Indicate the address next to the address range used by the host Set 0x15 or greater First Unpolled Node V NUN Number of consecutive Unpolled Node Unused address range T0401 EPS 4 2 4 GETTING STARTED Not used Bridge device LM device V FUN Unused V NUN RSA ANARAA BASIC device Default address Portable device address Note 1 Bridge device A linking device which brings data from one or more H1 networks Note 2 LM device with bus control function Link Master function Note 3 BASIC device without bus control function F0402 EPS Figure 4 2 Available Address Range IM 01C25R03 01E 4 3 Bus Power ON Turn on the power of the host and the bus Where the EJX multivariable transmitter is equipped with an LCD indicator first all segments are lit then the display begins to operate If the indicator is not lit check the polarity of the power supply Using the host device displ
217. in Division 1 FACTORY SEALED CONDUIT SEAL NOT RE QUIRED Note 3 Operation Keep the WARNING nameplate attached to the transmitter WARNING OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING COVER FACTORY SEALED CONDUIT SEAL NOT RE QUIRED INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE USERS MANUAL IM 01C25 Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when accessing the instrument and peripheral devices in a hazardous location Note 4 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corpo ration is prohibited and will void Factory Mutual Explosionproof Approval IM 01C25R03 01E b FM Intrinsically safe and Nonincendive Type EJX multivariable transmitter with optional code FS15 Applicable standard FM3600 FM3610 FM3611 FM3810 ANSI NEMA250 IEC60079 27 FM Intrinsically Safe Approval Entity Model Class I II amp III Division 1 Groups A B C D F amp G Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X and Class I Zone 0 AEx ia IIC Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X FISCO Model Class I II amp III Division 1 Groups A B C D F amp G Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X and Class I Zone 0 AEx ia IIC Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X Nonincendive Approval Class I Division 2 Groups A B C amp D Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type 4X and Class IL Division 2 Groups F amp G Temperature Class T4 Ta 60 C Type
218. information 3 STRATEGY 1 The strategy field is used by a high level system to identify the function block 4 ALERT KEY 1 Key information used to identify the location at which an alert occurred 5 MODE BLK 4 4 Integrator block mode O S MAN and AUTO are supported 6 BLOCK ERR 2 2 Indicates the active error conditions associated with the function block in bit strings 7 TOTAL_SP 1000000 0 4 4 The setpoint of an integrated value or a start value for counting down 8 OUT MAN 5 5 The block output 1000000 0 9 OUT RANGE 11 Set scaling for output display This does not affect operation of the function block 34 It is used for making memos 10 GRANT DENY 0 2 The parameter for checking if various operations have been executed Allows you to select a status related option LE S TATUSORTS H os The Integrator block uses Uncertain if Man mode only 12 IN_I 5 5 Inputs flow Rate Accum signals from the AI block or PI block 13 IN 2 5 5 14 OUT TRIP 2 2 An output parameter informing the user that the integrated value has exceeded the setpoint 15 OUT PTRIP 2 2 An output parameter informing the user that the integrated value is reaching the setpoint 16 TIME UNITI MAN 1 Set the time unit of the rate kg s Ib min kg h etc of the 17 TIME UNIT2 MAN 1 corresponding IN 18 UNIT CONV Specify the unit conversion factor for standardizing the unit of IN 2 into that of IN 1 19 PULSE VALI MAN Set the factor for converting the number of pulse
219. iod if the malfunction is due to Improper and or inadequate maintenance by the purchaser Malfunction or damage due to a failure to handle use or store the instrument in accordance with the design specifications Use of the product in question in a location not conforming to the standards specified by Yokogawa or due to improper maintenance of the installation location Failure or damage due to modification or repair by any party except Yokogawa or an approved representative of Yokogawa Malfunction or damage from improper relocation of the product in question after delivery Reason of force majeure such as fires earthquakes storms floods thunder lightening or other natural disasters or disturbances riots warfare or radioactive contamination 1 INTRODUCTION 1 3 ATEX Documentation This is only applicable to the countries in European Union AII instruction manuals for ATEX Ex related products are available in English German and French Should you require Ex related instructions in your local language you are to contact your nearest Yokogawa office or representative Alle brugervejledninger for produkter relateret til ATEX Ex er tilg ngelige pa engelsk tysk og fransk Skulle De gnske yderligere oplysninger om h ndtering af Ex produkter p eget sprog kan De rette henvendelse herom til den nermeste Yokogawa afdeling eller forhandler Q gt Tutti i manuali operativi di prodotti ATEX contrasse
220. ion of High Side bit 4 Low Side Blocking bit 5 High Side Blocking bit 6 B Blocking bit 7 Invalid Ref BIKF bit 8 Invalid Ref fSPh bit 9 Invalid Ref fSPI bit 10 Invalid Ref fDP bit 11 Outside Diagnosis Range bit 12 Flg Temp Low Alarm bit 13 Flg Temp High Alarm bit 14 Bit 15 is used to link the alarm to status of PRIMARY VALUE SECONDARY VALUE and TERTIARY VALUE Alerts for high pressure side are indicated A Blocking B Blocking Large Fluctuation of High Side High Side Blocking Invalid Reference value BIkF fSPh or fDP Outside Diagnosis Range TA0810 1 EPS A 83 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC Relative Index 88 Index 2088 Parameter Name Factory Default Write Mode Explanation Alerts for low pressure side blockage are indicated due to the DIAG_L_ALM following factors A Blocking B Blocking Large Fluctuation of Low Side Low Side Blocking Invalid Reference value BIKF fSPI or fDP Outside Diagnosis Range 89 2089 DIAG OPTION Ox8FC AUTO The alarm status linked to an analog alert and LCD display is selected by DIAG_OPTION in the SENSOR Transducer block The alarm selected in DIAG_OPTION is corresponding to bit of DIAG_ERR BIT 15 is used to link the alarm to the status of PRIMARY_VALUE SECONDARY_VALUE and TERTIARY_VALUE If set to 1 the signal status becomes UNCERTAIN No
221. ion values are determined A1 3 1 Conditions for Configuring Valid Coefficients CURVE_X CURVE_Y No write error is generated with respect to the settings in CURVE_X and CURVE_Y However a configuration error occurs in the following cases 1 INFINITY has been configured for X1 or Y1 2 INFINITY has been configured for each X or Y 3 The values of CURVE X are not increasing in a monotone manner X1 X2 X20 X21 If SWAP 2 is off it is acceptable if the values of CURVE Y do not increase or decrease in a monotone manner 4 The values of CURVE Y are not increasing or decreasing in a monotone manner when SWAP 2 is on If a configuration error occurs the Block Configuration Error bit in BLOCK ERR is set causing the mode to change to O S Example of the case where SWAP 2 is off Y Output a Y6 High limit Yi I 0 2 Low limit gt X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 INFINITY X Input FA0103 EPS Figure A1 3 Example of Curve SWAP_2 off The range of CURVE X X1 to X6 X7 and above are invalid because INFINITY has been configured for X7 The X1 to X6 values always increase in a monotone manner X1 lt X2 lt X3 lt X4 lt X5 lt X6 If an input value is smaller than X1 it is set to Y1 If an input value is larger than X6 it is set to Y6 The range of CURVE_Y Y1 to Y6 It is acceptable if the Y1 to Y6 values do not increase in a monotone manner However i
222. is method refer to the User s Manual IM 01C25R51 01E for the dedicated setup tool The procedure for setting the BASIC Mode is as follows For details on how to calculate the Kfactor refer to the EJX910A and EJX930A Multivariable Transmitters User s Manual IM 01C25R01 01E BASIC Mode Setting Procedure 1 Set the operation mode to O S 2 Select easy flow calculation at FLOW_CALCULATION_MODE 3 Select the fluid code liquid or gas at FLUID_TYPE_CODE 6 7 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS 4 Select the flow equation in the following table from the fluid type liquid gas and flow unit category mass flow standard volume flow volume flow Fluid Flow unit type Category Flow equation Liquid Mass Flow Qm or Qv or Qv norm SE Kfactor Normal Standard Volume Flow x VAPX 1 Temp K1x T Tb Volume Flow Gas Mass Flow Qm or Qv norm 4 Normal Standard Kfactor Volume Flow x VAP XTb TXSP SPb Volume Flow Qv Kfactor d xYAPxT TbxSPb SP T0602a EPS Custom setting Parameter 5 Set the required data values marked by in the above table to the following parameters Kfactor gt FIXED FLOW VALUE e Temp KI TEMP KI FOR LIQUID Tb gt REF EXT TEMP TERATURE SPb gt REF STATIC PRESSURE 6 Set the operation mode to AUTO A NOTE To confirm the setting of flow calculation use Simulation Function See 6 3 6 Simulation Function 6 4 4 Flow Unit Decimal Point Di
223. is disabled when shipped 10 2 Optional specifications For items other than those described below refer to each User s Manual Item Description Code PID function PID control function LC1 Data configuration at factory Software damping cc Software Download Based on Fieldbus Foundation Specification FF 883 EE Function Download class Class1 Advanced diagnostics Multi sensing process monitoring Impulse line blockage detection DG1 Heat trace monitoring This option code must be specified with option code EE T1003 EPS 2 The change of pressure fluctuation is monitored and then detects the impulse line blockage See TI 01C25A31 01E for detailed technical information required for using this function IM 01C25R03 01E 10 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 10 3 Optional specifications For Explosion Protected type Item Description Code FM Explosionproof Approval Applicable Standard FM3600 FM3615 FM3810 ANSI NEMA 250 Explosionproof for Class I Division 1 Groups B C and D Dust ignitionproof for Class II Ill Division 1 Groups E F and G in Hazardous locations indoors and outdoors NEMA 4X Temperature class T6 Amb Temp 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F FF1 FM Intrinsically Safe and Nonincendive Approval Applicable Standard FM3600 FM3610 FM3611 FM3810 ANSI NEMA 250 IEC60079 27 Intrinsically Safe for Class I II amp Ill Division 1 Groups A B C D F 8 G Entity FISCO Class I Zon
224. kage is detected option code DGI T0807 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Table 8 8 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_8 index 1052 Display DE Hexadecimal through DD Description 0x80000000 AH in Simulate Simulation function of Al1 active AL 90 block is active 0x40000000 Al2 in Simulate Simulation function of Al2 active AL 91 block is active 0x20000000 AI3 in Simulate Simulation function of AI3 active AL 92 block is active 0x10000000 Al4 in Simulate Simulation function of Al4 active AL 93 block is active 0x08000000 AI5 in Simulate Simulation function of AI5 active AL 94 block is active 0x04000000 AH in MAN mode Al1 block is in MAN mode AL 95 0x02000000 Al2 in MAN mode Al2 block is in MAN mode AL 96 0x01000000 AI3 in MAN mode AI3 block is in MAN mode AL 97 0x00800000 Al4 in MAN mode Al4 block is in MAN mode AL 98 0x00400000 AI5 in MAN mode AI5 block is in MAN mode AL 99 T0808 EPS 8 DEVICE INFORMATION IM 01C25R03 01E 8 2 Status of each parameter in failure mode Following tables summarize the value of EJX parameters when LCD display indicates an Alaram 8 DEVICE INFORMATION Table 8 9 Action of each parameters in failure mode related Resource block and Sensor Transducer block Resource
225. ken Even of INs average is taken Multiple INs of IN with the middle Odd of INs value of valid INs the Table A3 2 Value of SELECTED According to the Mode O S 0 MAN AUTO 0 to 8 A 32 TA0303 EPS TA0302 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E A3 4 2 OUT Processing APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK OUT is an output parameter used to send the value selected in the IS block to another function block The following describes OUT processing Table A3 3 Block Mode and Value MODE O S Man Value specified by MIN_Good gt the number of valid inputs If there is no valid input If the input status is bad or uncertain when the value of OP SELECT is anything other than 0 with the exception of the case where the Uncertain as good bit in STATUS_OPTS is set Not writable The previous value is output At startup the initial value is used Writable the operator may change the value The previous value is output Value Zero Not writable If the value of OP_SELECT is greater than 8 which is the maximum number of inputs If OP_SELECT is enabled Not writable The value of the selected input is output If the value is out of the SELECT TYPE setting range when the value of OP SELECT is 0 Not writable The previous value is output If SELECT TYPE is First Good Not writable The val
226. l error Engineering P ZDEV pressure span s Unit Range m m m m Violation AL 51 Trimming range error other Calibration UNCERTAIN SP SDEV for static pressure m error m Engineering a a u SP ZDEV span Unit Range Violation AL 52 Trimming range error other Galibration UNCERTAIN ET SDEV for External error Engineering ET ZDEV temperature span m z Unit Range m ES Violation AL 80 Simulation mode other Simulation SNR SIM Enabled s m s AL 81 Flow TBconfiguration FLW CFG error mi m m m m m AL 82 Flow correction BAD Configu FLW ALG coefficient error m m Uv a m m E ration Error AL 83 Flow check BAD Configu FLW SUM sum error m m ration Error 1 Good NC Non specific for when Fall Back mode is selected for External Temperature and while fixed temperature is output Table 8 10 Action of each parameters in failure mode related LCD display ALARM Display AL 79 LCD RNG LCD CFG Cause of Alarm LCD TB Displayed value exceeds limit or LCD configuration error BLOCK ERR XD ERROR T0810 EPS 8 5 T0809 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Table 8 11 Action of each parameters in failure mode related Function block DEB Cause of Alarm Orlect BLOCK ERR OUT STATUS AL 21 Alt block is not scheduled AH HOLD HOLD NO S
227. lculated by the MV setup tool must be written to these parameters For this reason these parameters must not be written with data other than that from the MV setup tool When parameters marked by the 1 symbol are written individually a sum value error and an alarm occurs Table 9 1 Primary Device Codes Code Primary Device 1 Fixed Mode Orifice Corner Taps IS05167 1 1991 Orifice Corner Taps IS05167 2 2003 Orifice Corner Taps ASME MFC 3M 1989 Orifice Flange Taps IS05167 1 1991 Orifice Flange Taps S05167 2 2003 Orifice Flange Taps ASME MFC 3M 1989 Orifice Flange Taps AGA No 3 1992 9 Orifice D and D 2 Taps ISO5167 1 1991 10 Orifice D and D 2 ISO5167 2 2003 11 Orifice D and D 2 ASME MFC 3M 1989 12 ISA1932 nozzle IS05167 1 1991 1SO5167 3 2003 13 Long radius nozzle ISO5167 1 1991 ISO5167 3 2003 14 ASME FLOW NOZZLES ASME MFC 3M 1989 15 Venturi nozzle ISO5167 1 1991 1SO5167 3 2003 16 Classical Venturi tube as cast convergent section S05167 1 1991 IS05167 4 2003 17 ASME Venturi Tubes With a rough Cast or Fabricated Convergent ASME MFC 3M 1989 18 Classical Venturi tube with a machined convergent section ISO5167 1 1991 1805167 4 2003 19 ASME Venturi Tubes With a machined convergent section ASME MFC 3M 1989 20 Classical Venturi tube with a rough welded sheet iron convergent section IS05167 1 1991 I805167 4 2003 co oj oc1 0 m
228. les manuels d instruction des produits ATEX Ex sont disponibles en langue anglaise allemande et fran aise Si vous n cessitez des instructions relatives aux produits Ex dans votre langue veuillez bien contacter votre repr sentant Yokogawa le plus proche gt Alle Betriebsanleitungen f r ATEX Ex bezogene Produkte stehen in den Sprachen Englisch Deutsch und Franz sisch zur Verf gung Sollten Sie die Betriebsanleitungen f r Ex Produkte in Ihrer Landessprache ben tigen setzen Sie sich bitte mit Ihrem rtlichen Yokogawa Vertreter in Verbindung Cs Alla instruktionsb cker f r ATEX Ex explosionss kra produkter r tillg ngliga pa engelska tyska och franska Om Ni beh ver instruktioner f r dessa explosionss kra produkter p annat spr k skall Ni kontakta n rmaste Yokogawakontor eller representant Oka ra eyyerpi a Nevrovpytas Twv mpot vrov pe ATEX Ex diaribevrau ora Ayyhuk Tepuavik kar FaNNuk Xe TepittTacy Tov xpevaleate odyyies oxerw pe Ex omv TOTLKT YNGOGA TAPAKONOWLE STLKOLWOV OTE LE TO mNqnouoTepo ypageto Ts Yokogawa vj avTrurp ooTo TNS 1 4 1 INTRODUCTION GO V etky n vody na obsluhu pre pr stroje s ATEX Ex su k dispozicii v jazyku anglickom nemeckom a francizskom V pripade potreby navodu pre Ex pr stroje vo Va om n rodnom jazyku skontaktujte pros m miestnu kancel riu firmy Yokogawa CZ V echny u ivatelsk p ru ky pro v robky na n se vztahuje nev bu n
229. liary input 3 19 RANGE HI 0 4 High limit for switching to a high range transmitter by the range extension function 20 RANGE LO 0 4 Low limit for switching to a low range transmitter by the range extension function 21 BIAS IN I 0 4 IN 1 bias 22 GAIN IN 1 0 4 IN 1 gain 23 BIAS IN 2 0 4 IN 2 bias 24 GAIN IN 2 0 4 IN 2 gain 25 BIAS IN 3 0 4 IN 3 bias 26 GAIN IN 3 0 4 IN 3 gain 27 COMP HI LIM INF 4 High limit of compensation factor f 28 COMP_LO_LIM INF 4 Low limit of compensation factor f TA0405 01 EPS A 41 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 4 ARITHMETIC AR BLOCK y Parameter Write Mode Valid Range Initial Value View 7 Description Remarks Computation algorithm identification no Value Selection Name Description 1 Flow compensation linear Flow compensation linear 2 Flow compensation square root Flow compensation square root 3 Flow compensation approximate Flow compensation approximate expression 4 BTU flow Quantity of heat calculation 29 ARITH_ TYPE L to 10 5 Traditional Multiply Divide Multiplication and division 6 Average Average calculation 7 Traditional summer Summation 8 _ Fourth order Polynomial Type 1 4th order auxiliary input polynomial computation 9 HTG level compensation HTG level compensation 10 Fourth order Polynomial Type 2 4th order main input polynomial computatio
230. ll be transmitted to OUT If there is an even number of valid inputs the average of the middle two inputs is transmitted to OUT If the average is used for OUT the block transmits 0 to SELECTED while it transmits the number of the input used for the middle for other cases If the number of valid inputs is 1 it is irrelevant to selection by Middle selector action The following shows an example of selection by Middle selector action If there is an even number of valid inputs SELECTION IN 1 28 O p IN 2 345 gt OUT 19 55 IN 3 45 IN 5 IN 6 2 19 55 IN 42 234 p IN 5 236 _ p gt SELECTED 0 IN 62155 y IN 72325 p gt 274 O gt AE SELECT_TYPE Middle DISABLE 1 ON 7 p STATUS_OPTS DISABLE 2 ON p MIN_GOOD 1 DISABLE 3 OFF p DISABLE_4 OFF p DISABLE_5 OFF p DISABLE 6 OFF _ p DISABLE_7 ON 7 p DISABLE 8 ON OP SELECT 0 7 FA0307 EPS Figure A3 7 Example 6 Because DISABLE 1 DISABLE 2 DISABLE 7 and DISABLE 8 are ON the corresponding IN 1 IN 2 IN 7 and IN 8 are disabled and the remaining four INs are enabled Furthermore because IN 3 has the maximum value and IN 4 has the minimum value among the valid INs they are not selected and the average of IN 5 and IN 6 inputs is output When the average is selected for O
231. llows Screw Size Marking ISO M20x1 5 female AM ANSI 1 2 NPT female Z Aor AW T0201 EPS Location of the mark F0201 EPS 3 Installation AN WARNING All wiring shall comply with local installation requirements and the local electrical code There is no need for a conduit seal in Division 1 and Division 2 hazardous locations because this product is sealed at the factory 4 Operation ZN WARNING OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING COVER INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS USER S MANUAL Take care not to generate mechanical sparking when accessing the instrument and peripheral devices in a hazardous location 5 Maintenance and Repair AN WARNING The instrument modification or part replacement by other than an authorized Representative of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void the certification 2 HANDLING CAUTIONS 6 Name Plate Name plate ID2HETE TRANSMITTER es ce Made in Japan 7 YOKOGAWA 4 Tokyo 186 5750 JAPAN SE RIO USES MANUAL N200 Tag plate for flameproof type 12G o S o138 WARNING Tag plate for intrinsically safe type No KEMA 07ATEX0109 Ex d IIC T6 T4 PxID A21 IP6X Enlcosure IP66 IP TEMI 5 T4 P CLASS T MAX PROCESS TEMP Ta E 100 120 50 p Teamo 40 C Tp 80 c Tove Cl amb 60 Tp T120 Tamb 80 Tp 120 C Min Remb Aos or Dust
232. lt Total lt INF a 0 lt ATotal lt INF RESET_IN 1 ae et p 0 RTotal lt INF OP CMD INT 1 9 s INF lt AccTotal lt INF INF lt Total lt INF At the period specified by PERIODIC s Counting uP De Sele CLOCK_PER x Starting from 0 0 lt RTotal lt INF OP CMD INT 1 INF lt AccTotal lt INF m WE INF lt Total lt INF Counting up 0 lt ATotal lt INF RESET IN 1 DEMAND 6 Starting from 0 0 lt RTotal lt INF OP CMD INT 1 INF lt AccTotal lt INF A TEES Ae At the period specified by CLOCK PER Counting up 0 lt ATotal lt INF PER amp DEM 7 ae ai e RESET IN 1 x Starting from 0 0 lt RTotal lt INF OP CMD INT 1 INF lt AccTotal lt INF m Legend O Trip output is made X No trip output is made TA0203 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK A2 5 Output Process There are the following three output parameters 1 OUT 2 OUT_TRIP 3 OUT_PTRIP Parameters OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP are used only when INTEG_TYPE is a value from to 4 A2 5 1 Status Determination The same criteria for determining the status of the output of the Integrator block are used in common for the above three parameters Bad Uncertain GOOD Ss PCT INCL 0 UNCERT_LIM GOOD_LIM 100 PCT INCL 100x 1 msp of RTotal msp of ATotal msp of RTotal RTotal value that is converted into a short floating point number msp of ATotal ATotal value that is converted into a short
233. lume flow 14 2314 FLOW_VALUE Indicates the flow value and its status 15 2315 FLOW VALUE UNIT 1324 kg h Indicates the unit of the flow value 16 2316 FLOW VALUE 0 Indicates the number of digits past the decimal point of the _DECIMAL flow value 17 2317 FLOW_VALUE 0 O S Indicates the primary filter time constant unit seconds of the _FTIME flow value 18 2318 DIFF_ Indicates the differential pressure value used in the flow PRESSURE calculation and its status 19 2319 DIFF PRESSURE UNIT 1133 kPa O S Sets the unit of the differential pressure value 20 2320 STATIC_ Indicates the static pressure value used in the flow PRESSURE calculation and its status 21 2321 STATIC_ 1545 MPaa O S Sets the unit of the static pressure value PRESSURE UNIT 22 2322 EXT_ Indicates the external temperature value used in the flow TEMPERATURE calculation and its status 23 2323 EXT 1001 C O S Sets the unit of the external temperature value TEMPERAURE_UNIT 24 2324 FLOW_ 0 O S Switches the flow calculation mode CALCULATION_ 0 Auto Compensation Mode MODE 1 Basic Mode 9 8 T0902 5 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write A Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 25 2325 FIXED FLOW 0 O S Sets the flow calculation coefficient Kfactor used in the VALUE Basic Mode 26
234. lute pressure 46 2046 CURRENT ATM 0 O S Automatically sets the L side static pressure value to the PRESS ENABLE atmospheric pressure value ATM PRESS 47 2047 EXT TEMP VAL Indicates the external temperature value and status 48 2048 EXT TEMP 200 Indicates the external temperature sensor range unit and RANGE 850 C decimal point 49 2049 CAL_EXT_TEMP_ 100 O S This is High side adjustment value Adjust this value so that POINT_HI the current external temperature becomes this setting value 50 2050 CAL EXT TEMP 0 O S This is Low side adjustment value Adjust this value so that POINT_LO the current external temperature becomes this setting value 51 2051 CAL_EXT_TEMP_ 10 0 Indicates the minimum span of the external temperature MIN_SPAN 52 2052 CAL EXT TEMP 1001 Indicates the calibration unit of the external temperature UNIT sensor 53 2053 CAL EXT TEMP 0 O S This is the adjustment coefficient for performing span DEVIATION HI adjustment of the external temperature 54 2054 CAL EXT TEMP 0 O S This is the adjustment coefficient for performing zero DEVIATION LO adjustment of the external temperature 55 2055 EXT TEMP 1 0 O S Sets the primary filter time constant unit seconds of the VALUE FTIME external temperature 56 2056 EXT TEMP 0 O S Selects the external temperature selection operation OPTS 0 No Selection OFF output of external temperature 1 Yes Selection ON output of FIXED EXT TEMP VALUE 2 F
235. ly Indirect or with square root Ind Al2 to AI5 Sqr Root using the input range defined by the Direct transducer and the associated output range 17 4017 4117 4217 4317 4417 LOW_ Linear 0 AUTO Limit used in square root processing A value of zero CUT Square root percent of scale is used in block processing if the 10 transducer value falls below this limit This feature may be used to eliminate noise near zero for a flow sensor The setting is in an engineering unit of OUT_SCALE 18 4018 4118 4218 4318 4418 PV_ Osec AUTO Time constant of a single exponential filter for the FTIME PV in seconds 19 4019 4119 4219 4319 4419 FIELD_ Raw value of the field device in percent of thePV VAL range with a status reflecting the Transducer condition before signal characterization L TYPE or filtering PV FTIME 20 4020 4120 4220 4320 4420 UPDATE EVT This alert is generated by any change to the static data 21 4021 4121 4221 4321 4421 BLOCK The block alarm is used for all configuration ALM hardware connection failure or system problems in the block The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status if the subcode has changed 22 4022
236. m of Large Fluctua tion of High Side E Large Fluctuation Detection When a pump or compressor starts the large fluctua tion is generated as process condition changes rapidly This phenomenon affects process fluctuation measure ment so correct blockage detection is not performed If Large fluctuation of Low Side or Large fluctua tion of High Side is detected consider whether a blockage result is correct The threshold values to detect large fluctuation are set to DIAG LIM 3 and 5 Since these values are enough to detect large fluctua tion it is not almost necessary to change them A8 2 2 Combination of Reference Result and Blockage Detection An EJX differential pressure transmitter can detect four modes of impulse line blockage both sides high pressure side low pressure side and or single side when all the reference values are properly measured However the detectable alarm mode combination is limited when some of the reference values are invalid The relation between the detectable blockage modes and reference value results are shown in the below figure A NOTE REFERENCE_FDP must be larger than the specified level shown in Table A8 3 refer A8 2 6 No blockage can be detected when VALUE_FDP is not large enough The plausibility of blockage detection needs to be confirmed by blockage simulation test The simulation test can be performed by the appropriate manifold operation refer to A8 2 8
237. manufacturer s installa tion drawing must be followed when installing this equipment No revision to drawing without prior Factory Mutual Research Approval Terminator must be FM Approved Note a warning label worded SUBSTITU TION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR INTRINSIC SAFETY and INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE DOC NO IFM026 A12 P 1 TO 4 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Electrical Data Rating 1 Entity For Groups A B C D F and G or Group IIC Maximum Input Voltage Vmax 24 V Maximum Input Current Imax 250 mA Maximum Input Power Pmax 1 2 W Maximum Internal Capacitance Ci 3 52 nF Maximum Internal Inductance Li 0 mH Or Rating 2 FISCO For Groups A B C D F and G or Group IIC Maximum Input Voltage Vmax 17 5 V Maximum Input Current Imax 380 mA Maximum Input Power Pmax 5 32 W Maximum Internal Capacitance Ci 3 52 nF Maximum Internal Inductance Li 0 mH or Rating 3 FISCO For Groups C D F and G or Group IIB Maximum Input Voltage Vmax 17 5 V Maximum Input Current Imax 460 mA Maximum Input Power Pmax 5 32 W Maximum Internal Capacitance Ci 3 52 nF Maximum Internal Inductance Li 0 mH Sensor Circuit Uo26 51 V lo 4 mA Po 6 mW Co 34 uF Lo 500 mH Note In the rating 1 the output current of the barrier must be limited by a resistor Ra such that lo Uo Ra In the rating 2 or 3 the output characteristics of the barrier must be the type of trapezoid which are certified as the FISCO model See FISCO Rules
238. mbers bitO Scalar input bit1 Scalar output bit2 Discrete input bit3 Discrete output 16 1016 RESTART Allows a manual restart to be initiated Several degrees of restart are possible They are 1 Run 2 Restart resource 3 Restart with initial value specified in FF functional spec 1 and 4 Restart processor 1 FF 891 Foundation Specification Function Block Application Process Part 2 17 1017 FEATURES Soft write lock Used to show supported resource block options supported Report supported 9 1 T0901 1 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Factory Write E Index Index Parameter Name Default Mode Explanation 18 1018 FEATURE SEL Soft write lock AUTO Used to select resource block options defined in FEATURES supported bit0 Scheduled Report bit1 Event driven supported bit2 Manufacturer specified 19 1019 CYCLE TYPE Scheduled Identifies the block execution methods available for this resource 20 1020 CYCLE_SEL Scheduled AUTO Used to select the block execution method for this resource 21 1021 MIN CYCLE T 3200 100ms Time duration of the shortest cycle interval of which the resource is capable 22 1022 MEMORY_SIZE 0 Available configuration memory in the empty resource To be checked before attempting a download 23 1023 NV_CYCLE_T 0 Interval between writing copies of
239. mbined with the input of the control block The setting is written to the EJX link object See Block setting in Section 5 6 for the details It is also possible to read values from the host at proper intervals instead of connecting the EJX block output to other blocks The combined blocks need to be executed synchro nously with other blocks on the communications schedule In this case change the EJX schedule according to the following table The values in the table are factory settings Table 5 3 Execution Schedule of the EJX Function Blocks Setting Enclosed is factory setting Cycle MACROCYCLE period of control or measurement Unit is 1 32 ms 16000 0 5 s 276 FB START ENTRY 1 Al1 block startup time SM Elapsed time from the start of MACROCYCLE specified in 1 32 ms 0 2 0 s 277 FB START ENTRY 2 Al2 block startup time SM Elapsed time from the start of MACROCYCLE specified in 1 32ms 8000 250ms 278 FB START ENTRY 3 AI3 block startup time SM Elapsed time from the start of MACROCYCLE specified in 1 32ms 16000 500ms 279 FB START ENTRY A4 Al4 block startup time SM Elapsed time from the start of MACROCYCLE specified in 1 32ms 24000 750ms 280 to FB START ENTRY 5 Not used 289 to SM FB START ENTRY 14 Index Parameters 269 MACROCYCLE_ SM DURATION T0503 EPS 5 2 IM 01C25R03 01E A maximum of 30 ms is taken for execution of
240. mensional value 1342 1 42 FF GAIN 0 MAN Gain for FF VAL 43 UPDATE EVT Same as that for an Al block 44 BLOCK ALM Same as that for an Al block 45 ALARM SUM Enable Same as that for an Al block 46 ACK OPTION OxFFFF Same as that for an Al block 47 ALARM HYS 0 596 0 to 5096 Hysteresis for alarm detection and resetting to prevent each alarm from occurring and recovering repeatedly within a short time 48 HI HI PRI 0 0to 15 Priority order of HI HI ALM alarm 49 HI HI LIM INF PV_SCALE Setting for HI_HI_ALM alarm 50 HI PRI 0 0to 15 Priority order of HI ALM alarm 51 HI LIM INF PV_SCALE Setting for HI ALM alarm 52 LO PRI 0 0to 15 Priority order of LO ALM alarm 53 LO LIM INF PV SCALE Setting for LO ALM alarm 54 LO LO PRI 0 0to 15 Priority order of LO LO ALM alarm 55 LO LO LIM INF PV SCALE Setting for LO LO ALM alarm 56 DV HI PRI 0 0to 15 Priority order of DV HI ALM alarm 57 DV HI LIM INF Setting for DV_HI_ALM alarm 58 DV_LO_PRI 0 0 to 15 Priority order of DV_LO_ALM alarm 59 DV LO LIM INF Setting for DV_LO_ALM alarm 60 HI HI ALM Alarm that is generated when the PV value has exceeded the HI HI LIM value and whose priority order is defined in HI HI PRI Priority order Only one alarm is generated at a time When two or more alarms occur at the same time the alarm having the highest priority order is generated When the PV value has decreased below HI HI LIM ALM HYS HI HI ALM is reset 6
241. mode AL 21 Description SIMULATE_ENABLE switch is ON Resource Block is in O S mode 0x00080000 AMP Module Failure 2 AL 03 AMP module failure 0x00008000 LINK OBJ 1 17 33 not open Link object 1 is not open 0x00004000 0x00002000 LINK OBJ 2 18 34 not open LINK OBJ 3 19 35 not open Link object 2 is not open Link object 3 is not open 0x00001000 LINK OBJ 4 20 36 not open Link object 4 is not open 0x00000800 LINK OBJ 5 21 37 not open Link object 5 is not open 0x00000400 LINK OBJ 6 22 38 not open Link object 6 is not open 0x00000200 LINK OBJ 7 23 39 not open Link object 7 is not open 0x00000100 LINK OBJ 8 24 40 not open Link object 8 is not open 0x00000080 LINK OBJ 9 25 Link object 9 is not open not open 0x00000040 LINK OBJ 10 26 Link object 10 is not open not open 0x00000020 LINK OBJ 11 27 Link object 11 is not open not open 0x00000010 LINK OBJ 12 28 Link object 12 is not open not open 0x00000008 LINK OBJ 13 29 Link object 13 is not open not open 0x00000004 LINK OBJ 14 30 Link object 14 is not open not open 0x00000002 LINK OBJ 15 31 Link object 15 is not open not open 0x00000001 LINK OBJ 16 32 Link object 16 is not open not open T0801 EPS Table 8 2 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_2 index 1046 Hexadecimal 0x80000000 Displa
242. mperature sensor 63 2063 CLEAR CAL 0 O S Reset zero and span adjustment to factory calibrated values for pressure static pressure external temperature and or all 64 2064 CAP_TEMP_VAL Measured capsule temperature value and status 65 2065 CAP_TEMP_ 40 0 to 120 0 C High and low range limit values engineering units decimal RANGE point place for capsule temperature 66 2066 AMP_TEMP_VAL Measured Amplifier temperature value and status 67 2067 AMP_TEMP_ 50 0 to 95 0 C High and low range limit values engineering units decimal RANGE point place for Amplifier temperature 68 2068 MODEL Model code The model code 69 2069 SPECIAL_ Special order Identification number of special order ORDER_ID number 70 2070 MANUFAC_DATE 0 O S Date of production 71 2071 CAP GASKET_MTL Depend on Specify O S Material of capsule gasket 72 2072 FLANGE MTL Depend on Specify O S Material of flange 73 2073 D VENT PLUG Depend on Specify O S Material of drain or vent plug 74 2074 FLANGE TYPE Depend on Specify O S Flange type 75 2075 REM _SEAL_ Depend on O S Material of isolating diaphragms for remote seal ISOL_MTL Specify 76 2076 FLANGE_SIZE Depend on Specify O S Flange size TA 2077 REM _SEAL_ Depend on O S Number of remote seal NUM Specify 78 2078 REM _SEAL_ Depend on O S Types of fill fluid in remote seals FILL_FLUID Specify 79 2079 REM _SEAL_ Depend on O S Types of remote seals TYPE Specify 80 20
243. mulation SPRESS value and status SIMULATE Set the external temperature signal ETEMP simulation value and status T0600 EPS The flow value becomes the simulation value which is calculated by using simulation value of DP SP and ET The LCD continuously displays the simulation value and alarm AL 080 SNR SIM in alternating sequence Simulation continues for 10 minutes then is released automaticaly IM 01C25R03 01E If one of following alarm occurs all the output data is hold to the value before alarm occurs AL 01 CAP ERR AL 02 AMP ERR AL 03 ET ERR The simulation mode will automatically be released after approximately ten minutes A NOTE If the DP or SP simulation value set by a user is out of the setting range of the product capsule the transmitter automatically use maximum or minimum settable value in place of actual setiing value to perform simulation If the ET simulation value set by a user is out of the setting range a configuration error occurs 6 3 7 Functions Relating to Capsule and Amplifier Temperature Reference to capsule and amplifier temperature value In CAP_TEMP_VAL and AMP_TEMP_VAL it is possible to refer to the capsule and amplifier tempera ture value and status The update period of this value is about 1 sec The temperature unit is selected by XD_SCALE unit of the AI block in which CAP_TEMP_VAL is selected The status is normally Good Non Specific Ho
244. n BTU stands for British thermal unit HTG stands for hydrostatic tank gauging 30 BAL TIME More than 0 Time taken to return to the set value 31 BIAS Bias value used to calculate the output 32 GAIN Gain value used to calculate the output 33 OUT_HI_LIM Maximum output value 34 OUT_LO_LIM Minimum output value 35 UPDATE_EVT Indicates event information if an update event setting change occurs 36 BLOCK_ALM Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs TA0405 02 EPS A 42 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK A PID block performs the PID control computation based on the deviation of the measured value PV from the setpoint SV and is generally used for constant setpoint and cascaded setpoint control A5 1 Function Diagram The figure below depicts the function diagram of a PID block BKCAL_OUT RCAS_OUT BKCAL_IN ROUT_IN ROUT_OUT CAS_IN RCAS IN Setpoint Feed forward OUT PID Control i PV Computation IN Input Filter Data Status Management Mode Control Alarm i Processing Output Tracking TRK_IN_D TRK_VAL FA0101 EPS Figure A5 1 PID Block A5 2 Functions of PID Block The table below shows the functions provided in a PID block Function PID control computation Description Computes the control output in accordance with the PID control algorithm Control output Converts the chang
245. n Specific when the ILBD algorithm detects the abnormality Writable only when DIAG_MODE is Stop 0 90 2090 REF_LIM _FDPMIN 7 0E 10 AUTO Lower limit to judge whether REFERENCE_FDP is available for ILBD operation Writable only when Diag Mode is Stop 0 91 2091 REF_LIM _FSPMIN 1 0E 10 AUTO Lower limit to judge whether REFERENCE_FSPL and REFERENCE_FSPH are available for ILBD operation Writable only when Diag Mode is Stop 0 92 2092 REF_LIM _BLKFMAX AUTO Upper limit to judge whether REFERENCE_BLKF is available for ILBD operation Writable only when Diag Mode is Stop 0 93 2093 COMP_FLG 0 Compensation AUTO Whether RATIO_FDP is referred by CRATIO_FDP or NRATIO_FDP is selected Compensation 0 Non Compensation 1 94 2094 DIAG_LIM Refer to Table A8 2 AUTO Set the ten threshold value for ILBD 1 Upper limit to detect A Blocking 2 Lower limit to detect B Blocking 3 Upper limit to detect Large Fluctuation of Low Side 4 Lower limit to detect Low Side Blocking 5 Upper limit to detect Large Fluctuation of High Side 6 Lower limit to detect High Side Blocking 7 Upper limit to detect High Side Blocking by using VALUE_BLKF 8 Lower limit to detect Low Side Blocking by using VALUE_BLKF 9 Upper limit to detect Outside Diagnosis Range 10 Lower limit to detect Outside Dia
246. n the subcode field The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute 9 2509 TRANSDUCER A directory that specifies the number and starting indices of DIRECTORY the transducers 10 2510 TRANSDUCER_ 65535 other Identifies transducer TYPE 11 2511 XD ERROR The error code in transducer 0 No failure 19 Configuration error 12 2512 COLLECTION_ A directory that specifies the number starting indices and DIRECTORY DD Item Ids of the data collections in each transducer within a transducer block 13 2513 DISPLAY_SEL DISPLAY1 ON O S Selection of display 1 to 4 to be shown on LCD Bit0 1 DISPLAY1 ON Bit1 1 DISPLAY2 ON Bit2 1 DISPLAY3 ON Bit3 1 DISPLAY4 ON 14 2514 INFO SEL UNIT ON O S Selection of items to be displayed Bit0 1 TAG ON Bit121 PARAMETER ON Bit2 1 UNIT ON Bit3 1 STATUS ON 15 2515 BLOCK TAG1 Multisensing type Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on A display 1 Flow Measurement type Al4 16 2516 PARAMETER_ Multisensing type O S Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display1 Select SEL1 Alt OUT a parameter from Table 6 1 Flow Measurement type Al4 OUT 17 2517 DISPLAY_TAG1 Null O S Name of block tag to be displayed on display1 up to six alphanumeric plus a slash and a period 18 2518 UNIT SEL1 0 Auto O S Selection of unit to be displayed The unit of the parameter which is selected at PARAMETER SEL1 will be displayed w
247. ncertain or bad status is internally interpreted as a good IN_i The exception is that if the input status is Bad Not Connected INPUT_OPTS does not apply and the input is considered bad as is A4 2 4 Relationship between the Main Inputs and PV The value and PV status are determined by the statuses of two main inputs INPUT_OPTS and RANGE_LO and RANGE HI If the statuses of two main inputs are both good or anything other than good See A4 2 1 Main Inputs If only one of two main inputs has good status after application of INPUT_OPTS the PV value is determined as follows If the status of IN is good and that of IN_LO is anything other than good IN gt RANGE_LO gt PV IN IN RANGE_LO See A4 2 1 A 38 APPENDIX 4 ARITHMETIC AR BLOCK If the status of IN is anything other than good and that of IN LO is good IN_LO lt RANGE_HI gt PV IN_LO IN LO RANGE HI See A4 2 1 If the status of IN is good and that of IN LO is anything other than good PV g X IN 1 g X IN LO PV IN E w RANGE LO If the status of IN is anything other than good and that of IN LO is good PV IN LO PV g x IN 1 9 X IN LO _ SN gt IN_LO RANGE HI FA0403 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E A4 3 Computation Section A4 3 1 Computing Equations This subsection shows computing equations used in
248. nction this parameter must be enabled in IO OPTS The setting is in an engineering unit of OUT SCALE T0605 EPS 6 15 IM 01C25R03 01E 7 7 IN PROCESS OPERATION IN PROCESS OPERATION This chapter describes the procedure performed when changing the operation of the function block of the EJX multivariable transmitter in process 7 1 Mode Transition When the function block mode is changed to Out_Of_Service the function block pauses and a block alarm is issued When the function block mode is changed to Manual the function block suspends updating of output values In this case alone it is possible to write a value to the OUT parameter of the block for output Note that no parameter status can be changed 7 2 Generation of Alarm 7 2 1 Indication of Alarm When the self diagnostics function indicates that a device is faulty an alarm device alarm is issued from the resource block When an error block error is detected in each function block or an error in the process value process alarm is detected an alarm is issued from each block If an LCD indicator is in stalled the error number is displayed as AL XX If two or more alarms are issued multiple error numbers are displayed For details of ALARM refer to Section 8 2 Ss LLLI mu a 100 F0701 EPS Figure 7 1 Error Identification on Indicator 7 1 7 2 2 Alarms and Events The following alarms or events can be reported by th
249. niversal parameter intended for use when the host system separates the function blocks 4 2304 ALERT KEY 1 AUTO This is one of the universal parameters and is key information for identifying where an alert has occurred Normally the host System identifies specific area in a plant covered by a specific operator and this information is used for selecting only the required alert 5 2305 MODE BLK AUTO AUTO This universal parameter expresses the operation mode of the block and comprises the Actual mode Target mode Permit mode and Normal mode 6 2306 BLOCK ERR 0x0000 Indicates the error state relating to the self block 7 2307 UPDATE EVT Indicates the content of an event when an update event has occurred 8 2308 BLOCK ALM Indicates the content of an error that has occurred in the block 9 2309 TRANSDUCER This parameter is for storing the index of the transducer to be DIRECTORY included in the transmitter 10 2310 TRANSDUCER 104 Standard Indicates the type of transmitter TYPE Flow with Calibration 11 2311 XD ERROR Stores the most important error among the errors currently occurring in the transducer block When 0 is stored this means that no errors are occurring 12 2312 COLLECTION Stores the index of important parameters in the transducer _ DIRECTORY block and the item ID of the corresponding DD 13 2313 FLOW VALUE 1 Indicates the type of flow _TYPE 1 Mass flow 2 Volume flow 3 Standard vo
250. nput 7 from being selected DISABLE 8 Selector switch 8 to disable input 8 from being selected OP SELECT A parameter which can be set by an operator to forcibly employ the input of the selected number A 21 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK Output Parameters Computation or Selection Results OUT Block output SELECTED Indicates the input number selected using the alternatives Other Parameters OUT RANGE _ Sets the OUT range STATUS OPTS Option used to specify the handling of various statuses SELECT TYPE Determines the input selection algorithm MIN_GOOD Parameter specifying the minimum required number of inputs with good status If the number of inputs that are good is less than the value of MIN GOOD input selection is canceled Mode O S Allows configuration change but disables input value output Man Allows internal processing but the output value may vary depending on the definition of usage conditions Auto Outputs the input value The Input Selector IS block offers a maximum of eight input alternatives and generates the output according to the configured action This block generally receives inputs from the Analog Input AT function block The function of the IS block is to select a maximum minimum middle average first good or latched good signal The block combines parameter configuration DISABLE n and option first good to give priority to alternativ
251. number error 32791 On start state error other than DWNLD_NOT_READY 32792 Start segment error in module 1 32793 Binary file error 32794 Binary file error 32795 Device error in module 2 32796 Detection of EEPROM state other than backup after activation 32797 Checksum error in module 2 32798 Not in DWNLD READY state when receiving GenericDomainlnitiate 32799 Not in DWNLD OK state when receiving GenericDomainTerminate 32800 Not in DOWNLOADING state when receiving GenericDomainSegment 32801 Firmware error 36863 Unused TA0104 EPS A 65 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 7 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD A7 9 System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Soft ware Download Table A7 5 System Network Management VFD Parameters Write Mode R W read write R read only an Parameter Name hod Sub parameter Name es hee Remarks 400 DWNLD_PROPERTY 0 R 1 Download Class 1 2 Write Rsp Returned For ACTIVATE 1 3 Write Rsp Returned For PREPARE 1 4 Reserved 0 5 ReadyForDwnld Delay Secs 300 6 Activation Delay Secs 60 410 DOMAIN_DESCRIPTOR 0 R W Read write permitted only for sub index 1 1 Command 3 2 State 1 3 Error Code 0 4 Download Domain Index 440 5 Download Domain Header Index 420 6 Activated Domain Header Index 430 7 Domain Name Device name 420 DOMAIN HEADER 1 0 1 Header Version Number 2 Header Size 3 Manuf
252. o simulate measured inputs for checking the result of flow calculation The simulation function described in this section is flow simulation function For the other simulation function see 7 3 Simulation Function A preset fixed value can be output to the AI function block or FLOW transducer block instead of the differen tial pressure value static pressure value and external temperature value calculated from the sensor signals Select the signal for enabling simulation in the SIMULATE MODE parameter Set the value and status to be used for simulation in the SIMULATE DPRESS SIMULATE SPRESS and SIMULATE ETEMP parameters Parameter Explanation SIMULATE_ Select the signal for enabling simulation MODE 0 Simulation OFF 1 Differential pressure signal simulation ON 2 Static pressure signal simulation ON 3 Differential pressure signal static pressure signal simulation ON 4 External temperature signal simulation ON 5 Differential pressure signal external temperature signal simulation ON 6 Static pressure signal external temperature signal simulation ON 7 Differential pressure signal static pressure signal external temperature signal simulation ON 15 Differential pressure signal static pressure signal external temperature signal w out damping processing simulation ON SIMULATE_ Set the differential pressure signal simulation DPRESS value and status SIMULATE_ Set the static pressure signal si
253. ocedure for automatic adjustment is as follows 1 Change the Block mode Set MODE_BLK to O S 2 Enter zero pressure Apply the actual zero pressure to EJX multivariable transmitter 3 Perform zero adjustment When the value of the applied pressure is written to CAL_POINT_LO EJX calculates the amount of adjustment for zero adjustment The calculated amount of adjustment is incorporated into CAL_DEVIATION_LO 4 Input pressure for span adjustment For span adjustment apply the actual 100 pressure to EJX multivariable transmitter 5 Performance of span adjustment When the value of the applied pressure is written to CAL_POINT_HI EJX multivariable transmitter calculates the amount of adjustment for span adjustment The calculated amount of adjustment is incorporated into CAL_DEVIATION_HI 6 Change the operation mode Set MODE_BLK to AUTO for normal operation F0602 EPS Calculated Value Calculated Value Span adjustment point After zero adjustment J lt After zero adjustment nput pressure Input pressure Before zero Ps adjustment i After zero span adjustment F0603 EPS AN CAUTION Span adjustment is a function for adjusting the gradient with respect to the point of zero adjust ment If that point is not zero the gradient of input and output values cannot be accurately adjusted Perform span adjustment after zero adjustment is completed IM 01C25R03 01E Diagnosis of adjustmen
254. oidal or rectangular output characteristic only Uo 14 17 5 V LS maximum value Io according to spark test result or other assessment No specification of Lo and Co is required on the certificate or label Cable The cable used to interconnect the devices needs to comply with the following parameters Loop resistance R 15 150 Q km Inductance per unit length Z 0 4 1 mH km Capacitance per unit length C 45 200 nF km C C line line 0 5 C line screen if both lines are floating or C C line line C line screen if the screen is connected to one line Length of spur cable max 60 m Length of trunk cable max I km Group IIC or 5 km Group IIB Length of splice max 1m 2 HANDLING CAUTIONS Terminators At each end of the trunk cable an FM approved line terminator with the following parameters is suitable R 90 100 Q C 0 2 2 mF System evaluations The number of passive device like transmitters actuators hand held terminals connected to a single bus segment is not limited due to L S reasons Further more if the above rules are respected the inductance and capacitance of the cable need not to be considered and will not impair the intrinsic safety of the installa tion HAZARDOUS AREA SAFE AREA I Supply Unit and Safety Barrier FISCO Model Terminator FISCO Model U O U O Terminator Data a Field Instr
255. on can be changed except for the first VCR which is used for management EJX multivariable transmitter has VCRs of four types Server QUB VCR A Server responds to requests from a host This communication needs data exchange This type of communication is called QUB Queued User triggered Bidirectional VCR Source QUU VCR A Source multicasts alarms or trends to other devices This type of communication is called QUU Queued User triggered Unidirectional VCR Publisher BNU VCR A Publisher multicasts block output to another function block s This type of communication is called BNU Buffered Network triggered Unidirec tional VCR Subscriber BNU VCR A Subscriber receives output of another function block s A Server VCR is capable to responding to requests from a Client QUB VCR after the Client successfully initiates connection to the Server A Source VCR transmits data without established connection A Sink QUU VCR on another device can receive it if the Sink is configured so A Publisher VCR transmits data when LAS requests so An explicit connection is established from Subscriber BNU VCR s so that a Subscriber knows the format of published data Each VCR has the parameters listed in Table 5 4 Parameters must be changed together for each VCR because modification of individual parameters may cause inconsistent operation 5 4 Table 5 4 VCR Static Entry 5 CONFIGURATION Sub index Parameter Fas
256. on functions in EJX multivari able transmitter one is the function commonly offered in FOUNDATION Fieldbus products to simulate input of each function block for loop check and the other is the flow simulation function to simulate measured inputs for checking the result of flow calculation The simulation function described in this section is the former one For flow simulation function see 6 3 6 Simulation Function The simulation function simulates the input of a function block and lets it operate as if the data was received from the transducer block It is possible to conduct testing for the downstream function blocks or alarm processes A SIMULATE_ENABLE switch is mounted in the amplifier This is to prevent the accidental operation of this function When this is switched on simulation is enabled See Figure 7 2 To initiate the same action from a remote terminal if REMOTE LOOP TEST SWITCH is written to the SIM ENABLE MSG parameter index 1044 of the resource block the resulting action is the same as is taken when the above switch is on Note that this parameter value is lost when the power is turned OFF In simulation enabled status an alarm is generated from the resource block and other device alarms will be masked for this reason the simulation must be disabled immediately after using this function The SIMULATE parameter of AI block consists of the elements listed in Table 7 2 below Table 7 2 SIMULATE Parameter
257. ond to 0 and 100 and four decimal values OUT SCALE Sets the range unit and digit of the output scale CHANNEL Selects the signal which is calculated in SENSOR Transducer Block The relation between the signals and channels are shown below Channel 1 PRIMARY VALUE differential pressure Channel 2 SECONDARY VALUE H side static pressure Channel 3 TERTIARY VALUE L side static pressure Channel 4 EXT TEMP VALUE external temperature Channel 5 FLOW VALUE flow Channel 6 CAP TEMP VAL capsule temperature Channel 7 AMP TEMP VAL amplifier temperature Channel 8 FLG TEMP VAL flange temperature option code DG1 Flow value channel 5 can be assigned to only one Al block at one time Other variables can be assigned to one or more Al blocks simultaneously L TYPE The operation function of the Al function block can be selected from Direct Indirect Linear or Indirect SQRT Direct The Signal from the transducer block is directly output by filtering only but without scaling or square root extraction Indirect Linear Values scaled according to the range settings of XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE are output Indirect SQRT The square root extraction is performed to the values scaled according to the range settings of XD SCALE The square root values are scaled and output according to the range settings of OUT SCALE LOW CUT When the output value is smaller than the value set by this parameter the output value is 0 To enable the low cut fu
258. onding to the new software revision Table 1 Actions after Software Update Contents of Software Update Action Does not change the number Re setup of parameters not of parameters needed Adds a block parameter Setup of the added parameter needed Adds a block Reengineering and setup of the added block s parameters needed Changes the number of Reengineering needed system network management VFD parameters TA0101 EPS A 63 APPENDIX 7 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 7 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD A7 7 Troubleshooting For information on the download tool s error messages see also the software s User s Manual Table A7 2 Problems after Software Update Symptom An error occurs before starting a download disabling the download Cause The selected download file is not for the selected field device Remedy Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the resource block and obtain the correct file An error occurs after starting a download disabling the download You attempted to update the device revision by downloading a file which is not an original file Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the resource block and obtain the original file The selected field device does not support software downloading The voltage on the fieldbus segment falls below the specified limit 9 volts Check whether the option code EE is included in the model and suffix codes of the device Check
259. ons and work sequence 1 The IS block obtains values and status information from AI 2 The block selects the AI information using the alternatives 3 The block displays and outputs the information selected by SELECTED A 35 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 4 ARITHMETIC AR BLOCK APPENDIX 4 ARITHMETIC AR BLOCK The Arithmetic AR block switches two main inputs of different measurement ranges seamlessly and combines the result with three auxiliary inputs through the selected compensation function 10 types to calculate the output A4 1 Arithmetic Function Block Schematic The diagram below shows the Arithmetic block schematic RANGE LO ARITH TYPE RANGE HI BAL_TIME IN gt 4 RANGE EXTENSION FUNCTION OUT_HI_LIM IN_LO gt Q gt MAN O S t1 func GAIN ae IN 1 gt 0 IN 1 BIAS IN_1 GAININ_1 3 ALGORITHM TYPE LBIAS U R A t2 IN 2 9 5 IN 2 BIAS IN 2 GAIN IN 2 34 T i OUT_LO_LIM t3 IN 3 gt 0 IN 3 BIAS IN_3 GAIN_IN_3 3 O l PU BIAS IN i O COMP HI LIM GAIN IN i FA0401 EPS Figure A4 1 AR Block The Arithmetic block is divided into three sections Input section Makes a go no go decision on the use of an input value switches the range and determines the PV status Computation section Makes calculations through ARITH TYPE Output sec
260. or the SENSOR Transducer block in Chapter 9 6 2 6 3 3 Functions Relating to Differential Pressure Reference to differential pressure value By accessing PRIMARY VALUE it is possible to refer to the differential pressure value and status The update period of this value is 200 msec The pressure unit is selected by XD SCALE unit of the AI block in which PRIMARY VALUE is selected The status is normally Good Non Specific However in the case of a sensor failure or out of measurement range it turns to Bad or Uncertain For details refer to Table 8 9 Setting of signal damping for differential pressure When the differential pressure signal fluctuates greatly the fluctuation can be reduced by increasing the time constant for signal damping PRIMARY VALUE FTIME is the parameter for setting the signal damping for differential pressure The unit of signal damping is second Determination of the range limit of differential pressure signal When the differential pressure signal deviates more than 10 from the capsule measurement range shown in PRIMARY VALUE RANGE set the status of PRIMARY VALUE to Uncertain Sensor Conversion not Accurate IM 01C25R03 01E Adjustment of pressure differential pressure signal EJX multivariable transmitter have been accurately adjusted according to the specifications at factory setting Minimal errors can occur due to the environ ment where the transmitter is installed and the mount ing position
261. ording to the correlation between OUT and TOTAL_SP PRE_TRIP For counting up PRE_TRIP 31 OUT_TRIP 14 0 OUT_PTRIP 15 0 0 Counting up starting from 0 For counting down OUT_TRIP 14 0 OUT TRIP H4 1 OUT_PTRIP 15 1 OUT_PTRIP 15 1 TOTAL_SP 7 OUT_TRIP 14 1 OUT_TRIP 14 0 OUT_PTRIP 15 1 OUT_PTRIP 15 1 lt _ 3 o PRE_TRIP 31 OUT_TRIP 14 0 OUT_PTRIP 15 0 TOTAL_SP 7 Counting down starting from TOTAL SP A 15 FA0205 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK For counting up the OUT value is as follows OUT lt TOTAL SP PRE_TRIP OUT TRIP 0 COUT_PTRIP 0 TOTAL SP PRE TRIP lt OUT lt TOTAL SP OUT TRIP 0 COUT_PTRIP 1 TOTAL SP lt OUT OUT TRIP I COUT_PTRIP 1 For counting down the OUT value is as follows PRE_TRIP lt OUT OUT TRIP 0 COUT_PTRIP 0 0 lt OUT lt PRE_TRIP OUT_TRIP 0 COUT_PTRIP 1 OUT lt 0 OUT TRIP I COUT_PTRIP 1 Note that the given conditions do not apply to the following cases If INTEG TYPE is 5 6 or 7 OUT TRIP and OUT PTRIP always output 0 If INTEG TYPE is 1 or 3 occurrence of AutoRESET reset caused if the threshold is exceeded causes OUT TRIP to hold 1 for five seconds A2 5 3 Mode Handling Mode Action Output Automatic AUTO Normal action Normal output Manual MAN
262. passed VALUE FSPH Index 2105 7 14085e 9 Record the value after checked that the status is GOOD VALUE BLKF Index 2106 0 287259 Record the status of Checkbox in DIAG OPTION Index 2089 DIAG OPTION A Blocking M e Check that the alarms status of A F ee RD bike A dis E ste DE Blocking and Low Side Blocking are Large Fluctuation of Low Side MORE te eae eee OE set Large Fluctuation of High Side Jt FEM a l Low Side Blocking y Note Ifthe eam of Outside Diagnosis High Side Blocking Range is generated the valve may q s G si event be closed too much tightly Open _ BBlockng n CERES valve a little and record the updated Invalid Ref BIKF status of the parameters n Invalid Ref fSPh MOM Er M RR Pop Tee Invalid Ref fSPI Invalid Ref fDP Outside Diagnosis Range t IE Reflect Blockage to PV SV TV Status Check that the alarm of Low Side DIAG ERR Index 2086 Blocking is generated n Check that the alarm of High Side L Tow Side Blocking E SS Ba ne oe Pr ROEE M PREM Blocking is not generated High Side Blocking 10 a 3 Both Side Blocking Close the both pressure side valves completely Record the values of VALUE_ after the VALUE_FDP Index 2103 7 48562e 9 certain time DIAG_PERIOD x VALUE_FSPL Index 2104 7 23277e 9 DIAG_COUNT passed VALUE_FSPH Index 2105 7 14085e 9
263. quation 34 GOOD LIM 0 0 The threshold value of the ratio of the integrated values of the increments whose a status is Good to all integrated values in which the status of OUT is Good The threshold value of the ratio of the integrated values of the increments whose 35 JUNCERT_LIM 0 01 status is Good to all the integrated values in which the status of OUT is Uncertain 36 OP_CMD_INT 0 Operator command that resets integrated values 37 OUTAGE LIM 0 0 Maximum time for which values can be retained in the event of power failure It does not effect the block operation Reset confirmation input which is enabled when the Confirm reset option of 38 e 9 INTEG_OPTS is chosen 1 1 39 UPDATE_EVT 0 Indicates event information if an update event occurs 0 0 1 1 40 BLOCK_ALM 0 Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs 0 0 41 ACCUM_TOTAL 0 0 Accumulated integrated values no extension parameter is reset TA0206 2 EPS A 20 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK APPENDIX 3 INPUT SELECTOR IS BLOCK The function of the Input Selector IS block is to automatically select one signal from multiple input signals using a specified selection method The IS block is used for selective control in which one measured quantity is selected from multiple measured quanti ties to be transmitted to the controller as a controlled variable This feature is primarily used for temperatur
264. ransmits the time data to all fieldbus devices on the segment and returns the time data in response to a request from a device Live list equalization Sends the live list data to link masters on the same segment LAS transfer Transfers the right to be the LAS on the segment to another link master A6 2 Link Master A link master LM is any device containing a link active scheduler There must be at least one LM on a segment When the LAS on a segment has failed another LM on the same segment starts working as the LAS LM There are 3 LMs on this segment Node address 0x14 SlotTime 5 LM LM Basic device Basic device Basic device Basic device Node address Node address Node address Node address Node address Node address 0x15 0x16 0xF1 0xF2 0xF3 0xF4 SlotTime 5 SlotTime 5 FA0201 EPS Figure A6 1 Example of Fieldbus configuration 3 LMs on Same Segment A 53 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 6 LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS A6 3 Transfer of LAS There are two procedures for an LM to become the LAS If the LM whose value of V ST XV TN is the smallest on a segment with the exception of the current LAS judges that there is no LAS on the segment in such a case as when the segment has started up or when the current LAS has failed the LM declares itself as the LAS then becomes the LAS With this procedure an LM backs up the LAS as shown in the following figure The LM whose value of V ST XV TN is the
265. ration has been set If no bit is set it is evident that the operations have been executed successfully Use Uncertain 10 STATUS_OPTS O S Ra 2 A user selectable option available for status handling in the block Manual only 11 IN 1 0 5 5 Input 1 12 IN 2 0 5 5 Input 2 13 IN 3 0 5 5 Input 3 14 IN 4 0 5 5 Input 4 15 DISABLE_1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 1 from being selected 16 DISABLE_2 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 2 from being selected 17 DISABLE_3 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 3 from being selected 18 DISABLE_4 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 4 from being selected 19 SELECT TYPE 0 1 Specifies the input selection algorithm Parameter specifying the minimum required number of inputs with good status 20 MIN_GOOD 0 1 If the number of inputs with good status is less than the value of MIN GOOD input selection is canceled Indicates the number of the selected input However it indicates the number of 21 SELECTED inputs used to calculate the average if SELECT_TYPE Average If no input is selectable or if there are multiple inputs it becomes 0 none 22 OP_SELECT A parameter to forcibly employ the input of a selected number Operator settable 23 UPDATE EVT occ Indicates event information if an update event setting change occurs 24 BLOCKALM eee Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs 25 IN 5 0 5 5 Input 5 26 IN 6 0 5 5 Input 6
266. rimary Value EJX910A EJX930A L M and H capsule 300 msec 350 msec T1000 EPS When amplifier damping is set to zero and including dead M and H capsule time Update Period Differential Pressure 200 msec Static Pressure 200 msec Capsule Temperature 1 sec Integral Indicator LCD display 5 digit Numerical Display 6 digit Unit Display and Bar graph The indicator is configurable to display one or up to ten of the I O signals periodically Functional Specifications Functional specifications for Fieldbus communication conform to the standard specifications H1 of FOUNDATION Fieldbus Function Block Block Number Execution Note name time Al 5 30 mS For differential pressure static pressure and temperature An Output of Signal Characterizer SC 1 30 mS block is a non linear function of the respective input The function is determined by a table Integrator block integrates a IT 1 30mS variable as a function of the time or accumulates the counts Input Selector block provides selection of up to eight inputs and generate an output based on the configured action Arithmetic block permits simple AR 1 30 mS use of popular measurement math functions IS 1 30 mS PID 1 45 mS Applicable when LC1 option is Amplifier Temperature 1 sec specified T1001 EPS External Temperature 800 msec LM Function Fits MAE LM function is supported LM function
267. rted into kg s in this example the input Converts the unit into N 2 value is multiplied by 0 453 that based on seconds 1 lb 0 453 kg TIME_UNIT2 input2 sec 1 UNIT CONV MM increment2 min 60 gt x conversion factor H x block execution time Ib min hour 3600 lb s Conversion factor kg s kg Ib pounds day 86400 0 453 in this example FA0202 EPS Figure A2 2 Increment Calculation with Rate Input A 10 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK A2 2 3 Converting Accumulation This following describes an example of accumulation conversion In accumulation conversion the difference between the value executed previously and the value executed this time is integrated or accumulated This conversion applies when the output of a function block used as a counter is input to the input process of the Integrator block In order to convert the rate of change of an input to a value with an engineering unit the user must configure the factor of conversion to the appropriate engineering unit in the PULSE_VALI and PULSE_VAL2 parameters Moreover the unit of IN_2 is standardized to that of IN 1 in the same way as rate conversion Thus the user must also set an appropriate value to UNIT_CONV input PULSE_VAL1 19 incrementi Current read value Previous read value x ulse al gt counts number of pulse p kg kg pulse input2 increment2
268. s Parameter BLOCK_HEADER Write Mode Block Tag O S Valid Range Initial Value 1 TAG SC Description Remarks Information relating to this function block such as block tag DD revision and execution time ST_REV The revision level of the set parameters associated with the Signal Characterizer block TAG_DESC Stores comments describing tag information STRATEGY The strategy field can be used by the high level system to identify function blocks ALERT_KEY Key information used to identify the location at which an alert has occurred MODE BLK Mode of the Signal Characterizer block O S Man and Auto are supported BLOCK ERR Indicates the error status of the Signal Characterizer block in bit strings OUT 1 Outputs the result of the value of IN 1 corrected using a line segment function OUT 2 Outputs the result of the value of IN 2 corrected using a line segment function It is also possible to approximate the result using the inverse function of the specified line segment function This is used for backward control X RANGE Y RANGE The engineering unit of variables corresponding to the x axis for display The engineering unit of variables corresponding to the y axis for display GRANT DENY The parameter used to check if various operations have been executed The bits in the GRANT parameter corresponding to various operations are set before being executed
269. s Refer to the installation diagram Note 4 Maintenance and Repair The instrument modification or parts replacement by other than authorized representative of Yokogawa Electric Corpo ration is prohibited and will void KEMA Intrinsically safe Certification Note 5 Special Conditions for Safe Use In the case where the enclosure of the Multivariable Transmitter is made of aluminium if it is mounted in an area where the use of category G apparatus is re quired it must be installed such that even in the event of rare incidents ignition sources due to impact and friction sparks are excluded 2 6 2 HANDLING CAUTIONS Note 6 Installation instructions The test voltage for the isolation between the intrincically safe supply output circuit and the frame of the apparatas for Multivariable Transmitters that are provided with surge protection is limited to 90 V due to the presence of the surge protection device only When used in a potentially explosive atmosphere requiring the use of apparatus of equipment category 1D or 2D certified cable entry devices shall be used that are suitable for the application and correctly installed FISCO Model Non Hazardous Hazardous Locations Locations Supply Unit and Safety Barrier FISCO Model Terminator FISCO Model i Exi OU U O I I LIT I Terminator Hand i held Data Terminal KE I Field Instrumen
270. s are set as follows dpavgmax 0 80 dpavgmin 0 80 1 000 Outside Diagnosis Range Detectable range Vout side Diagnosis Range FA0806_1 EPS Invalid Ref BIkF fSPh fSPI or fDP This alarm indicates that the reference value under normal condition is invalid If REFERENCE BLKF is invalid the blockage detection excluding VALUE_BLKF is carried out If blockage detection function based on VALUE_BLKF is required obtain the reference value again Also when REFERENCE_DPAVG is below DIAG_LIM 10 or exceeds DIAG_LIM 9 all reference value becomes invalid so that Invalid Ref fDP Invalid Ref fSPI Invalid Ref fSPh and Invalid Ref BIkF are generated E Alarm Masking DIAG OPTION The alarms linked to an analog alert and LCD display are selected by DIAG OPTION in the SENSOR Transducer block The BIT of DIAG OPTION is corresponding to that of DIAG ERR To link the alarm to an analog alert and LCD display follow the procedure below 1 Set Stop to DIAG MODE 2 Check each checkbox of the alarm which is selectable from bit 2 to bit 14 Note The bit 13 and 14 are used for Heat trace monitoring function Set to Calculation after setting the parameters APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC E Analog Alert Setting Link to DIAG H ALM and DIAG L ALM DIAG H ALM and DIAG L ALM enable to indicate the alarm status separately divided into the high and low pressure side alert The
271. s for the corresponding 20 PULSE VAL2 MAN IN into an appropriate engineering unit 21 2 2 Selector switch used to specify the fluid flow direction 22 2 forward reverse with respect to the corresponding IN 23 2 The parameter that receives a reset request from an external block to reset the integrated values 24 4 Indicates the snapshot of OUT just before a reset 25 MAN 4 4 Indicates the integrated value of the absolute values of the increments if the input status is Bad 26 4 Indicates the snapshot of RTOTAL just before a reset 27 4 Indicates the snapshot of TOTAL SP just before a reset Integration Type Setting Value Name Description UP AUTO Counts up and is automatically reset when TOTAL SP is reached UP AUTO 2 UP DEM Counts up and is reset as demanded 28 INTEG TYPE 1 3 DN AUTO Counts down and 1tomatically reset when 0 is reached 4 DN DEM Counts down and is reset as demanded 5 PERIODIC Counts up and is reset at periods specified in CLOCK PER 6 DEMAND Counts up and is reset as demanded 7 PER amp DEM Reset periodically or as demanded Specifies an integration optional function bit Option Name Description 0 Input 1 accumulate Selects Rate or Accum input of IN_1 1 Input 2 accumulate Selects Rate or Accum input of IN_2 2 Flow forward Integrates forward flow interprets reverse flow as zero 3 Flow reverse Integrates reverse flow interprets forward flow as zero Uses an input value of IN 1 or IN 2 whose st
272. s selected 76 2576 DISPLAY_UNIT10 Null O S User specified unit to be displayed on display10 which will be available when Custom is selected at UNIT SEL10 77 2577 EXP_MODE10 0 O S Selection of the displayed value in exponent such as x1 x10 x100 and x1000 T0903 4 EPS 9 14 IM 01C25R03 01E 9 5 Al Function Block 9 PARAMETER LISTS Relative Index Index Index Index Index Parameter Factory Write Explanation Index AM AI2 AI3 Al4 AI5 Name Default Mode p O 4000 4100 4200 4300 4400 Block TAG Alt or Block Tag Information on this block such as Block Tag DD Header Al2 or O S Revision Execution Time etc AI3 or Al4 or AI5 1 4001 4101 4201 4301 4401 ST REV The revision level of the static data associated with the function block The revision value will be incremented each time a static parameter value in the block is changed 2 4002 4102 4202 4302 4402 TAG_ Null AUTO The user description of the intended application of DESC the block 3 4003 4103 4203 4303 4403 STRATEGY 1 AUTO The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks This data is not checked or processed by the block 4 4004 4104 4204 4304 4404 ALERT 1 AUTO The identification number of the plant unit This KEY information may be used in the host for sorting alarms
273. se INFINITY is configured for unused point s Others CURVE_Y Selector switch used to specify if an inverse function is used for the line segment SWAP_2 approximation of IN_2 to OUT_2 The setting of SWAP_2 on which uses the inverse function is used for backward control TA0101 EPS A 1 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 1 SIGNAL CHARACTERIZER SC BLOCK Line segment factor Input section determination section Output section Y OUT a Determining processing Determining LOCK ERR the gradient the mode dint t ene Ter Cep Determining the JOUT 2 status and computing OUT XorY CURVE_X SWAP 2 CURVE_Y D MODE AUTO MODE MAN or O S FA0102 EPS Figure A1 2 Overview of the Signal Characterizer Block The following describes the Signal Characterizer block dividing its functions into three sections Input section Determines the mode and judges BLOCK ERR Line segment factor determination section Determines the gradient and intercept for OUT_1 and OUT 2 based on CURVE X CURVE Y and SWAP 2 at shift 1 e Output section Multiplies the input values in IN 1 and IN 2 by the gradient and adds the intercept to them before outputting the results Alternatively it outputs a limit value A 2 IM 01C25R03 01E A1 2 Input Section APPENDIX 1 SIGNAL CHARACTERIZER SC BLOCK The input section determines the mode and judges BLOCK_E
274. smallest on a segment with the exception of the current LAS requests the LAS on the same segment to transfer the right of being the LAS then becomes the LAS LM In the event that the current LAS in this segment node address 0x14 fails the LM with the address of 0x15 takes its place to become the LAS Node address 0x14 SlotTime 5 LM LM Basic device Basic device Basic device Basic device Node address Node address Node address Node address Node address Node address 0x15 0x16 0xF1 0xF2 0xF3 0xF4 SlotTime 5 SlotTime 5 FA0202 EPS Figure A6 2 Backup of LAS To set up an EJX as a device that is capable of backing DimeBasicinfo EJX Index 361 SM up the LAS follow the procedure below Device Device Device Description NOTE When changing the settings in an EJX add the EJX to the segment in which an LAS is running After making changes to the settings do not turn off the power to the EJX for at least 30 seconds Capability value for V ST Capability value for V MRD MinInterPdu Capability value 1 Set the node address of the EJX910A In general Delay for V MID use an address from 0x10 to V FUN 1 TA0201 EPS In this case set SlotTime MaxResponseTime and 0x00 MinlnterPduDelay as follows OxOF Not used 0x10 ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord EJX Index 369 SM Bridge device 0x13 Settin zez 0x14 Subindex
275. sociated alert will never occur 1 the associated alert is not sent as a notification If the priority is above 1 then the alert must be reported 2 Block alarm and update event have a fixed priority of 2 3 7 advisory alarms PV STATUS Active Advisory Alarm 8 15 critical alarms PV STATUS Active Critical Alarm T0811 EPS 8 6 8 DEVICE INFORMATION IM 01C25R03 01E 8 DEVICE INFORMATION Table 8 12 Action of each parameters in failure mode related Advanced Diagnostic option code DG1 SENSOR Transducer block ALARM PV STATUS Display Cause of Alarm DIAG_ERR SV STATUS TV STATUS Hexadecimal Display through DD 1 si Flange Temperature High Alarm occurs 0x4000 Flg Temp High Alarm FLG HI wa Flange Temperature Low Alarm occurs 0x2000 Fig Temp Low Alarm FLGL AL 88 Reference fDP value is invalid 0x0800 Invalid Ref DP INVR DP AL 88 Reference fSPI value is invalid 0x0400 Invalid Ref SPI INVR SL AL 88 Reference fSPh value is invalid 0x0200 Invalid Ref fSPh INVR SH AL 88 Reference BIkF value is invalid 0x0100 Invalid Ref BIkF INVR F AL 89 B Blocking is detected 0x0080 B Blocking UNCERTAIN Non Specific B BLK AL 89 High pressure side Blocking is detected 0x0040 High Side Blocking UNCERTAIN Non Specific H BLK AL 89 Low pressure side Blocking is detected 0x0020 Low Side Blocking UNCERTAIN Non Specific L BLK nA Large Fluctuation of High Side
276. standardized by The Fieldbus Foundation and provides interoperability between Yokogawa devices and those produced by other manufacturers Fieldbus comes with software consisting of five AI function blocks that enable the flexible implementation of systems For information on other features engineering design construction work startup and maintenance of Fieldbus refer to Fieldbus Technical Information TI 38K03A01 01E 3 2 Internal Structure of EJX Multivariable Transmitter The EJX Multivariable transmitter contains two virtual field devices VFD that share the following functions 3 2 1 System network Management VFD Sets node addresses and Physical Device tags PD Tag necessary for communication Controls the execution of function blocks Manages operation parameters and communication resources Virtual Communication Relationship VCR 3 2 2 Function Block VFD 1 Resource block Manages the status of EJX hardware Automatically informs the host of any detected faults or other problems 2 SENSOR Transducer block Converts sensor output to pressure static pressure and capsule temperature signals and transfers to the AI function blocks and flow transducer blok S FLOW Transducer block Accepts differential pressure static pressure and external temperature data from the transducer block calculates flow and transfer to the AI function block 3 1 4 LCD Transducer block Controls th
277. t a A 56 A6 5 1 LM Parameter List eee aaa aaa aaa aaa A 56 A6 5 2 Descriptions for LM Parameters e uooaeaua anna aaaaa A 58 A6 6 FAOStz MT A 60 APPENDIX 7 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD eene eene A 61 A7 1 Benefits of Software Download sssssssesee A 61 A72 SPEGIICAUONS eet erp p dedi E pe Ela EP dent uit eerie Shes A 61 A7 3 Preparations for Software Downloading esses A 61 A7 4 Software Download Sequence sse A 62 A7 5 Download FISZ wa e tan oet en FEEL easton A 62 A7 6 Steps after Activating a Field Device A 63 Aff Troubleshooting iie n iier cce rid ooa et ee deles c addu e A 64 A7 8 Resource Block s Parameters Relating to Software Download A 64 A7 9 System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software Download x ee Ae ee A 66 A7 10 Comments on System Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software Download sssseeeeeee A 67 APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS eeeeeeeeee A 69 A8 1 Multi sensing Process Monitoring esee A 69 A8 2 Impulse Line Blockage Detection ILBD ssssss A 69 A8 2 1 Blockage Detection sessssssssseeeeeeennene A 71 A8 2 2 Combination of Reference Result and Blockage Detection A 72 A8 2 3 Operating Parameters
278. t be used as is Terminator Fieldbus requires two terminators Refer to the supplier for details of terminators that are attached to the host Field devices Connect Fieldbus communication type EJX multivariable transmitter Two or more EJX devices or other devices can be connected Host Used for accessing field devices A dedicated host such as DCS is used for an instrumentation line while dedicated communication tools are used for experimental purposes For operation of the host refer to the instruction manual for each host No other details on the host are given in this manual Cable Used for connecting devices Refer to Fieldbus Technical Information TI 38K03A01 01E for details of instrumentation cabling For laboratory or other experimental use a twisted pair cable two to three meters in length with a cross section of 0 9 mm or more and a cycle period of within 5 cm 2 inches may be used Termination processing depends on the type of device being deployed For EJX multivariable transmitter use an M4 screw terminal claw Some hosts require a connector Refer to Yokogawa when making arrangements to purchase the recommended equipment Connect the devices as shown in Figure 4 1 Connect the terminators at both ends of the trunk with a minimum length of the spur laid for connection The polarity of signal and power must be maintained Fieldbus power Terminator Terminator F0401 EPS
279. t results When the amount of zero adjustment or span adjust ment exceeds any of the following adjustment limits ALSO Adjustment range error for differential pres sure is displayed The conditions for zero span adjustment are as follows 1 The point of zero adjustment is within 10 of the capsule range 2 The amount of zero adjustment is within 10 of the capsule range 3 The point of span adjustment is within the capsule range 4 The input and output gradients after span adjustment are within 10 of the gradient at factory setting 6 3 4 Functions Relating to Static Pres sure Reference to static pressure value In SECONDARY VALUE and TERTIARY VALUE it is possible to refer to the H side static pressure value and the L side static pressure value respectively The update period of these values is 200 msec The pressure unit is selected by XD SCALE unit in the AI block in which SECONDARY VALUE and TERTIARY VALUE are selected The status is normally Good Non Specific However in the case of a sensor failure or out of measurement range it turns to Bad or Uncertain For specifics refer to Table 8 9 Setting of signal damping for static pressure SP VALUE FTIME is parameter that set signal damping for static pressure signals The unit of the signal damping is second Determination of the range limit of static pressure signal When the static pressure signal exceeds the maximum working pressure MW
280. t unit This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms etc 1005 MODE_BLK AUTO AUTO The actual target permitted and normal modes of the block 1006 BLOCK_ERR This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block It is a bit string so that multiple errors may be shown 1007 RS_STATE State of the resource block state machine 8 1008 TEST_RW Null AUTO Read write test parameter used only for conformance testing and simulation 9 1009 DD_ RESOURCE Null String identifying the tag of the resource which contains the Device Description for this resource 10 1010 MANUFAC_ID 0x00594543 Manufacturer identification number used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource 11 1011 DEV_TYPE 14 Manufacturer s model number associated with the resource used by interface devices to locate the DD file for the resource 12 1012 DEV REV 1 Manufacturer revision number associated with the resource used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource 13 1013 DD REV 1 Revision of the DD associated with the resource used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource 14 1014 GRANT_DENY 0 AUTO Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating tuning and alarm parameters of the block 15 1015 HARD_TYPES Scalar input The types of hardware available as channel nu
281. target sets MODE_BLK actual to Auto 2 and MODE_BLK target to Cas TA0110 EPS The modes to which a PID block can transfer are limited to those set in MODE_BLK permitted and the priority levels of modes are as shown below In fact if Normal shed normal return is set for SHED_OPT detection of a computer failure causes MODE_BLK actual to change to Cas Auto or MAN whichever is set in MODE_BLK permitted and has the lowest priority level Lower priority level ROut gt Higher priority level RCas Cas Auto Man FA0105 EPS 2 Only when Auto is set as permitted mode A 50 APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK NOTE If a control block is connected as a cascade primary block of the PID block in question a mode transition of the PID block to Cas occurs in the following sequence due to initialization of the cascade connection RCas or ROut Auto Cas A5 18 Alarms There are two kinds of alarms generated by a PID block block and process alarms A5 18 1 Block Alarm BLOCK ALM The block alarm BLOCK ALM is generated upon occurrence of either of the following errors values set in BLOCK ERR and notifies the content of BLOCK ERR Value of BLOCK ERR Local Override Condition MODE BLK actual of PID block is LO IN status of the PID block is either of the following Bad Device Failure Bad Sensor Failure MODE BLK target of the PID block is O S TA0111 EPS Input Failure Out of
282. tatus of Outside _ Large Fluctuation of High Side LIN Lo Diagnosis Range is not shown in Low Side Blocking DIAG EHA High Side Blocking B Blocking Invalid Ref BIkF y Invalid Ref fSPh Invalid Ref fSPI Invalid Ref fDP Outside Diagnosis Range MM HEN Reflect Blockage to PV SV TV Status L1 9 ILBD parameters DIAG PERIOD Index 2084 180 DIAG LIM Index 2094 Record the values of parameters for ILBD DIAG LIM 1 3 000000 operations i tee en ere EIN a aie ad aie Wied dna dys ated eS rial ne E ee e Check the status of parameters for ILBD DIAGLIM 0 300000 operation DIAG_LIM 3 5 000000 DIAG_LIM 4 0 500000 Record the value after checked thatthe Bee PCD sae needa EE status of each parameter is GOOD L _DIAG_LIM 5 OPEL OCZNE 5 000000 DIAG_LIM 6 0 500000 DIAG_LIM 7 0 600000 DIAG_LIM 8 0 600000 DIAG_LIM 9 1 000000 DIAG_LIM 10 0 050000 DIAG_COUNT Index 2095 REFERENCE TIME Index 2096 16 22 55 876 01 31 2008 REFERENCE FDP Index 2097 7 43245e 9 REFERENCE FSPL Index 2098 7 25765e 9 REFERENCE FSPH Index 2099 7 18374e 9 REFERENCE DPAVG Index 2101 5 364248 VALUE TIME Index 2102 16 22 55 876 01 31 2008 VALUE FDP Index 2103 7 48562e 9 VALUE FSPL Index 2104 7 23277e 9 VALUE_FSPH Index 2105 7 14085e 9 VALUE_BLKF Index 2106 0 287259 VALUE_DPAVG Index 2107 0 055957 A 87 TA0811 2 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Checklist 3 5
283. ter addition will be used for the status applied to integration A2 3 2 Addition The following three options are available for addition TOTAL Adds two argument values as is FORWARD Adds two argument values regarding a negative value as 0 REVERSE Adds two argument values regarding a positive value as 0 You can choose these options using bit 2 and bit 3 of INTEG OPTS as follows Bit 2 of INTEG OPTS Bit 3 of INTEG OPTS Adder Options Flow Forward Flow Reverse H H TOTAL L E TOTAL H L FORWARD L H REVERSE TA0202 EPS The result of the adder is passed to the integrator If only one of the inputs is connected the value of a non connected input will be ignored When bit 7 of INTEG_OPTS Add zero if bad has been set if the status of a value after addition is Bad the value after addition increment becomes 0 A 12 IM 01C25R03 01E A2 4 Integrator APPENDIX 2 INTEGRATOR IT BLOCK When addition is complete its result will be passed to the integrator Integration consists of combinations of a reset method and counting up down There are the following seven integration types which can be set using INTEG_TYPE I 7 2 3 4 5 6 UP_AUTO UP_DEM DN AUTO DN DEM PERIODIC DEMAND PER amp DEM Counts up with automatic reset when TOTAL SP is reached Counts up with demand reset Counts down with automatic reset when zero is reached Counts down wi
284. th demand reset Counts up and is reset periodically according to CLOCK PER Counts up and is reset on demand Counts up and is reset periodically or on demand Each type of integration is independently run as a function There are the following four types of integrated values 1 2 4 Total Integrates the result of the adder as is ATotal Integrates the absolute value of the result of the adder RTotal Integrates the absolute value of the result of the adder only if the status of the result is Bad This value is used for the RTOTAL value AccTotal An extension function The result of the adder is integrated as is and will not be reset The value is used for the ACCUM_TOTAL expanded parameter value The table A2 1 shows the details of INTEG_TYPE Table A2 1 INTEG_TYPE Reset Trigger Reset if one of the Name Integration Method Integration Range following conditions is established Trip Output Counti Z OUT reaches TOTAL SP UP AUTO 1 GONE Up u e RESET IN 1 O Starting from 0 0 lt RTotal lt INF OP CMD INT 1 INF lt AccTotal lt INF m i INF lt Total lt INF Counting up 0 lt ATotal lt INF RESET_IN 1 UP_DEM 2 Starting from 0 0 lt RTotal lt INF OP CMD INT 1 O INF lt AccTotal lt INF Counting down w bc OUT reaches 0 DN AUTO Starting from uu RE a SNE RESET IN 21 O ih INF lt AccTotal NF OP CMD_INT 1 Counting down INF
285. the computation section 1 Flow compensation linear func PV xf f t_l t_2 2 Flow compensation square root func PV X f f sqrt t_l t_2 t_3 3 Flow compensation approximate expression func PV X f f sqrt t_1 X t_2 X t_3 X t_3 4 Quantity of heat calculation func PV X f f t_l t_2 5 Multiplication and division func PV X f f t_l t_2 t_3 6 Average calculation func PV t_l t_2 4 t_3 N where N number of inputs 7 Summation func PV t 1 t2 t 3 8 Polynomial computation func PV t_1 t_2 t_3 9 HTG level compensation func PV t 1 PV t 2 10 Polynomial computation func PV t_l X PV t_2 X PV t 3 X PV Precaution for computation Division by 0 If a value is divided by 0 the calculation result is interpreted as 10 and depending with core a plus sign is added to it Negative square root The square root of an absolute value is extracted and a minus sign is added to it APPENDIX 4 ARITHMETIC AR BLOCK A4 3 2 Compensated Values In computing equations 1 to 5 in A4 3 1 the value f is restricted by the COMP HI LIM or COMP LO LIM parameter In this case the value f is treated as follows If f gt COMP HI LIM f COMP HI LIM If f lt COMP LO LIM f COMP LO LIM A4 3 3 Average Calculation In computing equation 6 in A4 3 1 the average of input value is calculated Here it is necessary to obtain
286. the capacity of the field bus power supply used and the voltage at the terminal There was an error in a checksum or the number of transmission bytes Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the resource block and obtain the correct file The download tool does not allow download with same software revision Check the setting of the download tool The download takes far longer than expected or fails frequently The fieldbus segment is noisy Check the noise level on the fieldbus segment An error occurs after activation Transient error caused by the internal resetting of the field device Check whether communication with the field device has recovered after a while The new software does not work after the activation The file of the current revision was downloaded Obtain the correct file Failure of the memory in field device etc Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the resource block and re try downloading If fails place a service call TA0102 EPS A7 8 Resource Block s Parameters Relating to Software Download Table A7 3 Additional Parameters of Resource Block Relative Default Write e Index Parameter Name Description Index Factory Set Mode 53 1053 SOFTDWN PROTECT 0x01 Defines whether to accept software downloads 0x01 Unprotected 0x02 Protected 54 1054 SOFTDWN_FORMAT 0x01 Selects the software download method 0x01 Standard 55 1055 SOFTDWN_COUNT 0 Indicates the n
287. these three variables and sends signals to the AI function block and Flow transducer block Figure 6 1 presents the signal flow between blocks Sensor Transducer Block PRIMARY_VALUE DP Flow Transducer Block FLOW_VAL Channel5 Al Function Block Channel1 SECONDARY_VALUE SP H CHANNEL Channel2 TERITARY_VALUE SP L Al Channel3 EXT_TEMP_VAL Al Channel4 CAP_TEMP_VAL Al Channel AMP_TEMP_VAL Al Channel7 FLG_TEMP_VAL Channel8 F0601a EPS Figure 6 1 Signal Flow Diagram IM 01C25R03 01E 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS __ Simulation __ i value Pressure Range Adjust Damping Unit 1 i R I differential check ment processing check l PRIMARY_VALUE i pressure i Channel1 calculation Simulation value H side Sensor static gt SECONDARY VALUE signals Static Range Adjust N Damping Unit RZE Channel2 daio check ment processing check Lada i Calculation Static gt TERTIARY_VALUE Simulation pressure Crannaig value 7 RTD External 1 x A signals l gt temperature
288. this block and the flow calculation is performed based on these signals The result undergoes output processing e g damping and the flow signal is output to the AI function block 6 4 2 Block Mode The Block modes permitted for the FLOW transducer block are Automatic Auto and Out of Service O 5 Note that the Automatic mode cannot be set when option code A Multi Sensing is selected in the measurement function For normal operation select the Automatic mode To change important parameters the O S mode must be selected For details on how to identify parameters that can be changed in the Automatic mode and parameters that can be changed only in the O S mode see chapter 9 Parameter Lists 6 4 3 Calculation of the Flow The calculated flow value and status are stored to the FLOW_VALUE parameter For details on the flow calculation refer to EJX910A and EJX930A Multivari able Transmitters User s Manual IM 01C25R01 01E The update period of the flow calculation is 200 msec and the flow calculation is not updated when the operation mode is O S Note that the Automatic mode cannot be set when option code A Multi Sensing is selected in the measurement function There are two flow calculation modes Auto Compensation mode and Basic mode When flow calculation is performed in the Auto Compensation mode the calculation coefficient must be calculated by the dedicated setup tool and downloaded to the transmitter For details on th
289. tion Applies gain multiplication and bias addition to the calculated result to perform limitation processing for output The range extension function compensates the IN and IN LO input values when two devices with different ranges are connected to make smooth input switching A 36 IM 01C25R03 01E A4 2 Input Section There are five inputs IN and IN_LO main inputs and IN 1 IN_2 and IN 3 auxiliary inputs IN and IN LO are intended to connect devices with different measurement ranges and allow the use of switching a measurement range by selecting the measuring device However because there are slight differences between IN and IN LO values even when the same item is measured instantaneous switching causes abrupt changes in the output To prevent this phenomenon the Arithmetic block uses a function known as range extension to compensate the IN and IN LO values between RANGE HI and RANGE LO This enables the input to be switched smoothly The result of the range extension function is substituted into PV to be used for calculations A4 2 1 Main Inputs The range extension function determines the PV value in the following order 1 If IN z RANGE HI PV IN 2 If IN S RANGE LO gt PV IN LO 3 If RANGE HI gt IN gt RANGE LO gt PV g X IN 1 g X IN LO g IN RANGE LO RANGE HI RANGE LO RANGE HI and RANGE LO are threshold values for switching two main inputs seamlessly PV IN LO PV g x IN 1 g
290. to 75 C 58 to 167 F for T6 CSA Intrinsically Safe Approval 3 IECEx Flameproof Approval Applicable Standard IEC 60079 0 2004 IEC60079 1 2003 Certificate IECEx CSA 07 0008 IECEx Flameproof for Zone 1 Ex d IIC T6 T4 Enclosure IP66 and IP67 Scheme 2 Max Process Temp T4 120 C 248 F T5 100 C 212 F T6 85 C 185 F SF2 Amb Temp 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F for T4 50 to 80 C 58 to 176 F for T5 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F for T6 T1002_02 EPS 1 Applicable only for Australia New Zealand area Singapore and India 2 Applicable for electrical connection code 2 4 7 and 9 EJX910A 3 Pending lt Factory Setting gt Tag Number Tag plate Software Tag PD_TAG As specified in order FT1001 unless otherwise both Tag Number and Software Tag specified in order OxF5 unless otherwise specified in order BASIC or as specified Direct unless otherwise specified in order Node Address Operation Functional Class Primary value 1 Output Mode L TYPE Calibration Range XD_SCALE Lower Higher As specified in order Range Value Calibration Range Unit Selected from mmH2O mmH20 68 F mmHg Pa hPa kPa MPa mbar bar gf cm kgf cm inH2O inH2O 68 F inHg ftH2O ftH2O 68 F or psi Only one unit can be specified Output Scale OUT SCALE Lower Higher 0 to 100 unless otherwise specified Range Value So
291. to the above image 1 Set Stop to DIAG MODE 2 Change the unsuitable value of DIAG LIM corresponding to the each blockage detection Note Set to Calculation after setting the parameters DIAG LIM Threshold value Parameter 1 fdpmax Threshold to detect A Blocking by using RATIO FDP 2 fdpmin Threshold to detect B Blocking by using 2 RATIO_FDP 3 fsplmax Threshold to detect Large Fluctuation of Low Side by using RATIO_FSPL 4 fsplmin Threshold to detect Low Side Blocking by using RATIO_FSPL 5 fsphmax Threshold to detect Large Fluctuation of High Side by using RATIO_FSPH Threshold to detect High Side Blocking by using RATIO_FSPH 7 blkfmax Threshold to detect High Side Blocking by using VALUE BLKF Threshold to detect Low Side Blocking by using VALUE BLKF 6 fsphmin 8 blkfmin TA0809 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E E Sampling Period If fluctuating around the threshold value an alarm may be often generated When the above phenomenon happens the sampling time DIAG_PERIOD can be changed as as to enhance the accuracy of the blockage detection The longer the sampling time better the expected accuracy 1 Set Stop to DIAG_MODE 2 Enter the value to DIAG_PERIOD within the range of 20 to 65535 sec Note Set to Calculation after setting the parameters Also the accuracy can be improved by incr
292. ts Passive F0201 1 EPS I S fieldbus system complying with FISCO The criterion for such interconnection is that the voltage Ui the current Ii and the power Pi which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive must be equal or greater than the voltage Uo the current Io and the power Po which can be provided by the associated apparatus supply unit Po Pi Uo S Ui Io S Ii In addition the maximum unprotected residual capaci tance Ci and inductance Li of each apparatus other than the terminators connected to the fieldbus line must be equal or less than 5 nF and 10 pH respec tively Ci 5nF Li 10uH Supply unit The supply unit must be certified by a Notified body as FISCO model and following trapezoidal or rectangular output characteristic is used Uo 14 17 5 V L S maximum value Io based on spark test result or other assessment IM 01C25R03 01E No specification of Lo and Co is required on the certificate or label Cable The cable used to interconnect the devices needs to comply with the following parameters Loop resistance Re 15 150 Q km Inductance per unit length Lc 0 4 1 mH km Capacitance per unit length Cc 45 200 nF km Length of spur cable max 60 m IIC and IIB Length of trunk cable max I km IIC or 5 km IIB Terminators The terminator must be certified by a Notified body as FISCO model and at each end of the trunk cable an approved line terminator
293. ts in force in if Cas or RCas the Cas or RCas mode No OUT limits Disables the high low limits for OUT in the in Manual Man mode TA0108 EPS A5 14 Initialization and Manual Fallback IMan Initialization and manual fallback denotes a set of actions in which a PID block changes mode to IMan initialization and manual and suspends the control action Initialization and manual fallback takes place automatically as a means of abnormality handling when the following condition is met The quality component of BKCAL IN status is Bad OR The quality component of BKCAL_IN status is Good c AND The sub status component of BKCAL_IN status is FSA LO NI or IR The user cannot manually change the mode to IMan A mode transition to Man occurs only when the condition above is met APPENDIX 5 PID BLOCK A5 15 Manual Fallback Manual fallback denotes an action in which a PID block changes mode to Man and suspends the control action Manual fallback takes place automatically as a means of abnormality handling when the following condition is met N status is Bad except when the control action bypass is on To enable the manual fallback action to take place when the above condition is met Target to Manual if BAD IN must be specified beforehand in STATUS OPTS The table below shows the options in STATUS OPTS Options in STATUS OPTS IFS if BAD IN Description Sets the sub status
294. ucer Blockage alarm block gt Display on LCD 6 FA0801 EPS Figure A8 1 Functional Block Diagram of ILBD The following outputs are given for the ILBD results Table A8 1 List of Outputs for ILBD OUTPUT Parameter name OUT Block Al function block Remarks The result of blockage detection can be set to UNCERTAIN Non Specific if DIAG_OPTION has been set to indicate the alarm status RATIO_FDP VALUE_FSPH SENSOR Transuducer Block Parameters based on the fluctuation value and blockage degree COMP_FLG Non Compensation VALUE_FDP RATIO_FDP REFERENCE FDP a End VALUE FDP _ REFERENCE_DPAVG REFERENCE FDP VALUE DPAVG VALUE FSPL REFERENCE FSPL Blockage degree characterized in comparison of high pressure side and low pressure side pressure fluctuation value Average value of the sum of squares of differential pressure fluctuations Average value of the sum of squares of low pressure side static pressure fluctuation Average value of the sum of squares of high pressure side static pressure fluctuation DEVICE STATUS 7 Resource block When an impulse line blockage is detected the result of the blockage detection alarm status is indicated 4 DIAG ERR SENSOR When an impulse line blockage is detected the results of the blockage detection 4 Transducer block alarm status are indicated 5 DIAG H ALM SENSOR When an
295. uding final bit message to devices included in the monitoring live list sequentially and monitors the RT Return Token and final bit returned in reply to the PT 4 CD transmission Transmits a CD Compel Data message at the scheduled times 5 Time synchronization Supports periodic TD Time Distribution transmissions and transmissions of a reply to a CT Compel Time 6 Domain download Sets the schedule data server The schedule data can be equalized only when the Domain Download command is carried out from outside the LM in question The version of the schedule is usually monitored but no action takes place even when it changes 7 Live list equalization Transmits SPDU messages to LMs to equalize live lists 8 LAS transfer Transfers the right of being the LAS to another LM 9 Reading writing of See Section A6 5 NMIB for LM 10 Round Trip Delay Not yet supported in the current Reply RR version Reply to DLPDU 11 Long address Not yet supported in the current version TA0204 EPS A 55 APPENDIX 6 LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 6 LINK MASTER FUNCTIONS A6 5 LM Parameters A6 5 1 LM Parameter List The tables below show LM parameters Meanings of Access column entries RW read write possible R read only jen Param
296. ue of a valid input with the smallest input number is output If SELECT_TYPE is MINIMUM oes gt Not writable The minimum value among the values of the valid inputs is output If SELECT_TYPE is MAXIMUM Not writable The maximum value among the values of the valid inputs is output If SELECT_TYPE is MIDDLE There is an even multiple number of valid inputs E Not writable Because two inputs are positioned in the middle of the values of even multiple valid inputs the average of the values of these two inputs is output If SELECT_TYPE is MIDDLE There is an odd multiple number of valid inputs Not writable The value of the input positioned in the middle of the values of odd multiple valid inputs is output If SELECT_TYPE is AVERAGE Not writable The value obtained by dividing the added value of the values of valid inputs by the number of these inputs is output If SELECT TYPE is Latched Good A Not writable The value of a valid input with the smallest input number is output TA0304 EPS Table A3 4 Condition and Mode Condition Listed in priority sequence Mode If the Actual is in O S O S If the Uncertain if Man mode bit in STATUS_OPTS is set and the Actual is in Man Man If the Uncertain if Man mode bit in STATUS_OPTS is not set and the Actual is in Man Man Values speci
297. ue to TOTAL_SP and PRE_TRIP and generates discrete output signals OUT_TRIP or OUT_PTRIP when the limits are reached The output is as represented by the following equation for counting upward and rate conversion OUT Value Integration start value Total Total Total Current Integral Current Integral x y X At x IN_1 value whose unit has been converted y IN_2 value whose unit has been converted At block execution period A2 1 Schematic Diagram of Integrator Block The following shows the schematic diagram of the Integrator block INTEG_OPTS INPUT TYPE e TIME UNIT1 INTEG TYPE E INTEG OPTS QUALITY IN 1 Convert Rate GOOD LIM orwar UNCERT LIM Convert Accum x INTEG_OPTS I FROW TYPE CLOCK_PER REV_FLOW1 Og VAL1 O Integrate gt O N_RESET INTEG_OPTS OUT INPUT TYPE TOTAL RTOTAL 9 TIME_UNIT2 1 PRE_TRIP Convert Rate INTEG_OPTS 9 IN_2 CARRY OUT_PTRIP Convert Accum rd QD oP_CMD_INT UNIT CONV RESET REV_FLOW2 PULSE_VAL2 OUT TRIP o RESET_IN o RESET_CONFIRM 56 FA0201 EPS Figure A2 1 Integrator Block IN 1 Block input I value and status IN 2 Block input 2 value and status REV FLOWI Indicates whether the sign of IN 1 is reversed It is a discrete signal REV FLOW2 Indicates whether the sign of IN 2 is reversed It is a discrete signal RESET IN Resets the integrated values It is a discrete signal RESET CONFIRM
298. umber of times the internal FlashROM was erased 56 1056 SOFTDWN ACT AREA 0 Indicates the ROM number of the currently working FlashROM 0 FlashROM 0 working 1 FlashROM 1 working 57 1057 SOFTDWN MOD REV 1 0 0 0 0 0 Indicates the software module revision 0 0 0 58 1058 SOFTDWN ERROR 0 Indicates an error during a software download See Table 4 A 64 TA0103 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX 7 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD Table A7 4 Download Error Codes Error Code Detail 0 No error 32768 Unsupported header version 32769 Abnormal header size 32770 Abnormal manufacturer ID 32771 Abnormal device family 32772 Abnormal device revision 32773 Abnormal vendor specification version 32774 32775 Abnormal number of bytes in module 1 32776 Abnormal number of bytes in module 2 32777 Device error in module 1 32778 Checksum error in module 1 32779 Checksum error in file 32780 Unused 32781 Write prohibited area in FlashROM 32782 Verification error during FlashROM writing 32783 Polling error during FlashROM erasing 32784 Polling time out during FlashROM erasing 32785 Polling error during FlashROM writing 32786 Polling time out during FlashROM writing 32787 FlashROM driver undefined number error 32788 File endcode error 32789 File type error UPDATE ORIGINAL 32790 FlashROM driver undefined
299. uments l Passive R d F0207 EPS I S fieldbus system complying with FISCO model Installation Diagram for Nonincendive Division 2 Installation Terminator LEE Rn el Io SUPPLY d Pressure 9 Transmittero OWE Sone ee i T Transmitter I gt 0 1 R AREN D eee O O Transmitter 4 Hazardous location Non Hazardous location FM Approved Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus Vt or Voc I I General Purpose E Equipment It or Isc 5 o Ca ACE s 2 F0208 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Note 1 Installation should be in accordance with the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Article 500 Note 2 The configuration of Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus must be FM Approved Note 3 Approved under FNICO Concept Note 4 Dust tight conduit seal must be used when installed in Class II and Class III environ ments Note 5 Associated Apparatus manufacturer s installa tion drawing must be followed when installing this apparatus Note 6 No revision to drawing without prior FM Approvals Note 7 Terminator must be FM Approved Note 8 The nonincendive field wiring circuit concept allows interconection of nonincendive field wiring apparatus with associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus using any of the wiring methods permitted for unclassified locations Note 9 Installation requirements Vmax Voc or Vt Imax
300. unication Type The Fieldbus communication type is based on the same silicon resonant sensing technology used in the HART communication type and is similar to the communica tion types in terms of basic performance and operation This manual describes only those topics that are required for operation of the Fieldbus communication type For information on the installation wiring and maintenance of EJX series pressure transmitters refer to the user s manual for each model E Regarding This Manual This manual should be passed on to the end user The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without Yokogawa s written permission Yokogawa makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual including but not limited to implied warranty of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose f any question arises or errors are found or if any information is missing from this manual please inform the nearest Yokogawa sales office The specifications covered by this manual are limited to those for the standard type under the specified model number break down and do not cover custom made instruments Please note that changes in the specifications construction or component parts of the instrument may not immediately be reflected in this manual at the time of change provided that postponement of revisions w
301. v Blockage detection for high pressure side Blockage detection for low pressure side FA0802 EPS Figure A8 2 Relation between Blockage Progress and VALUE_BLKF The each threshold value to detect the high or low pressure side blockage is set to DIAG_LIM 7 or 8 Bi Low Side Blocking Detection VALUE BLKF is preferentially used to Low Side Blocking detection If VALUE BLKF cannot be used RATIO FSPL SORT VALUE FSPL REFERENCE FSPL is used to Low Side Blocking detection REFERENCE FSPL is the average value of the sum of squares of low pressure side static pressure fluctuations under normal condition As the value of RATIO FSPL is below the value of DIAG_LIM 4 EJX gives an alarm of Low Side Blocking On the other hand if this value exceeds the value of DIAG_LIM 3 EJX gives an alarm of Large Fluctua tion of Low Side M High Side Blocking Detection VALUE BLKTF is preferentially used to High Side Blocking detection If VALUE BLKF cannot be used RATIO FSPH SQRT VALUE FSPH REFERENCE FSPH is used to High Side Blocking detection REFERENCE FSPH is the average value of the sum of squares of high pressure side static pressure fluctuations under normal condition As the value of RATIO FSPH is below the value of DIAG_LIM 6 EJX gives an alarm of High Side Blocking A 72 APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC On the other hand if this value exceeds the value of DIAG_LIM 5 EJX gives an alar
302. vices and to optimize existing field devices for your plant Figure A7 1 Concept of Software Downloading A7 2 Specifications Steady state current Max 15 mA Current Draw Steady state 15mA max Current Draw Software Download state 24mA max Current during FlashROM blanking time Max 24 mA additional to steady state current Based on Fieldbus Foundation Specification Download class Class 1 A NOTE Class 1 devices can continue the specified measurement and or control actions even while software is being downloaded to them Upon completion of a download however the devices will be reset internally to make the new down loaded software take effect and this will halt fieldbus communication and function block executions for about one minute A 61 Update Program New Diagnostics A7 3 Preparations for Software Downloading For software downloading you need to prepare the following Software download tool Software for downloading file for each of the target field devices For the software download tool use only a program developped for that purpose For details see the software s User s Manual For information about updates of software binary files for field devices and how to obtain them visit the following web site http www yokogawa com fld fld top en htm AA CAUTION Do not hook up the software download tool to a fieldbus segment while the plant is in operation as it may t
303. wed except to clear WRITE LOCK Block inputs will continue to be updated 35 1035 UPDATE EVT This alert is generated by any change to the static data 36 1036 BLOCK_ALM The block alarm is used for all configuration hardware connection failure or system problems in the block The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status if the subcode has changed 37 1037 ALARM SUM Enable The current alert status unacknowledged states unreported states and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block 38 1038 ACK OPTION OxFFFF AUTO Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged 39 1039 WRITE PRI 0 AUTO Priority of the alarm generated by clearing the write lock 40 1040 WRITE ALM This alert is generated if the write lock parameter is cleared 41 1041 ITK_VER 4 Version number of interoperability test by Fieldbus Foundation applied to EJX multivariable transmitter 42 1042 SOFT_REV EJX multivariable transmitter software revision number 43 1043 SOFT_DESC Yokogawa internal use 44 1044 SIM ENABLE MSG Null AUTO Software switch for simulation function 45 1045 DEVICE STATUS 1 O Device status For details refer to T
304. wever in the case of sensor failure or out of measurement range it turns to Bad or Uncertain For specifics refer to Table 8 9 Determination of the range limit of capsule tem perature The range of capsule temperature is from 40 to 120 C When the measured capsule temperature deviates from 50 to 130 C range set the status of CAP_TEMP_VAL to Uncertain Sensor Conversion not Accurate The status under normal conditions is Good Non Specific Also set the status of PRIMARY_ VALUE SECONDARY_VALUE and TERTIARY_ VALUE TO Uncertain Subnormal Determination of the range limit of amplifier temperature The range of amplifier temperature is from 40 to 120 C When the measured amplifier temperature deviates from 50 to 95 C range set the status of AMP_TEMP_VAL to Uncertain Sensor Conversion not Accurate The status under normal conditions is Good Non Specific 6 6 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS 6 3 8 Functions Relating to Flange Temperature option code DG1 Flange temperature value reference In FLG_TEMP_VAL it is possible to refer to the flange temperature value and status The update period of this value is about sec The temperature unit is selected by XD_SCALE unit of the AI block in which FLG_TEMP_VAL is selected The status is normally Good Non Specific However it turns to Bad or Uncertain when sensor failure happens For specifics refer to Table 8 9 For details of Flange Temperature refer to APPE
305. when the impulse line is plugged Therefore the reference value is required to determine the degree of reduction A IMPORTANT f the impulse line is about to be plugged at the time when a reference value is obtained blockages cannot be detected accurately The impulse lines on both the high pressure and low pressure sides need to be cleaned before a reference value is obtained All air bubbles need to be adequately purged before a reference value is obtained Reference values must be obtained under operating condition Do not obtain the reference values when the BLOCK MODE of SENSOR Transducer is OOS If carried out an alarm of Invalid Ref xx is generated M Start of Sampling The sampling of reference value is carried out for 180 sec which is the default value set to DIAG PERIOD 1 Confirm that the sampling period DIAG PERIOD is set to 180 sec 2 Set Reference to DIAG MODE The sampling starts soon after the setting A 79 APPENDIX 8 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC A IMPORTANT For the each parameter the one value is given If Reference is set to DIAG MODE again the value is updated and overwritten e f the power supply is shut down during the sampling DIAG MODE becomes Stop Set Reference to DIAG MODE in order to carry out the sampling again E End of Sampling After about 180 sec the sampling automatically finishes The Reference setting of DIAG MODE changes automatically to
306. wing cases 1 If there is no valid input 2 If the value of MIN_GOOD is greater than the number of valid inputs 3 If the input status is bad or uncertain when the value of OP SELECT is anything other than 0 with the exception of the case where the Uncertain as good bit in STATUS_OPTS is set 4 If the value of OP_SELECT is greater than 8 which is the maximum number of inputs 5 If the value is out of the SELECT_TYPE setting range when the value of OP_SELECT is zero As long as there is one valid input even an invalid input can be selected for OP_SELECT If the number of valid inputs is greater than the value of MIN_GOOD the number of the input including an invalid input specified by OP_SELECT will be stored in SELECTED Therefore even if an invalid input is selected SELECTED does not become zero If no input is selected for OP_SELECT the output of SELECTED will depend on SELECT_TYPE The Table A3 1 shows the value of SELECTED according to the number of valid inputs and SELECT_TYPE Table A3 1 Value of SELECTED According to Inputs Value of SELECTED Valid Inputs SELECT_TYPE MIDDLE SELECT_TYPE AVERAGE SELECT_TYPE First Good SELECT_TYPE MINIMUM MAXIMUM or Latched Good 0 zero 0 zero 0 zero 0 zero Multiple INs of IN witha smaller value of selected IN of selected IN 1 0 the average is ta
307. wnload Domain Header Indicates the index number of the domain header to which the download is Index performing 6 Activated Domain Header 4 Indicates the index numbers of the domain header currently running Index 7 Domain Name 8 Indicates the domain name With this product Domain Name indicates the field device name TA0110 EPS 3 DOMAIN_HEADER Sub Size EM iudex Element Bytes Description 1 Header Version Number 2 Indicates the version number of the header Header Size 2 Indicates the header size Manufacturer ID 6 Indicates the value of resource block s MANUFAC_ID manufacturer ID as character string data 4 Device Family 4 Indicates the device family With this product Device Family indicates the value of resource blocks DEV TYPE as character string data 5 Device Type 4 Indicates the value of resource blocks DEV TYPE as character string data 6 Device Revision 1 Indicates the value of resource blocks DEV REV 7 DD Revision 1 Indicates the value of resource blocks DD REV 8 Software Revision 8 Indicates the value of resource blocks SOFT REV 9 Software Name 8 Indicates the attribute of the binary file With this product Software Name indicates either of the following ORIGINAL followed by one space Original file UPDATE followed by two spaces Update file 10 Domain Name 8 Indicates the domain name With this product Domain Name indicates the field device name TA0111 EPS A 68 IM 01C25R03 01E APPENDIX
308. x80000000 Display through DD Diff Pressure outside Range Description Input Pressure is outside measurement range limit of outside Range Limit AL 10 capsule 0x40000000 Static Pressure Static Pressure exceeds limit outside Range Limit AL 11 0x20000000 Capsule Temp Capsule Temperature is out of range Al is not ready AL 20 Limit AL 12 0x10000000 Amp Temp Amplifier Temperature is out outside Range of range Limit AL 13 0x08000000 External Temp External temperature is out outside Range of range Limit AL 14 0x00008000 The execution of AI1 is not ready 0x00004000 0x00002000 Al1 Non Scheduled AL 21 AI2 Non Scheduled AL 22 Al1 block is not scheduled AI2 block is not scheduled 0x00001000 AI3 Non Scheduled AL 23 AI3 block is not scheduled 0x00000800 Al4 Non Scheduled AL 24 Al4 block is not scheduled 0x00000400 AI5 Non Scheduled AL 25 AI5 block is not scheduled T0803 EPS 8 DEVICE INFORMATION Table 8 4 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_4 index 1048 Display M Hexadecimal through DD Description 0x80000000 Al1 Hi Hi Alarm Hi Hi Alarm occurs in Al1 occurs AL 30 Function block 0x40000000 AI1 Lo Lo Alarm Lo Lo Alarm occurs in Al1 occurs AL 30 Function block 0x20000000 Al2 Hi Hi Alarm Hi Hi Alarm occurs in Al2 occurs
309. y OUT D SEL occur OUT D status is linked OUT status OUT D value can be written the value form O to 15 when block mode is O S or MAN mode The OUT D SEL options are shown below High High Alarm 1 OUT D value will be 1 when HI HI alarm occurs OUT D value will be 1 when HI alarm occurs Low Low Alarm 4 OUT D value will be 1 when LO LO alarm occurs OUT D value will be 1 when LO alarm occurs High Alarm 2 Low Alarm 8 Alarms LO LO LO HI HI HI 0 Disable MODE_BLK Actual F0608 EPS Figure 6 5 Diagram of the Al Functional Block 6 14 IM 01C25R03 01E 6 EXPLANATION OF BASIC ITEMS ALARM_OPTS HI_HI HI LO LO HI HIHI LO_LO A case of HI and LO LO options are selected HI_HI_LIM HI_HI_LIM OUT_D value 0 OUT_D value 1 E R OUT D value 1 OUT D value 1 jOUT_Dvalue 1 F0610 EPS Figure 6 6 An Example of OUT D value 6 6 6 Basic Parameters of the Al Block Parameter Outline OUT Shows output value and status When the Block mode is Man and O S the value is held SIMULATE Used for simulation It sets the value and status arbitrarily from the transducer Use this parameter for loop checking Refer to 7 3 Simulation Function XD SCALE Sets the range of inputs from the transducer block that corresponds to 0 and 100 in the Al function block Also sets the unit of the range inputs values that corresp
310. y through DD Pressure Sensor Failure 1 AL 01 Description Pressure Sensor problem 0x40000000 Pressure Sensor Failure 2 AL 01 Pressure Sensor problem 0x20000000 Pressure Sensor Failure 3 AL 01 Pressure Sensor problem 0x10000000 Pressure Sensor Failure 4 AL 01 Pressure Sensor problem 0x08000000 Capsule Temp Sensor Failure AL 01 Capsule Temperature Sensor problem 0x04000000 Capsule EEPROM Failure 1 AL 01 Capsule memory problem 0x02000000 Capsule EEPROM Failure 2 AL 01 Capsule memory problem 0x00800000 Amp Temp Sensor Failure AL 02 Amplifier Temperature Sensor problem 0x00400000 Amp EEPROM Failure 1 AL 02 Amplifier memory problem 0x00200000 Amp EEPROM Failure 2 AL 02 Amplifier memory problem 0x00100000 CPU Board Failure 1 AL 02 Amplifier problem 0x00080000 CPU Board Failure 2 AL 02 Amplifier problem 0x00040000 CPU Board Failure 3 AL 02 Amplifier problem 0x00020000 CPU Board Failure 4 AL 02 Amplifier problem 0x00008000 CPU Board Failure 5 AL 02 Amplifier problem 0x00004000 CPU Board Failure 6 AL 02 Amplifier problem 0x00000800 External Temp Sensor Failure AL 03 External temperature sensor disconnection 8 1 T0802 EPS IM 01C25R03 01E Table 8 3 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_3 index 1047 Hexadecimal 0
311. y5 which will be available when Custom is selected at UNIT SEL5 47 2547 EXP_MODE5 0 O S Selection of the displayed value in exponent such as x1 x10 x100 and x1000 48 2548 BLOCK_TAG6 Null z Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on display6 49 2549 PARAMETER_ 4108 O S Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display6 SEL6 Select a parameter from Table 6 1 50 2550 DISPLAY_TAG6 Null O S Name of block tag to be displayed on display6 up to six alphanumeric plus a slash and a period 51 2551 UNIT SEL6 O Auto O S Selection of unit to be displayed The unit of the parameter which is selected at PARAMETER SEL6 will be displayed when Auto is selected user specified unit at DISPLAY UNIT6 will be displayed when Custom is selected 52 2552 DISPLAY UNIT6 Null O S User specified unit to be displayed on display6 which will be available when Custom is selected at UNIT SEL6 53 2553 EXP_MODE6 0 O S Selection of the displayed value in exponent such as x1 x10 x100 and x1000 54 2554 BLOCK TAG7 Null Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on display7 55 2555 PARAMETER_ 4208 O S Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display7 SEL7 Select a parameter from Table 6 1 56 2556 DISPLAY_TAG7 Null O S Name of block tag to be displayed on display 7 up to six alphanumeric plus a slash and a period 57 2557 UNIT_SEL7 0 Auto O S Selection of unit to be displayed The unit of th

EJX910A and EJX930A Fieldbus Communication Type

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents